Lot 2 - SS - Section 6 Requirements - Final - Rev1 PDF

Section VI.
Requirements
Part 2 - Employer’s Requirements
Section VI. Requirements
Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Lot 2 - Substations
Lot 2 - SS - section 6 requirements_final_rev1
Table of Contents Page
SCOPE OF SUPPLY OF PLANT AND INSTALLATION SERVICES BY THE

CONTRACTOR 1
1. General 1
1.1 Financing and goals of the project 1
1.2 Works to be carried out 1
1.3 Limits of works 4
1.3.1 Transmission line - Substations 4
1.3.2 Substations 5
1.4 Contractor’s obligation to collect project relevant data 5
2. Kigoma Substation 6
2.1 Site description 6
2.2 Scope of work 6
2.2.1 110 kV electrical equipment 7
2.2.2 Civil works 8
2.2.3 Protection equipment 8
2.2.4 Adaptation of the control system 8
2.2.5 Auxiliary power supply 8
3. Gisagara substation 9
3.2 Scope of work 11
3.2.1 Electrical equipment 220 kV 12
3.2.2 Civil works 13
3.2.3 Protections 13
3.2.4 Substation control system 13
3.2.5 Auxiliary/earthing transformer 13
3.2.6 Auxiliary equipment 14
3.2.7 30 kV switchgear 14
3.3 Connection to the 30 kV local network 14
4. Ngozi substation 16
4.2 Scope of works 17
4.2.1 General layout 17
4.2.2 30 kV switchgear 18
4.3 Connection to the 30 kV local network 18
4.4 Earthing transformer 18
5. Gitega substation 20
5.2 Scope of work 21
5.3 Methodology 22
5.3.1 General 22
5.3.2 Utilization of the new line bay 22
5.3.3 Diverting of the busbars 23
5.3.4 Working during outage 23
5.4 110 kV electrical equipment 24

Lot 2 - Substations
5.4.2 Civil works 24

5.4.3 Protections 25
5.4.4 Adaptation of the control equipment 25
5.4.5 Auxiliary equipment 25
6. Time schedule 26
SPECIFICATIONS 27
1. General requirements 27
1.1 Reference to other chapters and specifications 27
1.2 Works in existing installations 27
1.3 Cooperation with other Contractors 27
1.4 Access to the site 27
1.5 Site conditions and design criteria 28
1.5.1 General operating conditions 28
1.5.2 Climatic, electrical and mechanical conditions 28
1.5.3 Applicable standards and norms 29
1.5.4 General soil characteristics 32
1.5.5 Environmental, social and HS requirements 32
1.6 Safety measures 34
1.6.1 Generals 34
1.6.2 Safety plan 35
1.7 General coordination 35
1.7.1 General 35
1.7.2 Employer's use of Contractor's temporary works 35
1.7.3 Assistance to the Consultant's staff and to other contractors 35
1.7.4 Disagreement and dispute mitigation with other contractors 36
1.8 Transport for the Employer's and the Consultant's staff 36
1.9 Drawings supplied to the contractor 38
1.9.1 Tender drawings 38
1.9.2 Schedule for issuance of drawings 38
1.9.3 Checking of drawings 38
1.9.4 Diagrammatic mechanical, electrical drawings 39
1.10 Design and drawings to be carried out by the contractor 39
1.10.1 Design calculations 39
1.10.2 Drawings 40
1.11 Submission and approval 42
1.12 Ownership of drawings and data 44
1.13 Layout of work and surveys 44
1.13.1 Reference points, lines and levels 44
1.13.2 Lines and levels of reference for erection of equipment by others 44
1.14 Quality for electrical equipment 44
1.14.1 Quality assurance and quality control programme 44
1.14.2 Quality plan 45
1.15 Approval of materials and equipment 46
1.15.1 General 46
1.15.2 Submission of samples and data 47
1.16 Assembly marking 47
1.17 Quality of design, materials and manufacture 47

Lot 2 - Substations
1.18 Quality assurance and quality control programme for the electrical equipment 47
1.18.1 Introduction 47
1.18.2 Test program 48
1.18.3 Level of criticality and control 48
1.18.4 Non-conformity 48
1.18.5 Documentation 49
1.18.6 Submittal of Contractor’s documents 49
1.19 Assembly during manufacture 51
1.20 Packing, storage and identification 51
1.20.1 Packing for transport 51
1.20.2 Check on arrival at site 51
1.20.3 Storage facilities on site 51
1.20.4 Protection of equipment 51
1.20.5 Packing Material 52
1.20.6 Packages 52
1.20.7 Inspection prior to dispatch 52
1.21 Inspection and tests 52
1.22 Workshop inspection and tests 53
1.23 Inspections and Tests during Erection and Commissioning 53
1.23.1 General 53
1.23.2 Substation Material 54
1.23.3 Electrical Equipment 55
1.23.4 Control and Monitoring Equipment 56
1.23.5 Telecommunication Equipment 56
1.24 Labels and colours for equipment 57
1.24.1 Warning notices 57
1.24.2 Nameplates 58
1.24.3 Colours 58
1.25 Maintenance equipment and spare parts 58
1.26 Site facilities 59
1.26.1 General 59
1.26.2 Land for labour camps and staff residences 59
1.26.3 Area for storage, stocking area and workshop 60
1.26.4 Access to working area 60
1.26.5 Site office for the consultant and employer 60
1.26.6 Lighting 60
1.26.7 Housing facilities 61
1.26.8 Water supply 61
1.26.9 Lifting and transportation equipment 62
1.27 Telephone and communications 62
1.28 Sewerage & Sanitation 62
1.29 Solid wastes 63
1.30 Power supply 63
1.31 Meetings 63
1.31.1 Kick-off meeting 63
1.31.2 Other meetings 64
1.32 Progress report 64
1.33 Operation and maintenance manuals 65
1.33.1 General 65

Lot 2 - Substations
1.33.2 Format and compilation 65

1.33.3 Detailed instructions content 66
1.34 As Built drawings – Record drawings 67
1.35 Training and technical assistance 67
1.35.1 Overseas professional training 67
1.35.2 Hands on site Training for Operation and Maintenance 69
1.35.3 Job site training 69
1.36 Site rehabilitation 70
1.37 Documents to be supplied by the contractor 71
2. Design basic data 73
2.1 Temperatures, wind, humidity, keraunic level 73
2.2 Pollution level 73
2.3 Altitude of the different substations 73
2.4 Earthquakes 74
2.5 Other conceptual data 74
2.5.1 Norms and standards 74
2.5.2 Short circuit currents 76
2.5.3 Isolation level 76
2.6 Neutral point connection 77
2.6.1 220 kV neutral point 77
2.6.2 30 kV neutral point 77
2.6.3 LV neutral point 77
2.7 Voltage change 77
3. Clearances in the substations 79
4. 110 and 220 kV equipment 80
4.1 General 80
4.2 Circuit Breakers 81
4.2.1 General specifications 81
4.2.2 Particular requirements 83
4.2.3 Spare parts and tools 84
4.3 Disconnectors 85
4.3.1 General Specifications 85
4.3.2 Particular requirements 86
4.3.3 Spare parts 87
4.4 Current transformer 87
4.4.1 Nominal current 88
4.4.2 Accuracy class 88
4.4.3 Power burden 88
4.4.4 Rated continuous thermal current 89
4.4.5 Specifications 89
4.5 Voltage transformers 89
4.5.1 Definition and general condition 90
4.6 Surge Arrestors 91
4.6.1 General conditions 91
4.6.2 Surge arrestors characteristics 91

Lot 2 - Substations

4.7 220 kV Bus bar 91
4.7.1 General 91
4.7.2 Disposition 92
4.7.3 Conductors 92
4.7.4 Ground wire 93
4.7.5 Insulator strings 94
5. Power Transformers 96
5.1 Transformer operating voltage 96
5.2 Specific characteristics 96
5.3 Voltage Change (110 to 220 kV) 97
5.4 General characteristics 97
5.4.1 Windings 98
5.4.2 Magnetic circuit 99
5.4.3 Transformer tank 99
5.4.4 Terminal 100
5.4.5 Instrument transformers 101
5.4.6 Cooling ONAN 101
5.4.7 On-Load Tap Changer 102
5.4.8 Parallel operation and voltage regulation 104
5.4.9 Auxiliary drive characteristics 104
5.4.10 Transformer Oil 104
5.4.11 Oil conservator 105
5.4.12 Piping and valves 105
5.4.13 Measurement and protection equipment 105
5.4.14 Control panels 106
5.4.15 Name plate 107
5.4.16 Painting and corrosion protection 108
5.4.17 Testing 109
5.4.18 Losses capitalization 110
5.4.19 Rejection of Transformers 110
5.5 Spare parts 111
6. 30 kV Switchgear 112
6.1 Construction characteristics 112
6.1.1 Construction details 112
6.1.2 Locking 113
6.1.3 Relay, instruments and wiring 113
6.1.4 Tagging 113
6.2 Characteristics of the equipment 113
6.2.1 Disconnectors and earthing switches 113
6.2.2 Circuit breakers 114
6.2.3 Instrument transformers 114
6.2.4 Protection 115
6.3 Electrical characteristics 115
6.4 Equipment of MV switchgears 115
6.4.1 30 kV power transformer incoming 115
6.4.2 Line feeder 116

Lot 2 - Substations
6.4.3 Auxiliary transformer Switchgear (Burundi) 116

7. Auxiliary Services 118
7.1 Auxiliary service supply 118
7.2 Auxiliary Transformer 118
7.2.1 Technical specification 118
7.2.2 General specification 119
7.2.4 Tests 120
7.3 AC Auxiliary services 120
7.4 DC Auxiliary services 121
7.4.1 Battery charger 121
7.4.2 Batteries 121
7.4.3 Battery and battery charger capacity 122
7.5 Emergency generator 122
7.5.1 Description 122
7.5.2 General 123
7.5.3 Diesel engine 123
7.5.4 Generator and excitation 124
7.5.5 Control equipment 125
8. Miscellaneous equipment 127
8.1 30 kV power cables 127
8.1.1 Technical specifications of power cables 127
8.1.2 Medium voltage cable terminations 127
8.1.3 Installation of cables between 30 kV switchgears and dead-end
towers 128
8.2 30 kV Surge arrestors 128
8.2.1 Standards 128
8.2.2 Characteristics and construction 129
8.3 Approach cable (OPGW) 129
8.4 Low voltage cables 130
9. Protection 131
9.1 General 131
9.1.1 General requirements 131
9.1.2 Protection of 220 kV OHL (operated in 110 kV) 134
9.1.3 Protection of the 110 kV RN1 line in Gitega 135
9.1.4 Protection coordination study 135
9.1.5 Bay protection functions 135
9.1.6 Engineering Workstation 136
9.1.7 Current and voltage transformer requirements 136
9.1.8 Auto-reclosing concept 137
9.1.9 Testing facilities, indications 137
9.1.10 Auxiliary supply 138
9.1.11 Compliance with Standards and requested type test 139
9.1.12 Factory acceptance tests 140
9.1.13 Commissioning tests 140

Lot 2 - Substations
9.1.14 Tripping Circuits and supervision of tripping circuits 141

9.2 220 kV Line protection 142
9.2.1 Main 1 Line Protection 142
9.2.3 Back-up Protection 142
9.2.4 Line bay protection summary 142
9.2.5 General Requirements for Main Protection 1 and 2 143
9.2.7 Main Distance Function Protections 1 or 2 145
9.2.8 Backup Protection 147
9.2.9 Autoreclosing relay 220 KV 147
9.3 Busbar and circuit breaker failure protection 220 kV 148
9.4 110 kV Line protection 149
9.4.1 Main Distance Protections 110 kV Main 1 and Main 2 150
9.4.2 Backup Protection 152
9.4.3 Autoreclosing relay 110 kV 152
9.5 Busbar and circuit breaker failure protection 110 kV 153
9.6 Transformer Protection 220 kV and 110kV 155
9.6.1 Transformer bay protection summary 155
9.6.2 Differential Function (Main Protection) 156
9.6.3 Other transformer protections 157
9.7 Protection of 30 kV feeders 157
9.7.1 General 157
9.7.2 Back-up Over-Current and Earth Fault Protection for feeder and
transformer feeder 158
9.7.3 Auto-Reclosing Equipment 30 KV for OHL 158
9.7.4 High Impedance Bus Bar Protection System for 30 kV 159
10. SCADA 160
10.1 General 160
10.1.1 Works included 160
10.1.2 Scope of work and supply 160
10.1.3 System description 166
10.1.4 Quality assurance 170
10.1.5 Submittals 170
10.2 Products, components and sub-assemblies 171
10.2.1 Manufacture 171
10.2.2 Special tools - Spare parts 183
10.3 Execution 183
10.3.1 Factory acceptance tests 183
10.3.2 Site acceptance tests 184
11. Telecommunications 185
11.1 General 185
11.1.1 Work included 185
11.1.2 Description 190
11.1.3 Quality assurance 190
11.1.4 Documents to be submitted 191
11.2 Product, components and sub-assemblies 191

Lot 2 - Substations
11.2.1 Optical fibre transmission equipment 191

11.2.2 Voice communication 199
11.2.3 Electromagnetic compatibility 201
11.2.4 Special tools – Spare parts 202
11.3 Production - Installation 202
11.3.1 Site acceptance tests 202
11.3.2 Test period 203
11.3.3 Provisional acceptance 203
12. Gantries and Supporting Structures 204
12.1 Design 204
12.2 Steel grade 204
12.3 Fasteners 205
12.4 Structure design 205
13. Earthing 206
13.1 General 206
13.2 Recommendations and norms 206
13.3 Technical specifications 206
13.3.1 General 206
13.3.2 Specific measures 207
13.3.3 Special provisions for the equipment 209
13.3.4 Circuit breakers 209
13.3.5 Surge arresters 209
13.3.6 Electromagnetic coupling 209
14. Civil Works and Outdoor Facilities 210
14.1 General 210
14.1.1 Work Included 210
14.1.2 Quality Assurance - Standard and Regulation 210
14.1.3 Design and Submittals 211
14.2 Survey and General Layout of Sites 213
14.2.1 Preparation and Earthworks 214
14.2.2 Crushed Rock Surfacing 215
14.3 Roads 215
14.3.1 General 215
14.3.2 Coarse aggregates for base layer 216
14.3.3 Surface layer 216
14.3.4 Road Shoulder 216
14.3.5 Stone Kerb 217
14.3.6 Bitumen Seal 217
14.3.7 Precast Concrete Pipes or Culverts 217
14.4 Civil works for power transformer 218
14.4.1 Transformer pit 218
14.4.2 Transformer oil separator 218
14.5 Wall, Fencing and Gates 219
14.5.1 General 219
14.5.2 Anti-Intruder Chain Link Fences 219
14.5.3 Gates 219

Lot 2 - Substations
14.6 Storm Water Drains 220

14.6.1 General 220
14.6.2 Design Criteria 220
14.7 Concrete and Associated Works 220
14.7.1 Composition of Concrete 221
14.7.2 Fine Aggregate 222
14.7.3 Admixture 222
14.7.4 Water 223
14.7.5 Steel Reinforcement 223
14.7.6 Formwork 223
14.7.7 Batching and Mixing 224
14.7.8 Dewatering 224
14.7.9 Placing of Concrete 224
14.7.10 Concrete Construction Tolerance 225
14.7.11 Repair of Concrete 225
14.7.12 Curing 225
14.7.13 Tests 225
14.8 Cable ducts 226
15. Buildings 227
15.1 General 227
15.2 Doors, windows, glazing 228
15.3 Masonry and finishing works 228
15.3.1 General 228
15.3.2 Mortar and Plaster 228
15.3.3 Erection 229
15.4 Floor and cables duct 229
15.4.1 Floor Tiles 229
15.4.2 Organization of cables ducts 230
15.5 Cement plasters 230
15.6 Painting 231
15.7 Sanitary fixtures 232
15.8 Roof covering 233
15.9 False ceilings 233
15.10 Workmanship 234
15.11 Drinking Water and Sewage 234
15.11.1 Borehole 235
15.11.2 Buffer tank 235
15.11.3 Production equipment and distribution of drinking water 235
15.11.4 Wastewater treatment 236
15.11.5 Testing 236
15.11.6 Special tools and spare parts 237
15.12 Air Conditioning and Ventilation 237
15.13 Furniture and miscellaneous equipment's 238
15.13.1 Control building 238
15.13.2 Guard house 239
15.13.3 Housings (Gisagara) 239
15.14 Miscellaneous materials and tools 241
15.15 Piping Work 243

Lot 2 - Substations
15.16 Landscaping 245

FORMS AND PROCEDURES 246
Form of Completion Certificate 246
Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate 247
Change Order Procedure and Forms 248
Annex CO-1. Request for Change Proposal 250
Annex CO-2. Estimate for Change Proposal 252
Annex CO-3. Acceptance of Estimate 254
Annex CO-4. Change Proposal 255
Annex CO-5. Change Order 258
Annex CO-6. Pending Agreement Change Order 259
Annex CO-7. Application for Change Proposal 260
DRAWINGS 261
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION 262
ANNEXES 263
List of Annexes
Annex 1-1 Kigoma single line diagram

Annex 1-2 Kigoma substation
Annex 2-1 Gisagara single line diagram
Annex 2-2 Gisagara substation
Annex 3-1 Ngozi single line diagram
Annex 3-2 Ngozi substation
Annex 3-3 Connection to 30 kV grid at Ngozi
Annex 3-4 30 kV line pole at Ngozi
Annex 4-1 single line diagram Gitega
Annex 4-2 Existing Gitega substation
Annex 4-3 Gitega substation (project)
Annex 4-4 Connection at 110 kV Gitega substation
Annex 4-5 Main characteristics of the existing equipment at Gitega substation
Annex 4-6 Single line diagram of the existing Gitega substation
Annex 5 Sections of Gisagara and Ngozi substations
Annex 6 Control building
Annex 7 Personnel housing
Annex 8 Guard house
Annex 9: Kigoma substation layout
Annex 10 Soil investigation report
Annex 11 220 kV Tension string
Annex 12 Not Applicable
Annex 13 Not Applicable
Annex 14 Updated Environment and Social Management Plan (UESMP) and SEP

Lot 2 - Substations
Section VI. Requirements Page VI-1
SCOPE OF SUPPLY OF PLANT AND INSTAL-

LATION SERVICES BY THE CONTRACTOR
1. General
1.1 Financing and goals of the project
The respective governments of Rwanda and Burundi, intend to build transport lines of electrical ener-
1
gy at 220 kV, one circuit, from Kigoma via Gisagara (both in Rwanda) to Gitega via Ngozi (both in Bu-
rundi). The project comprises the construction of an overhead line approximate length 143 km as well
as the construction or extension of 4 substations at Kigoma (extension), Gisagara, Ngozi and Gitega
(extension).
This project falls under the regional programme of interconnection of five countries of the great lakes,
namely Burundi, Rwanda, Kenya, the Democratic republic of Congo as well as Uganda. The project
will be financed jointly by the Government of the Federal Republic of Germany and the European Un-
ion via Kreditanstalt für Wiederaufbau (KfW), which is the German development bank. The project will
ensure the interconnection of Rwanda and Burundi. It thus envisages to increase the capacity of the
network and will facilitate the exploitation while increasing the reliability of transport and distribution of
electrical energy in the area. The project tends to improve the socio-economic living conditions of the
inhabitants and to accelerate the development in the area while making electricity reliable and acces-
sible.
1.2 Works to be carried out
The project is divided into 2 lots, overhead line and substations, each being furthermore divided into 2
sub-lots according to the country with the following works:
Table 1: Lot 1 220 kV overhead line, single circuit
Work Financing source
Sub-lot 1R 63.2 km: Kigoma-Gisagara- Burundi Bor- KfW Entwicklungsbank,

(Rwanda) der
Sub-lot 1B 80.1 km: Rwanda Border -Ngozi-Gitega KfW and EU

(Burundi)
1
Some documents refer to Butare instead of Gisagara. Gisagara and Butare refer to the same city, the latter being the histor-
ical name.

Lot 2 - Substations
Table 2: Lot 2 110 kV and 220 kV substations (4)
Work Financing source
Lot 2R Kigoma (110 kV), and Gisagara KfW

(Rwanda) (220/110 kV) substations
Lot 2B Ngozi (220/110 kV) and Gitega (110 kV) KfW and EU
(Burundi) substations
The present specifications describe the works to be performed within the framework of lot 2R and 2B.
Although the document does not segregate these two sub-lots, the latter have to be considered as two
distinct projects. That is the reason why Bidders may quote for the one or both of them. Depending of
the result of the bid evaluation, the lots 2R and 2B might be awarded to one or two Bidders.
The new lines and substations will be designed and built for operation at 220 kV, however for the time
being they will operate at 110 kV. In 110 kV Gitega and Kigoma substations extension works will be
carried out on 110 kV system only. The change to 220 kV is conceived on the same plot via a future
step-up substation, and is beyond the framework of this project.
In Kigoma, the site of the future 220 kV substation is not yet defined, and the line will end in the exist-
ing 110 kV substation, which will be simply extended by an additional line bay.
The works to be performed are indicated on the following map:

Lot 2 - Substations
Figure 1: Project area (source Michelin)
Legend
++++ State boundary
 Substation in Rwanda
 Substation in Burundi
Transmission line in Rwanda
Transmission line in Burundi

Lot 2 - Substations
1.3 Limits of works
1.3.1 Transmission line - Substations
As the project involves overhead transmission lines as well as substations, the limits between both are
defined as per following sketch:
As usual, the physical boundary is the gantry of the substation, with following attribution:
Work Substation Overhead line

Dead-end tower X
Conductors down to the gantry, including dead-end clamp X
and insulator strings with adjustable spark gaps
OPGW/earthwire down to the gantry, including clamps X
Splice box including console X
Gantry X
Conductors from gantry X
Conductor jumpers X
Earthwire from gantry X
Optical cable from splice box; including splicing and commis- X
sioning
Fence X
Both contractors are requested to define well in advance the conditions of work for the OHL Contractor
inside the substation.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.3.2 Substations
As the projects foresees two substation lots, one in Rwanda (2R) and one in Burundi (2B), under the
assumption that the latter will be realized after the first one, the limits of works between the two sub-
lots 2R and 2B are defined as follows.
1.3.2.1 Rwandan part (2R):
No specific requirements.
1.3.2.2 Burundian part (2B)
The problem of compatibility regards the protection, the SCADA and the telecommunication systems.
Protections:
The Contractor in charge of the Burundian substation lot shall supply protection relays of the same
make as on the Rwandan part to ensure fully compatibility.
SCADA:
No special requirement.
Telecommunications
Equipment shall fulfil the IUT standards such as G707, G703 etc.
In general, the Contractor on the Burundian side shall be responsible of a full compatibility of its
equipment with the ones being installed or already installed in Rwanda.
1.4 Contractor’s obligation to collect project relevant data
All documents and/or data attached to these Employer's requirements are given for information only.
Bidders are required to collect and record all necessary data on site in order to provide fixed price. No
price or time modification shall be accepted for the sole reason of lack of information about the exist-
ing situation.
On another hand, Bidders are deemed to have seen on site all contingencies, any obstacles or facts
that could interfere with the Work or that could be needed for it even if not expressly covered in the
present Employer's requirements.

Lot 2 - Substations
2. Kigoma Substation
2.1 Site description
Currently, the station of Kigoma is a single busbar, air insulated 110/30 kV substation comprising of
the following bays:
• One 110/30 kV transformer bay

• Two 110 kV line bays, Kilinda and Gikondo
• Other bays are not functional
Currently, an extension to double busbar system is not possible and configuration with single busbar is
sufficient in the immediate future.
The site is represented on following Figure:
Figure 2: Overview of Kigoma substation
Space for the new bay to be built is on the right side on the above photograph.
2.2 Scope of work
As indicated above, 110 kV system in Kigoma substation will be extended.
The scope of works comprises of design, supply, delivery, erection, testing and commissioning of the
following:

Lot 2 - Substations
• New line bay “Gisagara” including new gantries as per Annex 9 (referred to as "new gantry 1 and
2")
• Protections of the new bay
• auxiliary power for the new bay equipment
• Modifications of local and remote protection, SCADA and telecommunication system
• Connection with the existing busbar
• Various outdoor works such as gravelling, lighting, extension of the cable trenches if necessary to
enable full functionality of new overhead line bay
A schematic layout of this substation is shown in Annex 1, while the layout of the outdoor switchyard is
shown on Annex 9.
The substation can be illustrated in the following way:
Figure 3: Key single line diagram - Kigoma substation
2.2.1 110 kV electrical equipment
The 110 kV line bay consists of:
• 3 110 kV surge arrestors

• 3 voltage transformers
• 1 line disconnector with earth switches on both sides
• current transformers as per protection requirements
• 1 circuit-breaker SF6 with single pole reclosure
• 1 busbar disconnector with earth switch.
• Columns, gantries, insulators, supporting structures etc. necessary for providing fully functional line
bay

Lot 2 - Substations
2.2.2 Civil works
The civil works consist in:
• Preparation of the bay

• Drainage
• Foundations for apparatus gantries and supporting structures
• Extension of the cable ducts
• Gravelling of the new bay
• Repairing of the fence on the Eastern side
It is important to note that REG will dismantle all equipment, chassis etc. above ground. The Contrac-
tor shall demolish all foundations or part of them that could impede the installation of the new equip-
ment. This applies especially to the existing transformer pit.
The Contractor shall replace the mesh wire fence on the complete Eastern side at the end of the
works. The existing poles may be reused after cleaning and painting, if they are found suitable.
2.2.3 Protection equipment
The detail of the services as well as the characteristics of the corresponding components are de-
scribed in chapter 9.
2.2.4 Adaptation of the control system
The new bay control equipment shall be installed in the existing substation control equipment accord-
ing to the specifications in chapter 10.
2.2.5 Auxiliary power supply
The existing AC/DC auxiliary power system shall be also utilized for supplying the new bay, taking es-
pecially into account the CB and switch drives and the outdoor lighting requirements.
To this purpose, the Contractor shall collect all necessary information concerning voltage levels and
consumers and shall submit detailed calculations for adaptation of the equipment.

Lot 2 - Substations
3. Gisagara substation
As already mentioned Gisagara substation will be a new one. It will be designed and constructed as
220 kV although it will be operated at 110 kV.
The substation plot coordinates are shown on the following figure:
Figure 4: Gisagara Substation Plot
The substation is important for the rural electrification of the area like for the university city of Gisaga-
ra. It will be located approximately 7 km east of downtown of Gisagara. A recently constructed 30 kV
line passes 3 km west of the substation location.

Lot 2 - Substations
The ground, located at an average altitude of 1733 m has the shape of a dome inclined in direction
NO-SE (parallel to the road). Significant excavation work will be necessary for levelling the plot.
The substation will be placed roughly within the plot shown in yellow. It could however be moved or
turned if a substantial savings in volume of work for cutting and filling can be achieved, subject to Em-
ployer’s approval.
New Gisagara substation will be designed as 220 kV substation and will be operated first at 110 kV.
For this reason, the transformer shall have two ratios, i.e. 220-110/30.
The surge arrestors shall be designed for 110 kV and shall be replaced by 220 kV ones when the sub-
station is upgraded to 220 kV.
Figure 5: Gisagara Substation Plot Overview

Lot 2 - Substations
The overhead lines from Kigoma and to Ngozi are oriented as par following profile excerpt:
Figure 6: Kigoma - Gisagara - Ngozi line profile at Gisagara substation
3.2 Scope of work
The scope of works for new Gisagara 220 kV substation comprises of design, supply, delivery, erec-
tion, testing and commissioning of the following:
• 1 no. 220 kV overhead line bay to Kigoma

• 1 no. 220 kV overhead line bay to Ngozi/Gitega
• 1 no. transformer bay, 20 MVA, 220-110/30 kV
• 1 single busbar system with measuring bay.
The single line diagram is shown on Annex 2-1.
As the substation is planned for extension at a later stage, especially with installation of a double bus-
bar, the substation shall be designed from the very beginning accordingly, while foreseeing enough
space for future disconnectors, additional busbars etc.
Although the terrain is rather uneven, it will be fully prepared by the Contractor in order to implement
the future bays with minimal modifications.
For more details, please refer to the general layout in Annex 2-2 and sections in Annex 5.
The control building shall be constructed according to Annex 6.
The new substation shall be integrated in the existing National Control Center at Gikondo/Kigali.

Lot 2 - Substations
3.2.1 Electrical equipment 220 kV
3.2.1.1 OHL bays
Each 220 kV line bay consists of:
• 3 nos. of 220 kV surge arrestors (to be delivered and stored only)

• 3 nos. of 110 kV surge arrestors, to be installed
• 3 nos. of voltage transformers (shall be dual voltage and switchable from 110 kV to 220 kV)
• 1 line disconnector with earth switches on both sides
• current transformers as per protection requirements
• 1 circuit-breaker SF6 with single pole reclosure
• Columns, gantries, insulators, supporting structures etc. necessary for providing fully functional line
bay
110 kV surge arrestors will be replaced by others when the substation is up[graded to 220 kV. For this
reason, the 220 kV surge arrestors shall be delivered as well and carefully stored at Gisagara substa-
tion. The different geometrical dimensions inside the substation, especially for the equipment supports
shall be suitable to both types. The foundations shall be designed and sized for both apparatuses as
well.
3.2.1.2 Transformer bay
The 220 kV transformer bay consists of:
• 3 220 kV surge arrestors (to be stored only)

• 3 110 kV surge arrestor as close as possible to the transformer (to be installed)
• 1 earthing switch
• 3 current transformers
• 1 circuit-breaker SF6 with three phase reclosure
110 kV surge arrestors will be replaced by others when the substation is upgraded to 220 kV. For this
reason, the 220 kV surge arrestors shall be delivered as well and carefully stored at Gisagara substa-
tion. The different geometrical dimensions inside the substation, especially for the equipment supports
shall be suitable to both types. The foundations shall be designed and sized for both apparatuses as
well.
3.2.1.3 Busbar
As already explained, a single busbar shall be installed, but enough space shall be foreseen for a fu-
ture extension to a double busbar, including space for required busbar disconnectors.
The busbars shall be equipped with three voltage transformers placed at the end of the busbar.

Lot 2 - Substations
3.2.2 Civil works
The civil works consists of:
• Preparation of the substation area

• Drainage
• Foundations for apparatuses, gantries and supporting structures
• Cable ducts
• Light and heavy duty roads
• Gravelling of the new bays
• Control building, according to Annex 6
• Personnel housings as per Annex 7
• Access road and parking
• Fence…
For the same reason as above, the foundation of the 110 kV surge arrestors shall be designed and
constructed taking into account requirements of future 220 kV ones.
3.2.3 Protections
scribed in Chapter 9.
3.2.4 Substation control system
This system shall comply with the specification detailed in Chapter 10.
3.2.5 Auxiliary/earthing transformer
Due to the coupling of the power transformer, the 30 kV neutral point has to be realized by the mean
of an earthing transformer, placed as close as possible to the power transformer with:
• 3 surge arrestors with discharge counter

• 1 current transformer on the zig-zag neutral point
• 1 current transformer on the Y neutral point,
The transformer itself shall be equipped as follows:
• DGPT relay or equivalent with two levels

• fully isolated cable plugs on the 30 kV side
• cable box on the secondary cable connection
The auxiliary/earthing transformer shall be of hermetically sealed type and placed above oil pit in order
to avoid any spillage due to oil leakage. This pit shall be either a compartment of the power transform-
er pit itself or separate, adjacent pit.
• Power: 315 kVA

• Ratio: 30/0,4 kV

Lot 2 - Substations
• Vector group: ZNyn11

• Ucc%: 4%
3.2.6 Auxiliary equipment
The auxiliary services shall be mainly run under following voltages:
• 230/400 V AC, 50 Hz
• 110 V DC
• 48 V DC
• Others, if necessary
3.2.7 30 kV switchgear
The secondary side of the power transformer shall be connected to the 30 kV network via a 30 kV in-
door GIS switchgear. Surge arrestors shall be provided on 30 kV side of the power transformer, how-
ever they shall not be mounted on the transformer itself.
This switchgear shall comprise of the following:
• 1 incoming transformer bay

• 2 overhead line bays to Gisagara
• 2 spare bays (line type)
• 1 measuring bay
3.3 Connection to the 30 kV local network
The existing 30 kV network shall be connected to the substation by the mean of a 30 kV double circuit
overhead line as loop-in and out (LILO) into the new Gisagara substation.
The limits of work between overhead line and substation contractors are:
Work Substation Overhead line

Dead-end tower X
Tension string X
Jumper X
Surge arrestors X
Cable including cable ends, fittings and mechanical protection X
Connection to the 30 kV switchgear terminals X
as shown on the following sketch (in red for the line contractor and blue for the substation one):

Lot 2 - Substations
Both contractors shall exchange all necessary data for proper coordination, however overall responsi-
bility for execution of these works remains with Substation contractor.
The cable shall be N2XSY 1x95 RM/16 mm².
The cables will be laid in pipes in the soil outside of the substation and in concrete ducts within the
substation.
The installation shall be done according to chapter 8.1.3.
The distance from the overhead line and the 30 kV switchgear is estimated to 220 m.

Lot 2 - Substations
4. Ngozi substation
Similary to Gisagara, this substation will be a new one. It will be designed for 220 kV although operat-
ed at 110 kV for the time being.
The site of the Ngozi substation is flat and therefore will not require large excavation works (refer to
figurebelow). It is located at an altitude of approximately 1659 m, near to the industrial zone. The co-
ordinates are S -2,887° and E 29,812 with a total of 25.000 m².
A new hotel has been built and is currently in exploitation in the immediate vicinity of the site of the fu-
ture station. This hotel named “Hotel Inarunyonga” Museum is localised at the gates of the town of
Ngozi.
Figure 7: Aerial view of the Ngozi substation area

Lot 2 - Substations
Figure 8: Ground view of the Ngozi substation plot
4.2 Scope of works
The Ngozi substation will be similar to Gisagara substation except the following:
• geometrical provision will be different, to take account of the ground and the local orientation to the
road
• 30 kV switchgear shall be equipped with additional bays in order to take the connection to the exist-
ing 30 kV network, as described hereunder (total of 8 bays, for details please refer Annex 3-1)
• auxiliary transformer shall be conventional type, vector group Dyn5.
• a guard house is necessary.
The new substation shall be integrated in the existing national RN1 control centre in Bujumbura.
As the Ngozi substation is situated near to town, no housing is envisaged for the personnel.
4.2.1 General layout
The design is almost identical to the Gisagara substation, the only differences being the position of the
access road to the plot.
For more details, please refer to the general layout in Annex 3-2 and sections in Annex 5.

Lot 2 - Substations
The control building shall be realized according to Annex 6 as well, while the guard house shall be
built as per Annex 8.
4.2.2 30 kV switchgear
The single line diagram is shown in Annex 3-1.
The secondary side of the power transformer shall be connected to the 30 kV network via a 30 kV in-
door GIS switchgear. Surge arrestors shall be shall be provided on 30 kV side of the power transform-
er; however, they shall not be mounted on the transformer itself.
This switchgear shall comprise of the following:
• 1 incoming transformer bay

• 2 incoming line bays from the existing 30 kV Ngozi substation
• 1 incoming line bay from Musasa
• 1 incoming line bay from Gashikanwa
• 1 auxiliary transformer bay
• 1 spare bay (line type)
• 1 measuring bay
4.3 Connection to the 30 kV local network
The scope comprises the loop-in into the 220 kV substation of the two 30 kV lines between the exist-
ing 30 kV Ngozi substation (same name but different substation) and Musaga and between the Ngozi
substation and Gashikanwa. Therefore, four (4) cable lines shall be installed.
Both overhead lines run in the neighbourhood of the 220 kV substation and shall be opened on the ex-
isting double angle pole as shown in Annex 3-3.
The cables will be laid along the road passing along the 220 kV substation in the direction of the
South.
The installation shall be done according to chapter 8.1.3.
The cable shall be N2XSY 1x95 RM/16 mm².
4.4 Earthing transformer
Due to the coupling of the power transformer, the neutral point has to be realized by the mean of an
earthing reactor, placed as close as possible to the power transformer with:
• 3 surge arrestors with discharge counter

• 1 current transformer on the zig-zag neutral point

Lot 2 - Substations
The reactor itself shall be equipped as follows:
• DGPT relay or equivalent with two levels

• fully isolated cable plugs on the 30 kV side
The auxiliary/earthing transformer shall be of hermetically sealed type and placed above oil pit in order
to avoid any spillage due to oil leakage. This pit shall be either a compartment of the power transform-
er pit itself or separate, adjacent pit.
The impedance shall be 31,15 Ω
The reactor shall be according to all requirements of Chapter 7.2 of the present specifications.

Lot 2 - Substations
5. Gitega substation
The existing Gitega substation shall be extended by the EPC Contractor.
At a later stage, the interconnection lines between Gitega and Rusumo Falls will be connected as well
to the 110 kV substation. These lines are beyond the scope of this Project.
Annex 4-2 shows the existing facilities, while Annex 4-3 shows the extents of required modifications.
It should be mentioned for information that the dead-end tower (provided by OHL Lot 1 Contractor) will
be equipped with additional cross-arms intended to reorient the incomer from 220 kV Kigoma-
Gisagara-Ngozi line towards the future 220 kV substation. Appendix 4-4 (Phase 1 Connection to the
110 kV substation) shows this tower as well as the station such as it will be in the future, after con-
struction of the 220 kV substation (within the framework of another Project).
The substation Contractor is required to define as soon as possible the exact position of the line bay to
allow the Lot 1 OHL Contractor to place the dead-end tower in the most appropriate manner.
At this first stage, the line will be connected to the new 110 kV busbar.
Figure 9: View of the location for future 110 kV substation

Lot 2 - Substations
5.2 Scope of work
As already advised, the extension of this substation will be realised in 110 kV only.
The existing substation is actually reduced to one combined line/transformer bay and shall be
equipped with a single busbar to be inserted between the line gantry and the existing transformer. This
extension requires opening the existing bay in two segregated bays, one line bay and one transformer
bay.
The new Ngozi line bay shall be connected to the busbar as well.
Lastly, the new busbar shall be long enough to ensure the future connecting of the new 220 kV sub-
station, which will be built in the very vicinity (not in the framework of this project).
Following works shall be performed:
• New 110 kV single busbar, including space for the future outgoing bay to the 220 kV substation
• Extension of the existing bay on the transformer side to a complete transformer bay, by addition of
a busbar disconnector
• Extension of the existing bay on the overhead line side to a complete line bay, by addition of one
circuit-breaker, one current transformer and a busbar disconnector (with earthing switch).
• Construction of a measuring bay consisting of 3 voltage transformers
• Construction of the new Ngozi line bay, as described hereunder
• Installation of the protection system, including modifications of existing local and remote systems
• Auxiliary services of the new bays
• Adaptation to the substation and to the national control and telecommunication system
• Re-arrangement of the earthwire system in particular of the 2 central gantries
• Cleaning of the existing equipment (dirt, rust, new bolts if necessary...)
• Miscellaneous outdoor works such as gravelling, lighting, cable duct extension if necessary…
The existing equipment shall be cleaned and refurbished (new bolts, LV connectors...) while the
dismantled equipment shall be cleaned and, if still usable, delivered to the Employer.
Broken or out of order equipment shall be disposed of by Substation EPC Contractor.
The following annexes provide more details about the works to be realized at Gitega substation:
• Annex 4-1 single line diagram Gitega

• Annex 4-2 Existing Gitega substation
• Annex 4-3 Gitega substation (project)
• Annex 4-4 Connection at 110 kV Gitega substation
• Annex 4-5 Main characteristics of the existing equipment at Gitega substation
• Annex 4-6 Single line diagram of the existing Gitega substation
As already advised, all documents and/or data attached to these Employer's requirements are given
for information only. Bidders are required to collect and record all necessary data on site in order to
provide fixed price. No price or time modification shall be accepted for the sole reason of lack of infor-
mation about the existing situation.

Lot 2 - Substations
On another hand, Bidders are deemed to have seen on site all contingencies, any obstacles or facts
that could interfere with the Work even if not expressly covered in the present Employer's require-
ments.
5.3 Methodology
5.3.1 General
The Gitega substation is actually at the end of the overhead line coming from Bujumbura (RN1).
Therefore, any opening, even short, of this line will deprive the region of electrical energy accordingly.
That is the reason why all possible measures to shorten the duration of the outages shall be taken.
Generally speaking, the modification of an existing substation obliges to solve both problems:
• Necessary outages as short as possible

• Working in the vicinity of live parts under acceptable safety conditions.
The Bidders are therefore requested to propose a solution for this extension while taking into account
these issues. To this purpose, the Bidders shall present a general methodology of the work.
The Contractor shall prepare a complete report explaining the methods, tools, barriers and personnel
used to perform the works.
While establishing this document standard recommendations such as
• EN 60743 Live working - Terminology for tools, equipment and devices

• Cigré-publication No 151
or comparable references shall be applicable.
The procedure shall be sent to the Employer and the Consultant for approval prior to working.
In any case, the outage begins shall be submitted well in advance to the Employer so that the local
authorities can inform the affected population in due time.
Three methods are described here succinctly but the Bidders are free to propose any other justified
method.
5.3.2 Utilization of the new line bay
This first proposition consists in using the new line bay (from Gisagara) as line bay for the existing
RN1 line. This method allows to re-arrange the existing bay without time pressure especially on the
line bay which is the most demanding, following this procedure:
• Construction of the new Ngozi line bay

• Transfer of the RN1 line on the new line bay (including PLC)
• Commissioning of the transformer via the new line bay
• Extension of the RN1 line bay

Lot 2 - Substations
• Transfer of the RN1 line back to the original gantry

• Connection of the new Ngozi overhead line
• Commissioning and final settings
This procedure must take into account that the new line bay is not equipped with PLC (meaning cou-
pling capacitor and line trap) and that the existing PLC system on the RN1 line must mandatorily re-
main under operation.
For this procedure, the use of pre-cast foundations could be advantageous.
5.3.3 Diverting of the busbars
The existing busbar, which impedes the construction of the new busbar and new apparatuses, could
be diverted to a parallel busbar, enabling an easy dismantling and installation of the new equipment.
This procedure must take all minimum distances into account, in particular the distance and angles to
protecting ground wires.
The work could follow this procedure:
• Installing and connecting of the parallel busbar

• Dismantling of the existing busbar
• Installation of the new apparatuses and new perpendicular busbar
• Connection to the existing apparatuses
• Commissioning and final settings
• Dismantling of the temporary busbar.
5.3.4 Working during outage
This methods consists de-energize the substation in order to have free access to the parts to be re-
placed or new equipment to be installed.
For obvious reasons, the outage cannot be very long so that as much works as possible must be per-
formed before the outage, such as:
• Construction of the new busbar and measuring bay (the conductors could be regulated on ground
and stringed during outage)
• Re-arrangement of the earthwire system
• Foundations of the apparatus as pre-cast elements
• Cable ducts, service road and misc. civil works
• Protection, SCADA
The outage will be necessary for the following works:
• Dismantling of the existing tube busbars

• Installation of the circuit breaker, current transformer and of the two disconnectors
• Connections
• Mechanical and electrical tests

Lot 2 - Substations
The outage shall not be longer than 7 days. Work at night or on Saturday and Sunday is in that case
and under due respect of the Burundian laws fully acceptable.
5.4 110 kV electrical equipment
5.4.1.1 Transformer bay extension
This extension will be performed by addition of the following equipment:
• Busbar disconnector with earth switch

• Misc. connections.
5.4.1.2 Line bay extension
This extension will be performed by addition of the following equipment:
• 1 no. Circuit breaker (single phase reclosure)

• 110 kV current transformers as per protection requirements
• Busbar disconnector with earth switch
• Misc. connections.
5.4.1.3 Ngozi overhead line bay
The new 110 kV bay shall comprise:
• 3 110 kV surge arrestors

• 1 line switch with earth switch on both sides
• Current transformers as per protection requirements
• 1 circuit-breaker SF6 with single phase reclosure
• Columns, gantries, supporting structures…
5.4.1.4 Measuring bay
• Connections to the new busbar
5.4.2 Civil works
The civil works consists in:
• Preparation of the bay

• Drainage
• Foundations for apparatus gantries and supporting structures

Lot 2 - Substations
• Cable ducts
• Light duty road extension
• Gravelling of the new bay if necessary
5.4.3 Protections
In addition to the protection of the new Ngozi OHL, the existing protection equipment shall be replaced
by a new one, as per following description:
• Protection of the modified transformer bay

• Protection of the modified Bujumbura line bay
• Protection of the new busbar.
scribed in the Chapter 9.
5.4.4 Adaptation of the control equipment
The control system of the new bays shall merge to the existing one as described in Chapter 10.
5.4.5 Auxiliary equipment
The existing AC/DC supply shall be also utilized for the new bay, taking especially into account the CB
and switch drives and the outdoor lighting as well.
To this purpose, the Contractor shall collect all necessary information concerning voltage levels and
consumers and adapt the equipment accordingly.

Lot 2 - Substations
6. Time schedule
According to ITB 11.1 (j), the Bidders shall submit the requested time schedule.

Lot 2 - Substations
SPECIFICATIONS
1. General requirements
1.1 Reference to other chapters and specifications
Throughout the Specification, Price Schedules, references are occasionally made to other Chapters
and Specifications. All such references are intended solely for the convenience of those using the
documents, and the absence of a reference in no manner excludes the application of any other Chap-
ter and Specification of the Specification which may, in the opinion of the Consultant, have any bear-
ing upon the point in question, the intention being that the Contract Documents shall be read and ap-
plied as a whole.
1.2 Works in existing installations
Any work to be done in existing installations by the Contractor shall be performed under his responsi-
bility and in close cooperation with the Employer. Contractor shall submit for approval all required in-
formation prior to any work to be performed (drawings, single line diagrams, methodology, safety pro-
cedures...).
1.3 Cooperation with other Contractors
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his rates for any additional expenses incurred in
cooperating, adjusting to and working with other contractors on the Site. Except for those items for
such cooperation, adjustment, delay or assistance which are entered in the Price Schedules no claim
will be allowed for extra payment in this respect.
1.4 Access to the site
The Contractor shall consult the relevant authorities to get characteristics of existing bridges and ca-
pacities of roads, as applicable.
The Contractor shall make all provisions for transportation to the site throughout the Construction Pe-
riod for all plant, equipment and materials required by him for the execution of the Works on the basis
of the Standards of the roads and bridges as of the time for Submission of Tenders.
The Contractor shall take the full responsibility of the conditions of various accesses to the site, what-
soever the Tender Drawings may show or the Technical Specifications may specify.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.5 Site conditions and design criteria
The Employer does not guarantee the correctness of the designations of any data described in this
Clause and elsewhere nor any interpretations, deductions or conclusions relative to subsurface condi-
tions.
1.5.1 General operating conditions
The definition of the characteristics of equipment and structures associated with the Burundi - Rwanda
inter-connection should take into account climatic and geographical conditions encountered on the line
route.
These conditions have an influence on:
• The dielectric withstand of the insulated material in the air which depends on its disruptive qualities,
which are variable depending on humidity and altitude, as well as pollution;
• The mechanical equipment withstand that should principally support the constraints due to wind
and earthquakes;
• The cooling of the equipment that depends on the ambient temperature and altitude.
For economic and operational reasons, standardization of equipment with those already existing in the
country should be taken into account by the Contractor in every choice.
1.5.2 Climatic, electrical and mechanical conditions
Maximum air temperature 35 °C
Average air temperature 25 °C
Minimum air temperature 10 °C
Altitude 2000 m
2
Pollution level III
Creepage distance 25 mm/kV
Degree
Seismicity Mercalli scale
VII
Humidity 90 - 100 %
Reference gust wind speed (3 sec.) at 10 m high 36 m/s

o
Limit wind on cables at 10 C 760 Pa
2
The level of pollution to take into account is level III “Heavy” which corresponds to a minimal creepage distance of 25
mm/kV, applied to phase-to-phase voltages

Lot 2 - Substations
Maximum conductor temperature 75 °C
Maximum ground wire temperature 50 °C
Nominal voltage of a three phase system 220 kV
Highest voltage of the three phase system 245 kV
1 min power frequency withstand voltage 460 kV
Lighting impulse withstand voltage (peak) 1050 kV
Minimal distance between arcing horns 2450 mm
Maximum shielding angle to outer phase conductor 0 o
Live metal clearance Maximum Wind 0.50 m
Live metal clearance No Wind 2.45 m
1.5.3 Applicable standards and norms
The design of the equipment shall fundamentally consider the most severe conditions to which they
will be subjected during manufacture, transport and handling, installation, testing and operation.
The dimensions of the parts which are exposed to repetitive and alternating stresses as well as to im-
pacts and vibrations shall take into account the safety measures approved in practice.
The standards for the design are listed in the non-exhaustive list under chap. 2 "Design Basic Data".
In regards of environmental and social protection, national government and funding agencies regula-
tions shall be applicable.
Standard specifications and codes of the following listed authorities wherever cited herein are referred
to by use of the abbreviations shown below.
All materials and workmanship shall comply with requirements of applicable codes:

Lot 2 - Substations
Designation Abbreviation
1. International Standard Organisation ISO

1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse
Case Postale 56 CH1211
GENEVE 20 - Switzerland
2. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM

100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700,
West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959 USA
3. American Association of Stage Highway and AASHTO

Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, mw
WASHINGTON, DC20001 - USA
4. American Concrete Institute ACI

38800 Country Club Drive,
Farmington Hills, MI 48331 USA
5. British Standards Institution BS

389 Chiswick High Road
London, W4 4AL
United Kingdom
6. Bundesanstalt fuer Wasserbau BAW

P. O. Box 21 02 53
76152 KARLSRUHE, Kussmaulstr. 17
Germany
7. Deutsches Institute fuer Normung e.v DIN

D- 10787 BERLIN, Burggrafen Str. 6
Germany
8. Association Française de Normalisation AFNOR

11, rue Francis de Pressensé
93571 La Plaine Saint-Denis Cedex - France
9. American National Standards Institute, Inc. ANSI

1819 L Street, NW (between 18th and 19th Streets), 6th floor
Washington, DC 20036 - USA

Lot 2 - Substations
10. American Petroleum Institute API

1220 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005-4070
USA
11. American Welding Society AWS

550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126 - USA
12. United States Bureau of Reclamation USBR

1849 C Street NW
Washington DC 20240-0001 – USA
13. United States Corps of Project Managers USCE

Headquarters, US Army Corps of Project Managers
441 G. Street, NW
Washington, DC 20314-1000 – USA
14. The Institution of Civil Project Managers ICE

1 Great George Street - Westminster
London SW1P 3AA. - UK
15. Eurocode
2, rue Bréderode
B-1000 BRUXELLES – Belgique
Except if otherwise specified, where such standards are mentioned, the latest revision or edition on
the Base Date shall apply.
When the Contract Documents contain particular specification or more restrictive specification than re-
quired in Standards and Codes listed above, the Contract Documents will always prevail.
In case of lack of precise requirements in the Specifications and even if no reference to any standard
listed in Chap. 2 hereof, these standards shall be used as a reference.
Standards other than those specified
Where requirements are specified by reference to a standard which has its origin in one country, it is
not the intention to restrict the requirements solely to that standard and that country. The Contractor
may propose to the Consultant an equivalent standard other than that specified, in which case he shall
submit the proposed standard and shall submit written proof that his proposed standard is equivalent
in all significant respects to the standard specified. All submissions shall be made in English language.
The Contractor shall supply two copies of these standards and regulations in English language.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.5.4 General soil characteristics
As per soil investigation report for the Rwandan portion of line route attached in Annex 10.
1.5.5 Environmental, social and HS requirements
The Contractor shall at all time carry out its business and operations in compliance with all applicable
national environmental, occupational health & safety and social laws and regulations in Rwanda and
Burundi respectively. In addition, the Contractor and all sub-contractors shall comply with and adhere
to:
• WB Environmental and Social Safeguards, the IFC/ WB General EHS Guidelines as well as
IFC/WB EHS Guidelines on Power Transmission and Distribution (as referred to in KfW's Sustain-
ability Guidelines).
• ILO Core Labor Conventions and IFC PS 2 (Labor and Working Conditions).
• Provisions of the Environmental and Social Management Plan (UESMP).
The UESMP and all sub-plans are part of the contracts and binding for the Contractor and all sub-
contractors. The Contractor shall monitor and report on the E&S performance of the sub-contractors.
The Contractor will ensure that provisions regarding construction health & safety and labor conditions
in the contracts with the sub-contractors shall be consistent with the requirements as set out in Section
6 “Staff and Labor” of the FIDIC “Pink Book” - Conditions of Contract for Construction, MDB Harmo-
nised Edition, 2010.
The Contractor will further be required to customize the overall UESMP and to develop a site- and
works-specific Construction Environmental and Social Management- and Monitoring Plan, including all
necessary sub-plans as indicated below:
• Site Management Plans (including site restoration -, soil and erosion management plan)
• Traffic Management Plan
• Waste Management Plan
• Air Quality and Noise Management Plan
• Watercourse Management Plan
• Labour Force Management Plan; including grievance mechanism for workers, workers accommo-
dation plan and water management plan
• Environmental Mitigation and Monitoring Plan (including biodiversity management plan/re-
vegetation plan)
• Occupational Health and Safety Management Plan
• Hazardous Materials Management Plan
• Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Public Health and Safety Management
• Construction Stakeholder Engagement Plan, including an accessible, culturally appropriate and
transparent grievance mechanism
• Local Recruitment Plan
• Code of conduct for workforce
The Contractor shall submit a methodology statement on his general and planned procedures on the
requirement listed above during bidding stage, submit work method statements with reference to the
requirements of the UESMP and the sub-plans as listed above, outlining the Construction Environ-
mental and Social Management- and Monitoring Plan (CESMMP) with sub-plans; submit a work plan

Lot 2 - Substations
for the establishment of the CESMMP during bidding stage; submit CESMMP including all required
sub-plans not later than 30 days after contract effectiveness.
Relevant management plans to be provided by the Employer for the construction phase are:
• Overall ESMP and ESIA (part of the Bidding Documents)

• Resettlement Action Plan (RAP)
• Chance Find Procedure
The Contractor will be responsible that all sub-contractors receive an EHS induction prior to starting
work, a work-site orientation and on-the-job or formal training prior to being assigned for a job. The
Contractor shall apply best practice international standards to occupational safety with regard to use of
personal protective equipment, work procedures (for tower erection and maintenance) and equipment
movement. All employees will be provided with the necessary training and safety equipment as re-
quired for their respective responsibilities and duties.
The Contractor has to ensure that each sub-contractor submits, at the tender stage, proof of its good
OHS practices in order to be shortlisted for the work. In case that sub-contractors are required to exe-
cute specific specialist works on site (e.g., demolition, excavation, electrical work, welding) they will be
required to describe a work method i.e. specifying how to reduce or eliminate potential risks. Safety
induction meetings will be regularly conducted, and incident statistics maintained. Health and safety
staff will be appointed and present on the construction site during working hours and will include an
on-site first aid emergency capacity.
The contractor is required to comply with the management plans provided by the Employer as listed
above and to integrate the provisions into the overall Construction Environmental and Social Man-
agement- and Monitoring Plan (including the installation of physical protection facilities for birds on the
transmission line as indicated above). Regarding land acquisition and compensation, it is the Employ-
er’s responsibility to establish and to implement the RAP. However, it will be the Contactor’s responsi-
bility to compensate affected parties for any damage and losses related to construction works in line
with the provisions of the RAP, e.g. for temporary land take for lay down areas or workers’ camps, for
any crop damage due to construction works or any damage from construction activities to physical
structures.
The Construction ESMMP and all Sub-Plans will be subject to no-objection from the Employer and
KfW. The Implementation of the Construction ESMMP will be subject to supervision and monitoring by
the Employer/Implementation Consultant.
The Contractor shall provide a monthly report, which includes detailed information on the implementa-
tion of the Construction Environmental and Social Management- and Monitoring Plan including moni-
toring results, covering amongst other issues, safety issues, incidents/accidents, need for corrective
measures, conflicts amongst construction workforce or with local residents, grievances of workforce or
stakeholders, any other details related to the social and environmental management and -
performance. Subcontractor-related issues shall also be included.
In its Bid Proposal the Contractor shall provide evidence that he has an Environmental and Social
Management System established and ready for operation in order to implement the Construction Envi-
ronmental and Social Management- and Monitoring Plan (i.e. appropriate staff, procedures, routines
and processes).

Lot 2 - Substations
Notification of accidents and incidents: The Contractor shall promptly, but in any event within two (2)
workdays after the occurrence of any of the events set out in this Sub-clause, supply to the Implemen-
tation Consultant/Employer (i) details of any incident of an environmental nature (including without
limitation any explosion, spill or workplace accident which results in death, serious or multiple injuries
or material environmental contamination) or any incident of a social nature (including without limitation
any violent labour unrest or dispute with local communities), occurring on or nearby any site, plant,
equipment or facility of the Employer which has or is reasonably likely to have a material negative im-
pact on the environment, the health, safety and security situation, or the social and cultural context,
together with, in each case, a specification of the nature of the incident or accident and the on-site and
off-site effects of such events and (ii) details of any action the Contractor proposes to take in order to
remedy the effects of these events, and shall keep the Employer informed about any progress in re-
spect of such remedial action.
The Resettlement Action Plan (RAP), and Updated Environmental and Social Management Plan
(UESMP) are attached to these requirements under the Annexes 19 and 20.
1.6 Safety measures
1.6.1 Generals
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all workmen and other persons entering the
Works and shall, at his own expense (where not otherwise stated) and to the approval of the Consult-
ant, take all measures necessary to ensure their safety. Reference in these respects is made to statu-
tory requirements and Conditions of Contract, but in particular such measures shall include, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Provision of proper safety and emergency regulation; fire, gas and electric shock prevention,
stretchers and first aid boxes, together with rescue facilities generally, for each place of working.
b. Safe shoring of all excavations.
c. Provision of efficient safety helmets for all personnel including the Employer and the Consultant
and each of their staff and any authorized visitors to the Site.
d. Provision of safety shoes, glasses, belts and other protection adapted to the risks encountered
for all personnel including the Employer and the Consultant and each of their staff and any au-
thorized visitors to the Site.
e. Safe control of water.
f. Provision and maintenance of suitable lighting to provide adequate illumination of the Works
with appropriate spares and standby equipment.
g. Provision of safe Contractor's equipment and temporary works.
h. Provision of good and safe access to any part of the Works.
i. Provision of notices written in Kinyarwanda and English/French language to be erected at points
likely to be used by the public, which shall warn the public of the existence of the Works. These
notices shall be in addition to any statutory requirements demanded of the Contractor.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.6.2 Safety plan
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, within four months before the start of work, the safety
plan and hygiene applicable throughout the Site. The plan, intended to integrate security against major
risks to staff, show:
• The measures provided for this purpose in both procedures in their definition in the different phases
of Works. It will clarify in particular, depending on the method of construction and the materials
used, how to prevent falls for personnel, materials and equipment, vertical and horizontal circula-
tion gear, fire hazards and drowning and the electrical hazards, especially while working in the vi-
cinity of live parts.
• The measures for first aid to the injured and sick.
• The measures that contribute to a healthy work, including the consistency and quality of the staff
rooms.
Terms of health and safety will be maintained by the Contractor who will report changes to Consultant.
The Contractor shall submit in due time and not later than 4 months after receiving the Order to Com-
mence, for the approval of the Consultant his detailed safety regulations and plan.
The Contractor shall ensure that all his employees are fully conversant with the regulations, emergen-
cy and rescue procedures, etc., and the Contractor shall enforce the rule that any employee commit-
ting a serious breach of such regulations shall be instantly dismissed and shall not be re-employed.
1.7 General coordination
1.7.1 General
The Contractor shall coordinate his works with those of the other contractors at the Site to whatever
extent may be necessary to complete the Project in accordance with the Programme of Works, the
Drawings, the Specifications and as per the Consultant's instructions.
1.7.2 Employer's use of Contractor's temporary works
The Contractor shall during the progress of the Works allow the Employer, the Consultant and other
contractors employed by the Employer in connection with the Works, the use of his roads, scaffolding,
constructional plant, other temporary works or services such as described in the present Specification.
The Contractor shall at every place of working provide proper drainage, lighting and ventilation for
other contractors' erection work and for the Consultant's inspection of the Works. Except for those
items entered in the Bill of Quantities such assistance shall be included in the rates.
1.7.3 Assistance to the Consultant's staff and to other contractors
The Contractor shall provide the assistance and personnel which may be required by the Consultant's
Representative in relation to preparation of works' supervision, such as messengers, guards, and the
like, whether required permanently or from time to time.

Lot 2 - Substations
The Contractor shall provide labour for attendance on the Consultant for operations connected with
supervision of the Works and, for attendance and assistance, to other contractors during erection of
the Electrical and Mechanical Works. Such labor for attendance and assistance to other contractors
shall be paid for under the provisions of day works, whereas attendance and assistance to the Con-
sultant and his staff shall be included in the rates or lump sums.
1.7.4 Disagreement and dispute mitigation with other contractors
Should a disagreement or dispute arise between the Contractor and any other contractors, the same
shall be referred without delay to the Consultant for his decision. Upon such decision and without any
prejudice to his rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall proceed with the works in accordance
therewith.
1.8 Transport for the Employer's and the Consultant's staff
For proper supervision and expediting the works, the Contractor shall provide transportation facilities
for the Employer's exclusive use. The cost of the cars, their maintenance, fuel cost, operation and
driver shall be included in the contract price. The vehicles shall be provided 3 weeks after receipt of
advance payment at the latest.
The number of the vehicles supplied for Lot 2 – Substations shall be as follows:
• 4 (four) 4 WD double cabin pick up
It will be distributed as follow:
• 1(one) 4 WD double cabin pick up for the Employer in Burundi (Lot 2B)
• 1(one) 4 WD double cabin pick up for the Employer in Rwanda (Lot 2R)
• 1(one) 4 WD double cabin pick up for Consultant in Burundi (Lot 2B)
• 1(one) 4 WD double cabin pick up for Consultant in Rwanda (Lot 2R)
At the end of the project, the cars will be handed over to the respective Employers.
4 WD double cabin pick up Technical Specifications
Description Technical Specifications and Applicable Standards
Body
• Type 4WD double cabin pick-up, latest model
• Windshield glass Laminated glass
• Doors 4
• Seating capacity 5 (with separate front seats) with adequate leg space for passengers in the back
seat
• Upholstery Cloth/Fabric
• Wheel base Minimum 2900 mm
• Overall width Minimum 1700 mm

Lot 2 - Substations
• Overall length Minimum 5000 mm

• Overall height Minimum 1700 mm
• Ground clearance Minimum 200 mm
• Gross vehicle mass Minimum 2700 kg
• Door glass Powered windows glass raise/lower and central door locking system
Engine
• Engine mount position Front
• Type Diesel, four stroke cycle, naturally aspirated or turbo charged, fuel injection
• Number of cylinders 4 in line
• Capacity Minimum 2.5, maximum 2.8 litres
• Electrical system 12 volt
• Cooling system Water cooled tropicalized radiator
• Engine underneath Guarded with strong steel plate
• Altitude the car settings should be suitable for 2000m altitude
Fuel
• Type Diesel
• Tank capacity Minimum 70 litres
Transmission
• Type Manual floor shift with high/low transfer gears
• Gear box Minimum of 5 forward speed & I reverse
• Transfer gear box 4WD transfer gearbox
Steering
• Type Front control, right hand drive
• Effect Power assisted
Wheel & Tyres
• Rim size diameter Minimum 15, maximum 16 inches
• Number of tubeless tyres 4
• Spare wheel One complete spare wheel
Suspension
• Front Coil spring or wishbone plates, over telescopic shock absorbers
• Rear Semi elliptic leaf springs with telescopic shock absorbers
Brakes
• Type Antilock Brake System (ABS)
• Front Ventilated disc with pads
• Rear Leading & trailing shoes with drums
Clutch
• Type Dry single plate
• Disengagement Hydraulically activated
Standard Features • Heavy duty front bull bar
• Rear step bumper
• Digital quartz clock
• Front and rear mudguards
• Rear body guard frame
Accessories • Air conditioner
• Air bag at front seats
• Two door mirrors
• Side steps
• Head rests on front seats

Lot 2 - Substations
• Towing hook
• Rear cargo cover (tonneau cover)
• CD-player, MW/SW/FM radio with speakers
• Set of standard tools including wheel spanner & 2 ton hydraulic jack
• Seat belts for all seats
• Floor carpets
• Portable carbon dioxide fire extinguisher
• 2 Triangle reflectors
• Well-equipped First Aid kit
Manual Operator manual in English
Prior to purchasing the vehicles, the Contractor shall submit the vehicle data for Employer's approval.
1.9 Drawings supplied to the contractor
1.9.1 Tender drawings
The Contractor will not receive any drawing not included in the present Contract.
The Tender Drawings issued with the Tender Documents are of a general nature only, but are consid-
ered to be sufficient for the purpose of tendering. Tender Drawings are not to be used for construction
or ordering materials.
The dimensions given are indicative only and are not final. They may be adapted to suit the Contrac-
tor's methods and designs with approval of the Consultant.
The Contractor will communicate to contractors of other lots, all documents relative to procurement of
these lots.
1.9.2 Schedule for issuance of drawings
The Consultant and Contractor shall jointly prepare a schedule for issuance to the Contractor of Draw-
ings Issued for Construction of the various parts, as soon as the draft program of works is submitted to
the Consultant’s approval.
1.9.3 Checking of drawings
During the development of the works, and the related construction design, the Contractor shall check
all Construction Drawings carefully as soon as practicable after receipt thereof, and shall promptly ad-
vise the Consultant of any errors or omissions discovered.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.9.4 Diagrammatic mechanical, electrical drawings
Certain mechanical and electrical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of
the works. The Contractor shall refer to the structural and other appropriate detail drawings, for infor-
mation as the location of all fixtures and equipment. Where additional information is required, the Con-
tractor shall request this information from the Consultant in writing.
1.10 Design and drawings to be carried out by the contractor
All drawings shall be in French and English language, and all dimensions shall be in Metric system.
Symbols shall be in accordance with approved Standards. All drawings submitted for approval shall
conform to ISO paper sizes A0 to A4. All drawings shall be on durable paper with dark lines on a white
background. Title block and numbering shall be approved by the Consultant.
1.10.1 Design calculations
The design calculations which may be presented under existing computer forms shall include in par-
ticular:
Title page:
• calculation conditions;
• the values of the maximum stresses under normal and exceptional operating conditions and during
handling, transport and erection;
• the main dimensional characteristics;
• the properties of the materials used;
• bibliographical references used for the calculations.
In the text:
• the loads to which the supply is subjected and their origin; o the forces transmitted to supplies and
to the foundations;
• stresses to which the equipment will be subjected under normal and exceptional operating condi-
tions (including handling, transport and erection);
• the permitted safety factors;
• in general, any indications required for a proper understanding of the design of the supply;
The design calculations shall be sent with the drawings: no equipment drawings shall be approved un-
til the Consultant has the design calculation for that supply. For any item of equipment, partial design
calculations may be submitted to the Consultant depending on the various stages of execution of
drawings (for example, grouting drawings, built-in parts, structures, operating devices, etc.).
A complete set of design calculations for each item of equipment shall be given to the Consultant on
completion of the execution drawings for the item of equipment in question.
The Consultant reserves the right, during the design period, to request the Contractor for any addi-
tional design calculations which he considers necessary.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.10.2 Drawings
Only the most important documents are listed below. These documents shall be submitted sufficiently
in advance, so that corrections and amendments desired by the Employer as well as resubmission of
the documents will not result in any delay with respect to the guaranteed time table. The Employer re-
serves the right to request from the Contractor additional drawings, documents, etc. as may be re-
quired for proper understanding and definition of the design and engineering of the plant.
As a minimum, the following documents are to be submitted for approval or review:
General
• current list of drawings

• progress reports
• erection and installation progress reports
• list of subcontractors/manufacturers
• proposed inspection and testing programmes
• detailed programme for commissioning
• testing documents/report of results of all tests
• training programme
• operation and maintenance manual with description of all equipment and facilities
• detailed operating and maintenance instructions
• as-built documentation including drawings of all equipment
Time Scheduling
• Overall time schedule for design, manufacture, supply, assembly and commissioning, broken down
for the principal plant components and all construction works, stating dates for completion of any
preparatory work from others which may be necessary
• detailed erection, installation and commissioning schedule
• complete list of documents with proposed submission deadlines.
Mechanical Engineering
• arrangement drawings of the principal components, arrangement drawings of auxiliary equipment

(cubicles, etc.)
• piping and instrumentation schematics and isometric drawings, including lists of pipelines and
valves, stating materials, nominal diameters, nominal pressures, dimensions and insulation thick-
ness of all pipes
• plans of main pipelines including location of cable routes
• characteristics of pumps, fans, etc.
• details of required auxiliary energy sources and consumables (e.g. electricity, instrumentation air,
working air) with condition data and consumption values
• welding procedures
• sectional and detail drawings of all components
• for all lifting operations (repair, maintenance, etc.) a lifting plan has to be submitted by the Bidder.

Lot 2 - Substations
Electrical Engineering
• electrical single-line diagrams

• list of motors and consumers
• cable lists
• standard circuit diagrams for all different kinds of electrical consumers
• circuit diagrams for all individual electrical equipment
• lists of equipment and devices
• earthing plans with calculations
• lightning protection plans with details of measuring locations and reports of measurements taken
following commissioning
• EMC concept with coordinated overvoltage protection
• arrangement drawings
• line plans of fire alarm system, if applicable
• arrangement drawings showing exact location of fire alarm devices, if applicable
• power and lighting installation plans
• general arrangement drawings of the required cable trays, cable laying plans
• dimensioned drawings and erection drawings switchgear etc., including frontal and plan views
• dimensioned drawings of switching cubicles,
• calculation of mechanical stresses of switchgear rooms due to arcing faults
• short circuit calculation and determination of protection relay settings for protection and auxiliary
electrical supplies
• protection and metering diagram for unit protection
• generator charts and exciter characteristics
• line profile drawing for switchyard extension
• calculation of conductor and earthwire tension and sags
• static calculations of all gantries and foundations
• drawings of all foundation gantries for switchyard extension
Instrumentation and Control Engineering
• control system architecture showing all components

• layout drawings of the central control room showing spatial distribution of desks and panels
• layout of electronic rooms showing spatial distribution of cubicles and racks
• detailed dimensions of desks, panels and cubicles
• layout of modules within cubicles
• description for all functional group controls
• CDS/PLC programme listings for all application programmes
• DCS/PLC interface documentation
• DCS/PLC I/O point assignment
• engineering drawings of control valves, control dampers together with their actuators, orifices, noz-
zles, venturi nozzles
• internal connection diagrams, external connection diagrams, terminal connection diagrams, com-
bined schematic and circuit diagrams
• instrument loop diagrams
• instrument hook-up drawings
• list of recorders/selector switches
• instrument list
• list of annunciation
• cable lists

Lot 2 - Substations
• cable routing plan
Civil Engineering
• survey drawings for the plant installed

• general site plan of the entire site showing all buildings and installations, traffic routes and land-
scaping, etc.
• architectural arrangement drawings, design layouts and itemised drawings (plans and sections) to
scale 1:100 of all buildings and plants
• views of all sides of all buildings, scale 1:100
• architectural drawings of each floor (plans, sections), including all necessary detail drawings, scale
1:50
• arrangement drawings of the external plants of the site as a whole (existing, planned) with all sup-
ply and disposal facilities, roads and parking, vehicle access and manoeuvring areas, sewers,
channels and culverts, etc.
• sectional elevations and roof plan
• raised floors and suspended ceiling systems
• underground services and ducts with equipment appertaining to the services
• sewage and stormwater systems
• layouts for external works showing plants and fencing, etc.
• diagrams for heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems
• foundations and other underground concrete works for the transmission line
• civil drawings of roads.
Such drawings will be checked again after completion (as-built drawings).
1.11 Submission and approval
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, for review, all designs and drawings which he prepares
under this Clause Submission shall be done according to the following quantities:
• two black and white prints,

• one soft copy on PDF format, on a CD,
• one soft copy on AutoCAD, on a CD.
The EPC contractor shall share with the Employers and the Consultant the software used in the pro-
ject documents.
The Consultant will review all such designs and drawings, will appraise them as to whether they are
reasonable and consistent with the Construction Drawings and comply with the specifications, and will
order changes when deemed necessary.
The Contractor's designs and drawings shall be submitted in a sequence to facilitate the Consultant's
study and scrutiny of the same, shall be completed in regard to all computations and data, and shall
be traced on size 840 mm x 594 mm (A1-size) or 297 mm x 420 mm (A3-size) paper.
Documents submitted, other than drawings and Contractor's literature shall be A4 in size.
All documents shall comprise a title block with the following details:

Lot 2 - Substations
• the name of the Employer

• the name and reference of the Contract,
• the name of the Consultant,
• the number of the corresponding Section of the Specification
• the name of Contractor and if applicable Subcontractor,
• the date, the title and number of the document and each new issue of the document shall be identi-
fied by a revision letter.
• the signature of the Contractor's representative
• the status of any document such as: ‘’Preliminary”, ‘’For Approval‘’, ‘’Approved by the Consultant
on (date)‘’, ‘’As Manufactured‘’, ‘’As Built ”, shall be clearly marked by the Contractor.
Title block and numbering principle shall be approved by the Consultant.
The reference to Construction Drawings, if any, shall appear in the bottom right hand corner of the
drawing.
Within fifteen working (15) days after submission of the drawings, the Consultant will advise the Con-
tractor of his conclusions regarding the drawings.
The Consultant's conclusions may be one of the following:
• "APPROVED"
• "APPROVED EXCEPT AS NOTED"
• "NOT APPROVED" (with relevant reasons determining rejection duly indicated).
Within fifteen working (15) days of the return of designs and drawings marked "APPROVED" or "AP-
PROVED EXCEPT AS NOTED", the Contractor shall present to the Consultant:
• two black and white prints,

• one soft copy on PDF format, on a CD,
• one soft copy on AutoCAD on a CD.
No drawing shall be considered valid unless signed by the Consultant. The approval by the Project
Man-ager of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and responsibilities under
the Contract.
Those marked "NOT APPROVED" shall be redone and submitted anew to the Consultant.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to a time extension based upon the rejection of designs or detail
drawings, because such designs or detail drawings fail to conform to sound Project Managing princi-
ples, or to the Specifications.
All materials ordered, or works performed, prior to approval of the relevant designs, shall be at the
Contractor's risk.
The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Consultant any variation to the Contract in the docu-
ment submitted for approval.
The number of documents for approval is limited to 100 documents per week.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.12 Ownership of drawings and data
All the drawings, details, bill of materials and any other information or documents furnished by the
Contractor shall become the property of the Employer and shall be non-returnable. The Employer will
have the right to use this property.
1.13 Layout of work and surveys
1.13.1 Reference points, lines and levels
For electrical equipment
The Contractor shall determine in agreement with the Consultant the centre lines and reference levels
for the installation of the equipment from the here above reference points.
Complementary setting out
During the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall complete the general setting out by as many
stakes, seats and gauges as may be necessary.
1.13.2 Lines and levels of reference for erection of equipment by others
At the beginning of erection of equipment supplied and erected by others, complementary reference
points shall be placed by the Contractor. Position of lines and levels shall be defined by mutual
agreement of all par-ties. In case of disagreement, the Contractor shall follow the final decision issued
by the Consultant.
The Consultant will draw up a report to confirm completion of these operations in the field.
1.14 Quality for electrical equipment
1.14.1 Quality assurance and quality control programme
The parts and components produced and the services provided in fulfilling the requirements of the
Contract shall be performed in accordance with a Quality Assurance Program to be established by the
Contractor. This Contractor's Quality Assurance Program shall be documented in sufficient detail to
assure the Consultant that the Contract requirements will be met during the design, procurement,
manufacture, assembly, delivery, erection, installation, construction and test of all materials and com-
ponents of the Works. The Contractor's Quality Assurance Program, as a minimum, shall provide the
implementing details as given hereinafter.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.14.2 Quality plan
The quality plan concerns the civil works and the Electrical equipment.
General
• Quality Plan prepared by the Contractor with reference to his Quality Assurance Manual and as per
ISO Standard shall be submitted to the Consultant.
• This plan will reflect the know-how of the Contractor as well as the requirements of the Contract.
Contractor's Quality plan shall include, but not be limited to, detailed procedures, instructions, or
statement covering the following.
Organisation and procedures
• The Quality Plan shall describe Contractor's Quality Assurance organisation and delineate the re-
sponsibility and authority of the various personnel and groups involved. The Quality Assurance De-
partment's relationship with other departments shall be defined and their independence of Consult-
ant, construction, cost, and scheduling shall be stated. An organisational chart shall be included
with lines of authority and communication.
• Procedures of communications between the Contractor, the Consultant and the Employer will be
established by the Consultant. As a rule, any documents issued by the Contractor including letters,
various Reports, Notes, etc. shall be addressed to the Consultant with copies sent simultaneously
and directly by the Contractor to the Employer and when applicable to Representatives on site.
Particular procedure will be established for communications on site.
Procurement Control
• The Contractor's procurement process shall assure that purchased items, whether purchased di-
rectly or through his sub-suppliers comply with the Specification. This assurance shall be provided
by the inclusion of the quality requirements into the Contractor's procurement documents and ade-
quate inspection of the material at its source or upon receipt.
• Prior to procurement, the Contractor shall furnish to the Consultant, a list of Sub-Contractors and
vendors with who orders are to be placed for materials and equipment which will be incorporated
directly into the Works. The Contractor shall also furnish such pertinent information as to capaci-
ties, efficiencies and sizes, and such other information as may be required by the Consultant.
• Copies of Contractor’s orders of materials and equipment and list of his stock material or equip-
ment shall be provided to the Consultant. All orders and stock lists shall state the standard specifi-
cation under which the material is to be furnished, pertinent drawing and the required delivery
dates. They shall state that the materials and equipment are subject to inspection of the Consult-
ant.
Material Control
The Quality Plan shall provide assurance that procured and subsequently processed material meets
the Specification requirements. Material identification shall be provided and maintained throughout the
manufacturing cycle. Controls shall be provided for the documentation and disposition of non-
conforming material, parts or components, and their subsequent rework or repair and re-inspection.
The program shall also provide for the prior notification to the Consultant of proposed rework or repair
or non-conformance, for this evaluation and approval.

Lot 2 - Substations
Special Processes
Special Processes such as welding, soldering, brazing, heat treatment, cleaning, non-destructive ex-
amination, etc., shall be performed in accordance with documented process procedures and by quality
personnel. The procedure shall describe the process sequence and methods, process pre-requisites,
equipment, qualification of personnel and equipment, and acceptance criteria. The procedures shall
also describe the preparation and retention of documents used to record the results of special pro-
cesses.
Non-Destructive Testing
Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) shall be done according to written procedures. The current edition of
American Society of Mechanical Consultant (ASME), Section V shall be used as a guide for the NDT
procedures. In addition, the specific requirements of the applicable Code and Standard shall be satis-
fied and the procedures shall be submitted to the Consultant for review and approval prior to the initia-
tion of the test.
The items to be non-destructively tested, the extent of testing, and the acceptance Standard shall be
clearly defined in the procedures and in accordance with the referencing Code and Standard. NDT
personnel shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the current edition of American Society of
Non-destructive Testing (ASNT) Recommended Practice, number SNT-TC-IA or equivalent.
Inspection
The Quality Plan shall provide for the in-process and final inspection of material, equipment and activi-
ties to assure compliance with approved documents. Examination or measurements shall be per-
formed at each applicable work operation. Inspection activities shall be performed by qualified inde-
pendent individuals.
Calibration
Procedures shall be established to assure that test and measuring devices used to test, inspect, or
accept material and components are calibrated at specified intervals to maintain the proper accuracy.
Devices used shall be of the proper range, type, and sensitivity to reliably measure the parameters be-
ing evaluated. The calibration of such devices shall be documented and shall be performed using cer-
tified measurement Standards.
1.15 Approval of materials and equipment
1.15.1 General
All materials and equipment intended to be incorporated in the Works shall be subject to approval by
the Consultant prior to order by the Contractor.
Unless otherwise authorized by the Consultant no material or equipment shall be shipped from its
point of original manufacture or final shop assembly to the work site before it has been inspected and
approved by the Consultant.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.15.2 Submission of samples and data
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Consultant samples, drawings, catalogues, cuts,
diagrams and other descriptive data for all mechanical, electrical, architectural and such other materi-
als and equipment as may be designated by the Consultant and which the Contractor pro-posed to in-
corporate in the Works. For certain materials and equipment data may be required to be submitted in
accordance with a detail form furnished by the Consultant.
Items submitted shall be properly labelled to indicate the Project Contract number, Contractor, source
of supply, Contractor Contract Item number, and other data required by the Specifications.
All items shall be submitted in sufficient time, but not later than 90 days prior to purchase, to permit
proper consideration and action thereon without delaying the construction schedule.
Items sent for approval shall be shipped prepaid by the Contractor and the Contractor shall give the
Consultant advance notice in written of all items shipped.
1.16 Assembly marking
All parts, or units of shop assemblies, shall be marked, or tagged with piece marks. Marks shall be in
accordance with approved erection drawings, shall be clearly legible and so placed as to be readily
visible when the part is being erected in the field. Before dismantling for shipment, connecting parts
assembled in the shop shall be match marked to facilitate erection in the field and marked so as to
identify each part with the assembly to which it belongs. The location of the match marks shall be
clearly indicated on erection drawings. All parts or assembly of parts shall also be so marked as to
identify them with this Contract.
1.17 Quality of design, materials and manufacture
All items of the Plant shall be designed and manufactured in the most sound manner, using materials
most suited to the particular service and giving due consideration to the most recent technical advanc-
es. All materials and components shall be new and unused. The design and materials shall be such as
to enhance service life, operational reliability, freedom from wear and tear and ease of maintenance,
inspection and adjustment. Back-up facilities shall be provided in order to ensure reliable and safe op-
eration in event of faults.
1.18 Quality assurance and quality control programme for the

electrical equipment
1.18.1 Introduction
The quality assurance programme and quality plan have been described in previous paragraph related
to quality assurance programme and quality plan for all the works.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.18.2 Test program
The Contractor's test program shall be suitably documented to assure that the required components or
sub-components testing are properly performed. The test program shall address pertinent test pre-
requisites, such as test instrumentation selection and calibration, acceptance criteria, documentation
of test results, and evaluation of test results by qualified personnel.
1.18.3 Level of criticality and control
The level of quality control shall be adjusted to the importance of the equipment in terms of cost of re-
pairs, personnel safety and loss of production as applicable. In respect of inspection and approval, the
levels of criticality of the equipment and phases of construction will be divided into three categories as
follows:
• Type R (R for Record) The Contractor shall send to the Consultant the record of the tests or in-
spections. This generally applies to items whose failure would have no effect on production, per-
sonnel, ecology or environment. Replacement of equipment or spare parts would be readily availa-
ble and treated as routine maintenance.
• Type I (I for Invitation) The Consultant shall be invited to be present during the tests or inspection
and the Consultant will decide whether to assist in the tests and to inspect the works or not. If the
Consultant decides not to be present, the works will go on.
• Type S (S for Stop) The works (manufacturing, erection, placing, construction, testing) shall be
stopped and the work shall be resumed only after the Consultant has given his approval. This gen-
erally applies to those items whose operability and reliability is vital for operation. Shutdown due to
malfunction or failure of one of these items would result in loss of production and/or replacement
costs, or pose potential hazard to personnel safety, and could cause damage to the environment.
1.18.4 Non-conformity
During manufacture and site works, after each assessment or measurement of quality, cases of non-
conformity, identified either by the Contractor's quality control supervisors or by the personnel in
charge of execution or by the Consultant, will be divided into four categories:
NC.1 Minor defects which shall be repaired immediately, then recorded on standard follow-up
documents.
NC.2 Defects which can be repaired according to a pre-established procedure. The repairs
shall be carried out immediately and recorded on special documents.
NC.3 Defects which cannot be repaired according to a pre-established procedure. The decision
to repair, modify or rebuild or remanufacture the item shall be proposed by the Contractor
for the Consultant's approval.
NC.4 Main defects on critical items. The Contractor shall propose a solution to the Consultant.
Then the Consultant, after due consultation, will notify the Contractor the final decision.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.18.5 Documentation
• The Quality Plan shall include a system to ensure that the documentation necessary to attest the
completion of fabrication, erection, and installation, use of correct material ; completion of required
inspections and tests and acceptability of results are generated, reviewed, maintained and turned
over to the Consultant at the required time.
• The system shall ensure that such documentation is reviewed by the Contractor for legibility, com-
pleteness, validity of data, traceability of document to activity or equipment and acceptability of re-
sults
• Documentation to be generated and maintained during manufacturing and site works period as ap-
plicable, shall include at least:
– Raw material test report (mechanical, chemical, radioscopic, etc.) as per Standards. In the case
of materials for which such practice is usual, the Consultant may accept the Contractor's certi-
fied mill and laboratory certificate.
– Weld and weld repair procedure
– Inspection and test procedures
– Inspection and test reports
♦ If a demonstrable satisfactory service record is available for a material, certain specified tests may
be waived by the Consultant
♦ In the case of Standard labelled stock products which have a record of satisfactory performance in
similar works over a period of not less than 2 years, the Consultant may accept a statement from
the Contractor attested by a certified laboratory certifying that the product conforms to the applica-
ble specifications
– Vendor surveillance reports
– Heat treatment records
– Final inspection reports
– Packing and shipping procedure
– Certificates of compliance
1.18.6 Submittal of Contractor’s documents
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant the following documents:
• The Contractor's Quality Plan

• The Contractor's Inspection and Test Plan
This Plan, which will be the basis for the selection of shop witness or observation points, shall sequen-
tially list all major material and component processing or assembly operations, and all routine and
special inspection and tests. Tests and inspection listed in the Plan shall include reference to the ap-
plicable inspection, test or special process. To allow possible inspection of materials and equipment in
the course of, or on completion of the preparation or manufacture or assembling or testing, the Con-
tractor shall give the Consultant written notice:
– of the workshops and places where the materials and equipment are manufactured or stored or
tested and advise him of the state of general progress of the works.
– of the programme with the dates of the tests types I and S.
– During any inspection of materials or equipment, the Contractor shall place all quality control
documentation including the previous test reports concerning these materials and equipment, at
the Consultant’s disposal. The Consultant may also require that this documentation be sent pri-
or to the inspection

Lot 2 - Substations
• Drawings, calculation notes and other design documentation as required.
• Test and inspection programme and procedures
For each major test, the relevant detailed test programme and procedures shall include descriptions of
the test methods, applicable Standards, testing equipment and installations and test record sheets
with theoretical data and tolerances.
• Tests documents
Within one week after completion of tests and inspection:
– Record Drawings (as manufactured)
– Contractor's Data Report
– Certificate of Compliance
– Certified Material Test Reports
– Heat Treatment Charts
– Non-Destructive-Tests Examination Reports
– Non-conformance Reports
– Performance Test Reports
– Routine and Special Tests
– Final Inspection Report
The ‘’Permission to Deliver” any item of the Substation shall be issued by the Consultant after the re-
ceipt of the test reports and other certificates as detailed above, showing that these items comply with
the Contract ; then the Contractor will be authorised to proceed with the packaging and shipping.
• Shipping documents
The Contractor shall supply shipping documents (copy of packing lists, bill of lading, insurance certifi-
cate) for each dispatch. Packing lists shall include details of the content of each crate or package dis-
patched together with the identification numbers of each package, the dimensions net and gross
weights and where necessary, any special indications regarding storage and the type of packaging.
• Erection manuals
The Contractor shall supply erection manuals which include appropriate procedures for the installation
of the main items of the Substation. These documents shall include all information and sketches nec-
essary for proper erection and disassembly, in particular:
– the use of erection platforms with overall dimensions sketch,
– lifting and handling equipment required,
– detailed operation sequences,
– erection drawings,
– erection clearances and tolerances.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.19 Assembly during manufacture
All parts of the substation shall be assembled during manufacture to the full extent necessary for the
purpose of inspection, testing and otherwise ensuring that they will function satisfactorily and are mu-
tually correct as regards dimensions. During such assembly, all parts shall be correctly doweled and
match-marked or tagged to facilitate erection on site.
The location of the match-marks shall be indicated on erection drawings.
1.20 Packing, storage and identification
1.20.1 Packing for transport
All equipment shall be effectively protected against damage (including all deterioration) during
transport from the place of manufacture to the Site in a tropical location and during storage.
Large parts shall be supported to distribute their mass uniformly and thus avoid any permanent defor-
mation. An approved drying agent shall be included with all items which may be affected by moisture
or excessive humidity and with all items which are enclosed in plastic or other impervious material.
1.20.2 Check on arrival at site
Immediately upon receipt at Site, all packages shall be checked by the Contractor against the shipping
list for loss and inspected for damage during transit. The Contractor shall report all damage and the
proposed remedial work therefore to the Consultant for approval in accordance with the Contract.
1.20.3 Storage facilities on site
The Employer will not provide any kind of storage at the Site. The Contractor shall provide covered
storage, temporary cooling/heating, weather-proof shelters, loading and unloading facilities as re-
quired, and shall ensure that all packages are suitable for the storage conditions provided.
1.20.4 Protection of equipment
Machined surfaces shall be protected against corrosion. Parts on which final alignment and running
clearances depend shall have adequate blocking to prevent distortion of their machined surfaces, and
shall be positively prevented from coming into contact with timber packing or supports, paying due re-
gard to movements which may occur during transport. If machined surfaces show signs of damage on
receipt of shipment, the corrosion protection shall be removed, the rust and moisture eliminated, the
defects repaired by appropriate means and the protection reapplied.
Electrical insulation shall be protected against sweating and entry of dust during transport and storage.

Lot 2 - Substations
Flange faces and openings shall be covered by metal blanks and gaskets. Rubber parts shall be pro-
tected against light and air. Moisture absorbent crystals shall be included with all items enclosed in
plastic or other impervious material.
Equipment likely to be damaged by shock or vibration, shall be packed in protective containers in ac-
cordance with the recommendation of the original supplier and suitable for the method of transport
used.
1.20.5 Packing Material
All packing material, except that required for storage of spare parts, shall remain the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from the Site. Only parts for immediate use shall be delivered from
the works storage area, and their packing material shall be removed quickly from the installation site
and disposed of to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
1.20.6 Packages
All packages shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the dimensions, weight, slinging and weight
bearing points. Any packages which are not symmetrically loaded shall be marked with the position of
the centre of gravity.
Each package shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope.
1.20.7 Inspection prior to dispatch
The Consultant shall reserve the right to inspect the equipment and the packing before the items are
dispatched.
1.21 Inspection and tests
The whole of the Works is subject to inspection and test by the Employer and the Consultant during
manufacture, installation and completion at the Site when such tests or inspections are required under
the Conditions of Contract or Specifications, or when it is impossible to certify that the performance
conforms to the requirements stipulated in the Specification.
The Employer and the Consultant shall be given the opportunity to witness all tests, and the Contrac-
tor shall give adequate notice of all tests to be carried out, at least 30 (thirty) days prior to scheduled
tests..
The approval of the Consultant or the passing of any inspection or test shall not prejudice the right of
the Consultant to reject equipment or material if it does not comply with the Specification when in-
stalled or incorporated into the Works.
The Contractor shall submit a "Quality Control, Inspection and Test Plan", which shall describe the
inspection and test procedure containing acceptance criteria for each substation component.

Lot 2 - Substations
If any component fails under test, such further tests, which are considered by the Employer or the
Consultant to be necessary, shall be carried out by the Contractor without additional cost to the Em-
ployer.
1.22 Workshop inspection and tests
As far as practicable the quality of materials, workmanship and performance of all items of Substation
and equipment to be furnished under the Contract shall be inspected and tested at the place of manu-
facture.
Factory tests shall be made by the Contractor on the following items:
• Power transformers
• Instrument transformers
• HV circuit breakers
• HV disconnectors
• MV switchgears
• Telecommunication equipment
• Protection systems
• Control systems
For these items, the Contractor shall pay for each FAT, for four (4) persons from the Employers (two
on behalf of EDCL/REG and two on behalf of REGIDESO) and one (1) person from the Consultant, all
travel costs (flight tickets, taxi, train tickets, car rental etc. as applicable), all meals and accommoda-
tion costs related to all the factory acceptance tests and Inspections required in the project.
The costs shall be included in Cost of materials
1.23 Inspections and Tests during Erection and Commissioning
1.23.1 General
The Contractor's scope of delivery includes all site test and inspection expenses, e.g. all labour, mate-
rials, water, electricity, consumables, chemicals and stores as well as the instruments and apparatus
as may be required to perform such tests efficiently. The Contractor is responsible for and shall in-
clude in his delivery all safety measures such as barriers, warning signs etc. required for inspection
and testing while erection is in progress and all interruption of work in this connection will be at his ex-
pense.
All instruments and apparatus used for site inspection and testing shall be calibrated to an agreed
standard at a laboratory of an international standing to be nominated by the Contractor. The cost of
making such calibrations shall be borne by the Contractor in all cases.
During the erection of all mechanical, electrical, control, monitoring and telecommunication equipment
the Contractor shall make the plant item available at any reasonable time for inspection by the Em-
ployer's Representative and/or by the Employer, should either so require.

Lot 2 - Substations
To assist the Employer and his Representatives in their review of the quality of the work being per-
formed, the Contractor's senior field representative shall provide the Employer's Representative with a
schedule of the specific areas and items of work that will be performed during each work week. The
list shall be presented to the Employer's Representative prior to the start of work on a day agreed by
the Employer's Representative.
All work that is executed prior to such notification shall be done at the Contractor's own risk and may,
at the Employer's Representative's request, be subject to removal and replacement by the Contractor
at his expense.
In particular the Contractor has to mark on his implementation schedule all stages of erection or com-
missioning which are subject to the Employer's Representative's acceptance and has to notify one
week in advance when such acceptance becomes due. The stages subject to acceptance shall in-
clude but not be limited to the items indicated in the specification.
Before energizing certain checks need to be carried out. For start-up the Contractor will propose a
programme to be approved by the Employer's Representative. The programme should give a step by
step guide for the start-up taking into account, but not limited to, the checking of each disconnector,
circuit breaker, circuit identification, current, voltage and power indication, phase rotation and correct
phasing (this start-up shall also include all the substation auxiliary supplies and air ventilation).
Prior to placing each unit into commercial operation, commissioning tests shall be performed on the
plant. These tests will be coordinated by the Employer but the Contractor shall assume full responsibil-
ity for the testing operation and safety of plant within his scope of work.
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Employer and with the other Contractors to permit all neces-
sary tests to be performed.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary instruments to perform the tests on plant within his scope of
work. The test instruments shall be new, of a current model and type, and with the precision required
to conduct the specified tests. The Contractor shall follow operating procedures agreed by the Em-
ployer.
Copies of all log sheets and test readings shall be given to the Employer as the tests proceed.
After the conclusion of the tests, the Contractor shall compile a comprehensive test report to the ap-
proval of the Employer. This report shall include copies of all log and calculation sheets and all neces-
sary tables and curves to record the results of the tests.
1.23.2 Substation Material
The Employer's Representative's written approval of completed work stages shall be obtained before
continuing with erection. If should it be necessary to dismantle subsequently erected parts in order to
gain access for inspection on rectification this shall be at the Contractor's expense and no claim by the
Contractor for delay shall be considered. A completed and countersigned 'erection check list' is a pre-
requisite for approval to commence commissioning of a operation assembly.
The following checks and test measurements shall be made during erection unless otherwise speci-
fied in the Particular Technical Requirements of this Specification (as appropriate) in accordance with
agreed standards:
• checking for complete delivery

Lot 2 - Substations
• cable route and laying depth inspection

• special filling resistance tests
• screwed connections for correct assembly
• terminals and terminal connections for correct assembly
• checking of earthing connections and testing of earthing resistances
• measurement of insulation values
• fire-proof partitioning
• marking, inscription, provision of designation plates
• safety signs and warning signs
• setting indicators
• checks on wiring and cabling for conformity with the constructional circuit-drawings and plans.
• measurement of the resistance of main circuit
• power frequency voltage withstand test
The Employer's Representatives written approval of the erection works for a operation assembly with
the signature of the certificate of erection works complete, will allow the start of commissioning tests.
1.23.3 Electrical Equipment
The following checks and test measurements shall be made during commissioning unless otherwise
specified in this specification (as appropriate) in accordance with agreed standards:
• measurement of insulation values

• verification of earthing grid neutralization conditions (e.g. step or touch voltage) in accordance with
VDE 101 / IEEE80
• phase rotation
• polarity checks in the case of DC voltages
• protection circuit tests which will be not limited to:
- CT polarity and magnetization curves
• insulation resistance tests of relays, wiring and CTs
- primary injection of all CTs to prove:
- CT ratio and correct connection of 50, 51, 50 N, 51 N, 67, 67 N, 87 relays
- secondary injection tests for proof of timing tests on the relays and pick-up/drop off values of
important auxiliary relays shall be tested
• stability tests and in-zone fault test for differential protection schemes
• operation of tripping elements at reduced DC voltage.
• measurement of the end-to-end HF teleprotection channels transmission times
• combined logic tests of HF signalling / protection / autoreclosing / schemes under various simulat-
ed fault and operating conditions
All relay operations must show a correct operation of the respective circuit breaker
• fuses, overcurrent trips, short-circuit trips, time settings, relay settings

• safety signs and warning signs
• setting indicators
• checks on wiring and cabling for conformity with the constructional circuit-drawings and plans
• high voltage test on cables and switchgear
• functional test on equipment

Lot 2 - Substations
1.23.4 Control and Monitoring Equipment
During the erection period and before the associated plant item is put into operation all control and
monitoring equipment shall be tested. These tests shall include calibration and function tests in addi-
tion to on-line commissioning for the following:
• calibration tests of all analogue measuring loops including all remote indications and recorders and
the input signals used for closed loop control
• wiring test of all control cabling in the field, relay room and control rooms combined with the func-
tion tests
• testing of all control modules in the control room
• functional testing of remote control of drives, circuit breakers, solenoid valves, actuators etc.
• testing of remote and logic control devices especially all sequence logic equipment using simulated
inputs
• testing of all interlocks to ensure safe operation
• testing of the alarm annunciation and event recorder system in connection with all field and control
room devices using simulated inputs
• testing of all closed loop controls.
The Contractor shall on request submit a comprehensive description of each test. This shall include
the type and classification of all test equipment and shall be submitted at least two months before the
proposed date on which each test is to be carried out unless otherwise specified.
Certificates shall be issued for each test made. Group certificates are acceptable for the tests of ca-
bling and similar items.
1.23.5 Telecommunication Equipment
General
Before field testing is started, the Contractor shall verify that all communications equipment has been
updated with the latest engineering changes. If any updates have been omitted that are deemed nec-
essary by the Employer's Representative, the Contractor shall immediately perform the necessary
modifications.
The field tests include fibre reel test, installation tests, communications tests, and integrated telecom-
munication system tests.
Fibre-Optic Cable Field Acceptance Test
The Contractor shall perform field acceptance test and document the results of the installed cable to
verify the cable's performance as required by this specification. The Contractor shall notify the Em-
ployer and the Employer's Representative in advance so that the Employer and the Employer's Rep-
resentative can witness these tests. If the cable does not pass the field acceptance test, the Contrac-
tor shall replace the cable at the Contractor's expense with cable that does meet these specifications.
Attenuation per Distance / Uniformity
The Contractor shall measure the attenuation vs. distance and attenuation uniformity of the fibres
while the cable is on the reel as well as of the installed cable using an Optical Time Domain Reflec-

Lot 2 - Substations
tometer (OTDR). Measurements will be made at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. The attenuation of the fibre-
optic cable shall not exceed the requirements in these specifications.
Attenuation with Bending
The Contractor shall perform attenuation with bending tests using a 260 mm diameter mandrel on the
cable and a 75 mm and 25 mm mandrel on selected individual fibres. The attenuation due to bending
shall not exceed the requirements in these specifications.
Tensile Strength of Cable
The Contractor shall extract a sample length of cable from each reel and subject it to a pulling tension
of 550 kg force and inspect for cable damage due to stress. The Contractor shall measure before, dur-
ing, and after the test pull. The attenuation increase due to tensile stress shall not exceed the re-
quirements in these specifications.
Fibre-Optic Equipment Field Acceptance Test
Operational tests shall be carried out in order to demonstrate correct system operation also in con-
junction with other parts of the telecommunication system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct test procedures and testing shall be done in the
presence of the Employer's Representative. The tests shall include but not be limited to the following:
• check of optical continuity of the transmission path

• measurement of bit error rate
• measurement of jitter performance
• measurement of laser and receiver characteristics
• measurement of transmission times for protection and control signals
• individual checks of each transmitted signal
• TMS functional tests
• check of safety measures (e.g. laser shutdown) and alarm systems (including alarm processing in
the TMS and monitoring & SCADA system)
• measurements of optical parameters (attenuation, chromatic dispersion) shall be performed for
each fibre on the completely installed sections of the transmission path.
The results of these measurements shall be stored in a database for comparing them with subsequent
check measurements.
Documentation has not been met, the Contractor shall locate and correct all equipment faults, which
have caused this shortfall in specified availability.
1.24 Labels and colours for equipment
1.24.1 Warning notices
The Contractor shall provide sufficient warning notices and signs for the Works of a form and wording
acceptable to the Employer.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.24.2 Nameplates
Each major and auxiliary items of equipment shall have a nameplate permanently affixed thereto, or
as directed, showing in a legible and durable manner the serial number, name and address of the
Contractor, rating data, electrical and mechanical characteristics, and other significant information, as
applicable. Nameplate of distributing agents only will not be acceptable.
Nameplates shall also be provided where required for panel-mounted devices. Dials, gauges, and
nameplates shall be marked with the nomenclature and units of measure in the metric system, and a
schedule of such ma-kings shall be submitted for review and approval by the Consultant.
All nameplates shall be in the English (Rwandan part) and French (Burundian part) language.
1.24.3 Colours
The colours proposed shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval.
For guidance purposes, the Contractor could make the choices indicated hereafter:
• Aluminium: for equipment exposed to sunlight, the thermal effects of which could be detrimental to
protection performance.
• Equipment moving around the personnel's access areas shall comprise black stripes 6 cm wide
and inclined at 30° to the vertical.
Identification of services: all pipes, ducts and other services shall be colour coded in accordance with
BS 1710.
Other colours shall be to approval.
1.25 Maintenance equipment and spare parts
The Contractor shall provide maintenance equipment for the proper maintenance of the substations.
The maintenance equipment shall be sufficient to enable dismantling and reassembly, testing for wear
or distortion of all wearing parts, and replacement of all spare parts ordered.
The Contractor shall provide, for each procurement a complete and updated list of special tools and
spare parts to be delivered to the Employer at the time of receipt. It will be given two copies of minutes
before checking the list and six copies of the final list after verification.
Delivery to the Employer special tools and spare parts in accordance with the list will be a condition of
the issuance of the Certificate of Receipt, and the labelling and storage of these items on shelves and
provide to be installed by the manufacturer
The Contractor shall supply spare parts and consumable parts for the substations. Spare parts and
consumable parts shall be provided sufficient to enable routine maintenance and normal operation of
the equipment for 5 years. The Contractor is expected to be able to provide major items of spares for
15 years. In addition, spare parts shall be provided as replacement parts for all equipment subject to
normal wear and tear.

Lot 2 - Substations
All spare parts either specified or recommended by the Contractor shall be listed and priced in the
Tender. The Employer may order all or any of the spare parts at his discretion. The Contractor shall
supply the specified and recommended spare parts at the individual prices stated in the Schedule.
All spare parts ordered shall be interchangeable and suitable for use in place of corresponding parts
supplied with the plant. They shall comply with the Contract and shall be suitably marked and num-
bered for identification and prepared for permanent storage in a manner to prevent deterioration.
The Contractor shall not depend on use of the spare parts ordered by the Employer under the Con-
tract, for carrying out the Contractor's obligations.
The spare parts shall be suitably identified, treated and packed for a long storage in containers plainly
marked "SPARE PARTS ONLY". A packing list, indicating the contents of each such container, shall
be securely fastened in a moisture-proof envelope to the outside of the container. The packing list
shall also provide the following information:
• Contractor.
• Contract number.
• Identification, including Contractor's drawing number, reference of each spare part in the container.
The Contractor shall open the shipping crates containing the spare parts and identify the parts to the
Consultant. The Contractor shall then re-pack the parts for permanent storage and place them in the
store as directed by the Consultant on shelving or in cabinets to be provided by the Contractor.
1.26 Site facilities
1.26.1 General
Without prejudice to the generality of the various Clauses of the Contract and except for the facilities
referred to hereinafter, particular attention is drawn to the obligations of the Contractor to make his
own arrangements for supply, maintenance and furnishing of labour camps, staff residences, office,
workshops, stores and store compounds and watching and guarding thereof.
The Contractor shall give the Employer or the Consultant whenever required any detail in relation with
the Site facilities as herein specified.
1.26.2 Land for labour camps and staff residences
The Contractor will find on his own arrangement and costs the land for site office and material store
installation.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own cost all fencing, necessary clearing, land level-
ling, buildings, facilities and utilities. The contractor shall carry at his own cost the risks of interference
with outsiders.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.26.3 Area for storage, stocking area and workshop
The Contractor is responsible to find at his own expenses any open area of adequate size in the vicini-
ty of the Site for use as work-yard and storage areas. The Contractor shall provide at his own cost, all
fencing, any necessary clearing, land levelling, foundation and above ground structures for sheds,
stocking areas, covered areas, workshops, electricity, telephone and water distribution, etc. as he may
need to meet his requirements.
1.26.4 Access to working area
The Contractor will provide all access to working area.
1.26.5 Site office for the consultant and employer
The Contractor shall provide fully furnished office accommodation consisting two office rooms of at
least 10 m² each and an adjoined meeting room of at least 25 m², complete with water and electricity
supply, lighting, air condition, kitchen, toilets taking into account women workers, waste water and
sewage, and other facilities as requested by the Employer. Telephone, Fax and high speed (broad
band of W-Fi) internet facilities (internal network, Skype telephone, etc.) must be provided.
Furnishing of each office room shall consist of but not be limited to:
• 2 desks with 8 chairs,

• 3 file cabinets,
• 1 table for the meeting room
• 2 wall mounted information plates,
• 2 Laptops, latest Windows 7 or better edition, MS Office package, MS Project, including licenses,
• 1 colour multifunction printer (A3 and A4), all in one ( printer, photocopy, and scanner)
1.26.6 Lighting
The Contractor shall provide sufficient lighting to ensure that, at all times:
• safe working conditions are provided for all personnel on the work sites;
• the Works can be constructed in complete compliance with the Contract;
• complete inspections of all work in progress can be made by the Consultant, and
• security of the Works area and public safety measures are adequate and effective.
Unless otherwise directed the minimum intensity of illumination on ground or working surface to be
provided for the various operators or work areas shall be as tabulated below:

Lot 2 - Substations
Table 3: Illumination Minimum Requirements
Design Val- Minimum Measured

Operation or Area to be illuminated
ue Value (Lux)
(Lux)
Earthworks and excavation 50 20
Access and haul roads where cross traffic or other hazard-

20 10
ous conditions exist
Concrete placing 100 50
Maintenance shops and mechanical and electrical works 300 200
The Contractor shall supply a suitable instrument to the Consultant for measuring the intensity of illu-
mination. The instrument shall comply with BS 667 or equivalent standard as approved by the Con-
sultant.
All moving plant used during night operations shall be equipped with sufficient lights and reflectors and
fluorescent markings to ensure safe working conditions.
The approval by the Consultant of the Contractor's proposals for lighting shall not relieve the Contrac-
tor of any of his liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
1.26.7 Housing facilities
Contractor will be in charge of his housing facilities work installations and offices.
In addition, Contractor shall be in charge of housing facilities for four (4) consulting local supervisors
(two in Rwanda and two in Burundi) during construction phase (each house shall be fully furnished, in-
cluding water, electricity, security...).
1.26.8 Water supply
The Contractor will make all necessary provisions for the supply of water (potable water and raw water
for washing, gardens and fire-fighting, etc.) required for the execution of the Works as well as ade-
quate quantities of potable water for his own purposes in the following places:
• Contractor camps,
• all the storage areas,
• at every place of work.
For the camps and storage areas related to contract it has been considered that an approximate
3
amount of 30 m /day would be adequate. The limit of supply will be the limit of the main camps.
The Contractor shall then make all provisions for the supply of water in the limit of his own camps.

Lot 2 - Substations
The potable water shall be drawn throughout the Construction Period and after completion of the con-
struction from an existing well. Water shall be treated in a water treatment plant to a standard equiva-
lent to or better than WHO's General Drinking Water Quality Criteria. After treatment the water shall be
pumped to a storage tank from where it shall be distributed by gravity to all consumers.
The water supply system shall be designed, constructed, operated and maintained throughout the
Construction Period by the Contractor and handed over to the Employer at the completion of the
Works.
1.26.9 Lifting and transportation equipment
The Contractor shall supply all lifting, handling and transporting equipment he may require at its ware-
house, storage and laydown areas or elsewhere on the Site.
1.27 Telephone and communications
The Contractor shall propose an efficient system of communication between the different site works
during the whole Construction Period.
The Contractor shall provide for his own purpose mobile phones.
Alternatively, the Contractor shall furnish, and maintain portable multi-channel two-way hand-held ra-
dio units with rechargeable batteries and charger units. The system shall provide for clear two¬way
conversation be-tween the sets over the area of the site works.
1.28 Sewerage & Sanitation
The Contractor shall, subject to the Consultant's approval, design, construct, operate and maintain
throughout the Construction Period sewerage systems comprising collection, treatment and disposal
for his camp and for the Substations. The effluent from the sewage treatment systems shall comply
with the operational Standard in the country.
The sewerage systems shall be designed to handle the discharges corresponding to the estimated
water demands. All plans and specifications shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval prior to
construction.
Temporary or mobile sanitation facilities shall also be provided on the construction sites in a number
not less than one toilet for 30 workers.
The sewerage system for the Substations shall be handed over to the Employer at the completion of
the Works. All other temporary sanitary accommodation shall be removed, following a decommission-
ing procedure to be prepared by the Contractor and non-objected by the Consultant in order to prevent
any risk of contamination.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.29 Solid wastes
The Contractor shall make all provisions, subject to the Consultant's approval, for collection and dis-
posal of solid wastes from all camps and places of working. Wastes shall be collected at least twice a
week and, if allowed by national regulations, burnt and immediately buried.
1.30 Power supply
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the supply of electric power and lighting as re-
quired for the construction of the Works for his own purpose.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the supply of electric power and lighting at his
own camp and shall make his own arrangement of the lighting at particular locations on site works.
Any generator plant shall be adequately silenced and located so as to keep the noise level at the
nearest housing or office area below 65 db (A). The power supply shall comply with the national
standard of 400/230 V AC and 50 Hz.
At the completion of the Works, the distribution lines to the Contractor's camp shall be connected to
the Works and handed over to the Employer.
The Contractor shall provide one electrical supply cubicle (50 kVA) for each of the storage areas and
work-shops prepared by the Contractor under the here above paragraph of the present Specification.
The cost of installation and maintenance of such power supply will be spread over the other items of
the Schedule of Prices.
1.31 Meetings
1.31.1 Kick-off meeting
A kick-off meeting shall be organized for each sub-lot at the Employer's premises or on site as soon as
possible after coming into force of the Contract. The Employer, the Consultant as well as the Contrac-
tor's project management shall take part to this meeting.
The points to be discussed during the meeting are (but not limited to):
• Presentation and organization charts, complete addresses,

• Communication plan
• Numeration of documents and letters
• Access to site procedure
• Detailed list of documents for approval
• Detailed time schedule
• Site plan
• Delivery procedures (exonerations, custom formalities...)
• Technical aspects
• Payment procedures
• Assurances

Lot 2 - Substations
• Inauguration (if any)

• Other points according to the situation.
1.31.2 Other meetings
The Contractor or his nominated Representative shall participate, at Employer's or Consultant's Head
Office, or at Site, in progress and co-ordination meetings convened by the Consultant. Such meetings
will generally be held at regular intervals through prior notice, but may also be convened without prior
notice, in the event of any unusual occurrence, at the discretion of the Consultant.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant of any unusual occurrence which he con-siders
would justify an exceptional meeting.
The agenda shall include approval of the minutes of the previous meetings, progress of the works with
respect to the schedule and analysis of the difficulties encountered in the work.
The minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the Consultant and shall be deemed, after approval by
the other participants, to be written confirmation of the declarations, instructions and decisions taken
during the meeting.
1.32 Progress report
By the last working day of each calendar month, the Contractor shall submit two copies of a monthly
progress report which shall contain at least the following information:
• Percentage progress of the Works compared with the approved programme, together with a de-
scription and percentage estimate of the work programmed for the following month.
• List of Contractor's Equipment on Site together with its deployment during the month.
• List of all personnel employed on Site.
• Health and safety records including accident record, if any.
• Summary of all work carried out during the month in question together with a description of any dif-
ficulties or problems occurring therein.
• Description of the daily climatic conditions during the month.
• Payment schedule.
• Situation with respect to payments, together with the dates on which the Payment Certificates were
submitted by the Contractor.
• Description of any claim made by the Contractor during the month.
• State of progress of customs clearance and local transport operations.
• Inventory of materials and equipment stored on Site.
• Tests in progress or already carried out during the month and those planned for the next month.
• Training (on-going Schedule of trainings to perform, already performed, training description for
training performed during reporting period).
Within two working days of receipt of the monthly reports, the Consultant will return to the Contractor
one copy marked for amendment together with any separate comments for correction or addition to
the report, as well as an electronic writable copy.

Lot 2 - Substations
Within two working days of receipt of the Consultant's comments the Contractor shall submit copies of
the monthly progress report in quantity to be defined with the Employer, which will include all of the
corrections, additions and amendments requested by the Consultant.
Each monthly report shall be in a format approved by the Consultant, and will include a soft copy of
the documents.
1.33 Operation and maintenance manuals
1.33.1 General
The Contractor shall provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O & M manuals), the scope of
which shall be suitable for fully informing the Employer’s staff on all aspects of the operation and
maintenance of the substations.
The content of the O & M manuals shall be directly applicable to the line. Standard instructions cover-
ing a number of sizes and/or models of proprietary equipment will be accepted provided they cover the
items supplied and these items are clearly identified throughout the O & M manual.
The O & M manuals shall be subdivided on a Section-by-Section basis, with the content for any one
Section in a self-contained volume, complete and separate in all respects from the content of other
Sections.
The O & M manual content for each Section of the instructions shall comprise the following separate
parts:
Contents
• Part 1 - Description
• Part 2 - Operation
• Part 3 - Maintenance
• Part 4 - Drawings and diagrams
• Part 5 - Brochures for Proprietary Equipment
Precautions and warnings relating to the safety of persons and of the equipment shall be clearly stated
at the beginning of the manual.
Sketches or photographs shall be included in the text whenever necessary for clarity.
The Contractor shall submit for approval draft copies of each manual.
Final version shall be strictly identical to approved drafts taking into account the possible amendments
required by the Consultant, final setting values determined during the commissioning of the Substa-
tion, etc.
1.33.2 Format and compilation
For the final O & M manual the text, diagrams, drawings, brochures and all other instructions content
shall be reproduced in ink by letterpress or offset printing or in carbon by electrostatic printing. Repro-

Lot 2 - Substations
ductions obtained by using dyes, chemicals or photo-sensitive or heat-sensitive materials are not ac-
ceptable.
All text shall be on size A4 paper except that brochures of smaller sizes will be accepted for minor
components of proprietary equipment provided they have adequate binding margins.
The main text shall be on white paper.

The paper used in the final version of the O&M manual shall be of the following archival quality mate-
rial:
• White sheets:
2 2
70 g/m to 106 g/m ;
• Coloured sheets:
2
not less than 70 g/m .
Diagrams and drawings provided as part of the O&M manual shall be size A3 wherever the original is
size A3 or larger and size A4 for all others.
The manual shall be strongly bound in a durable stiff cover bearing the title in approved legend. Bound
volumes shall not exceed 29 cm by 32 cm in size and be more than 8 cm thick. All volumes shall bear
on the spine an approved shortened version of the title.
1.33.3 Detailed instructions content
1.33.3.1 Part 1 - Description
• History
Brief statement of the organisations involved in the design, manufacture and erection of the line in-
cluding main subcontractors and the dates of the commissioning tests.
• Function
Brief statement of the function of the substations.
• Description
Description of each ancillary component, including as appropriate the type, make, model number,
design features including control and protection, and main performance characteristics.
1.33.3.2 Part 2 - Operation
• In-Service Check List

Tabulated list of all conditions to be checked and the required frequency of checking while the line
is in service; also the action to be taken if incorrect conditions are found.
• Fault Diagnosis
Fault diagnosis based on symptoms of malfunction.
1.33.3.3 Part 3 - Maintenance
• Maintenance instructions
Schedule of all maintenance operations including:

Lot 2 - Substations
- components and conditions to be checked;

- frequency of checking;
- acceptance criteria;
- action to be taken if criteria are not met.
• Assembly/Disassembly Procedures
Detailed description with diagrams, of all assembly and disassembly procedures, including all ad-
justment, tolerance, clearance and alignment data and lubrication requirements.
• Reconditioning and repair

Detailed repair and reconditioning procedures for non-replaceable components.
1.33.3.4 Part 4 - Drawings
One copy of each drawing referred to in the text or necessary for clear understanding and use of the
text, including as necessary assembly, layout and arrangement drawings, and detail component
maintenance drawings. The drawings shall be preceded by a list with titles and numbers, in numerical
order. The final O&M manual shall contain ‘’as-built‘’ drawings. The draft O&M manual shall contain
drawings current at the time of sub-mission.
1.33.3.5 Part 5 – Brochures for Proprietary Equipment
Manufacturers' brochures, instruction pamphlets, and the like containing the operation and mainte-
nance instructions of all ancillary proprietary equipment.
The brochures shall be preceded by a section index outlining the content of each brochure.
1.34 As Built drawings – Record drawings
As soon as miscellaneous works or any part thereof are properly built or installed or tested, the Con-
tractor shall ensure that the Approved Drawings are marked up to show the conditions as installed.
One copy of such marked up drawings shall be filed by the Contractor in a Substation office for the
operation staff disposal, as well as an electronic copy.
The Contractor shall furnish the final records drawings (As Built drawings) and other documents as
stated in Table included below.
1.35 Training and technical assistance
1.35.1 Overseas professional training
1.35.1.1 General
The Contractor shall provide training to the Employer's staff on the following subjects.

Lot 2 - Substations
• Advanced High Voltage Substations Design, Testing and commissioning up to 400 kV,
• Advanced High voltage Protection & Control systems,
• Modelling techniques for power system analysis and simulations
The Contractor shall submit a tentative training schedule and training outlines to the Employer / Con-
sultant at the start of the project for approval, including the duration and venue of each training.
All cost including air travel flight tickets, accommodation, meals, local transport etc. shall be borne by
the Contractor and are deemed to be included in the contract price.
The training program shall contain the subjects as described below.
1.35.1.2 Advanced Middle and High Voltage Substations Design, Testing and commissioning
up to 400 kV
Participants: 4 (two persons from Rwanda, 2 from Burundi),

Duration: 2 weeks.
The course shall include the following:
• Introduction to High voltage substations

• Substation equipments and criteria to selection
• HV AC substation design and considerations
• Fault calculations
• Insulation coordination
• Grounding design considerations
• HV GIS substations design and application
• Reactive power compensation on high voltage systems
• Protection & control of HV AC systems
• Testing and Commissioning of HV substations
1.35.1.3 Advanced High voltage Protection & Control systems

Duration: 1 week.
The course shall cover:
• Design of Protective Systems for HV networks

• Protection relays selection and coordination for Large Interconnected systems
• Various relay protection schemes
• Application of protection system to HV transmission lines
• Application of Protection Systems to Large power transformers and Reactors
• Design of Advanced Control system for HV systems
1.35.1.4 Modelling technics for power system analysis

Duration: 1 week.

Lot 2 - Substations
The course shall cover:
• Power system fundamentals

• Short circuit theory, terminology and calculation for HV systems
• Master basic modelling technics for power system analysis
• Symmetrical and unsymmetrical fault calculations
• Static and dynamic power system analysis and interpretation of results
• Economic Dispatch and Unit Commitment
1.35.2 Hands on site Training for Operation and Maintenance
• Hand on site training on Operation of HV substations

• On-site training on Troubleshooting and maintenance of main equipment for HV substations
1.35.3 Job site training
1.35.3.1 General
The Contractor shall provide, at site before the Taking Over of the substations adequate training in a
scheduled manner to the Employer’s staff designated for being in charge of the operation and mainte-
nance.
The training shall be carried out by qualified Instructor(s) for the duration stated in the Schedule of
Prices.
Detailed training program shall be submitted by the Contractor, three months before the beginning of
the training period(s).
The training shall be organised by the Contractor's Instructor(s) under the present Contract for approx-
imately a total of twenty trainees which are expected to follow partly or totally the courses.
Written material shall be furnished to each trainee. During the period(s) of instruction, the Instructor(s)
shall not be employed in any other capacity.
Within one month after the end of the training period the Contractor shall send to the Employer three
copies of completion Reports, with one copy to the Consultant, including material furnished to the
trainees during the courses.
Training will, ideally, be undertaken in two modules:
• the first being theoretical (classroom) training;

• the second being practical on Site.
1.35.3.2 Training during erection
The Contractor shall provide practical training by including some of the Employer's staff into the con-
tractor's Site erection and installation crews in order to gain first-hand knowledge of a system. Em-
ployer's staff could be ten electrical Engineers.

Lot 2 - Substations
The Employer shall confirm the availability and the number of this staff at the beginning of the erection
of the electrical equipment.
1.35.3.3 Training during site tests
Staff of the Employer will attend and witness jointly with the Consultant the main testing of the line at
site.
1.35.3.4 Training during trial operation
The Contractor will propose a programme of "on-the-spot" training during the trial operation of the
Works for a team of key staff of the Employer chosen for the future operation of the Substation. The
programme will be coordinated with and approved by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall make competent and experienced staff available for the training of the operating
staff during commissioning and trial operation.
The training provided for operations and maintenance staff during the trial operation period should be
a separate, practical training module.
Training programs and literature shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for re-
view/discussion at least three months before training commences. This gives adequate time for the
Employer to make suitable trainees available, amend the program or literature if necessary.
1.35.3.5 Training for the voltage change
The Contractor shall provide the required training to the Employer's staff to the future voltage change.
covering the following works (not limited to):
• Modifications of the power transformer

• Modifications of the instrument transformers
• Replacement of the surge arrestors
• Modifications of the protection relay and according settings
• Modifications of the SCADA system.
1.36 Site rehabilitation
Upon issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the whole of the Works the Contractor shall apply to the
Consultant for approval to demobilise the Site installations and on obtaining such approval shall re-
move from the Site all plant, equipment, stockpiles, temporary buildings, installations and all other fa-
cilities and things such as are no longer needed for the performance of any outstanding obligations
under the Contract.

Lot 2 - Substations
1.37 Documents to be supplied by the contractor
The following table gives a tentative and non-exhaustive list of documents to be supplied by the Con-
tractor.
1st stage 2nd Final stage

for stage As built drawings (Prior to
approval (before the issue of the Taking Over Maximum time for handover of docu-
Description of documents or shipping) Certificate) ments for
information (1) the 1st stage
Normal Reduced Normal CD or DVD
format format format (3)
(2)
5* 14 days after the end of each quarter
Quarterly and monthly for quarterly reports, 7 days after the
3**
reports end of each month for monthly re-
2*** ports
2* 2* 3* 1*
Drawings and design cal- As stated inConditions of Contract
culations in relation to 2** 1** 1** 1** (Key
civil works structures Dates)
1*** 1***
Drawings and Product 2* 2* 3* 1*
3 months before the date of the start
data
2** 1** 1** 1** of
Electrical, hydraulic dia-
1*** 1*** manufacture or procurement
grams
2* 3* 1*
3 months before the date of the start
Design calculations notes 1** 1** of
1** manufacture or procurement
1***
2*
Procurement documents During delivery of procurements
1**
2*
Contractor’s Quality Plan 1** 3 months after Commencement Date
1***
2*
Inspection and
Test Plan, work- 1** 4 months from Commencement Date
shop and site
1***
2*
Workshop tests and in-
one month before the date of any ma-
spection programme and 1**
jor test
procedures
1***
2*
Site tests and inspection
56 days before the date of each type
programme and proce- 1**
of tests for all equipment
dures
1***
1** 2*  First stage test reports 14 days
Workshop tests and in- before the date of second stage
1***
spection records tests
 Final report 14 days after tests
1* 3*  As tests proceed (<24 Hours)
Site tests and inspection
 Final test Report (30 days after
records 1*** 1** completion of the tests)
2*
Shipping documents and
1**
Erection manuals
1***
2* 3* 1st Stage (Draft) : 3 months before
Operation and mainte-
completion
nance manuals 1*** 1** Final Stage : Before Taking Over

Lot 2 - Substations
2* 3*
Spare part Book 4 months before completion
1*** 1**
Note:
* Copies to be sent to the Employer

** Copies to be sent to the Consultant (head office)
*** Copies to be sent to the Consultant Representative
(1) "As manufactured" Drawings and other final documents : 14 days before shipping
(2) Reduced Format: A2, A3 depending of the original Format and the type
Electronic format for drawings shall AutoCAD files at site

Lot 2 - Substations
2. Design basic data
2.1 Temperatures, wind, humidity, keraunic level
The following data have been chosen for the project:
Maximum air temperature 35 °C
Average air temperature 25 °C
Minimum air temperature 10 °C
Humidity 90 - 100 %
Altitude 2000 m
Reference gust wind speed (3 sec.) at 10 m high 36 m/s

Mercalli
Seismicity Degree VII
scale
Keraunic level 150
2.2 Pollution level
Pollution level to be considered for design purposes is level III “Heavy” which corresponds to a mini-
mal creepage distance of 25 mm/kV, applied to phase-to-phase voltages (or 43.3 USCD (level “d –
heavy”) mm/kV, as indicated in Standard IEC 60815-2008 edition.
2.3 Altitude of the different substations
The ground level of the different substations are listed in the following table:
Kigoma 1686 m
Gisagara 1733 m
Ngozi 1659 m
Gitega 1693 m
In order to adopt the same value as for the whole project, the value retained for the overhead lines, in
that case 2000 m is chosen.

Lot 2 - Substations
2.4 Earthquakes
For design purposes the horizontal acceleration of 0,25 g shall be taken into account.
2.5 Other conceptual data
2.5.1 Norms and standards
The technical specifications and standards in force for the study, the realization and the reception of
the technical installations and the civil engineering of the station of this project are the regulations and
the most recent standards recognized on the international plan such as the last recommendation of
the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) - the NF (French Standards), VDE or DIN (Ger-
man Standards).
The main standards to be considered are:
IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines,

IEC 60044/
Instrument transformers
61869
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accesso-
IEC 60051
ries,
IEC 60060 High-voltage test techniques,
IEC 60068 Environmental testing
IEC 60071 Insulation coordination,
IEC 60076 Power transformers,

IEC 60076 Power transformers - Part 6: Reactors,
IEC 60085 Electrical insulation - Thermal evaluation and designation,
IEC 60086 Primary batteries,

IEC 60099 Surge arresters,
IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1 000 V,
IEC 60214 Tap-changers,
IEC 60227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60255 Measuring relays and protection equipment,
Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal voltag-
IEC 60273
es greater than 1000 V,
IEC 60282 High-voltage fuses,
IEC 60287 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating

IEC 60296 Fluids for electrotechnical applications,

Lot 2 - Substations
IEC 60309 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes

IEC 60076 Power transformers - Part 7: Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers,
IEC 60358 Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers,
IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installations,
Specification of technical grade Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in electrical
IEC 60376
equipment
IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1
IEC 60502
kV up to 30 kV - ALL PARTS,
IEC 60512 Connectors for electronic equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60214 Tap-changers - Part 2: Application guide,

IEC 60598 Luminaires
IEC 60794 Optical fibre cables
Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in polluted
IEC 60815
conditions,
IEC 60865 Short-circuit currents
IEC 60870 Telecontrol equipment and systems,
IEC 60896 Stationary lead-acid batteries

IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear,
IEC 61076 Connectors for electronic equipment
IEC 61156 Multicore and symmetrical pair/quad cables for digital communications
IEC 61196 Coaxial communication cables
IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies,

IEC 61537 Cable management - Cable tray systems and cable ladder systems
IEC 61755 Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components
IEC 61850 Communication networks and systems in substations,
IEC 62052 Electricity metering equipment (AC) ; General requirements, tests and test conditions,
IEC 62053 Electricity metering equipment (AC); Particular requirements,
IEC 62219 Overhead electrical conductors - Formed wire, concentric lay, stranded conductors,
IEC 62271 High-voltage switchgear and control gear.
The calculation of the gantries shall be done in accordance to the following standards:
• CECM (European Convention for Constructional Steelwork)

• EURONORM 25 « Aciers de construction d'usage général »

Lot 2 - Substations
In this document, any weights or dimensions are tentative only, as the apparatuses which will be in-
stalled during the construction are not yet defined accurately and may vary according to the manufac-
turers.
2.5.2 Short circuit currents
The limit values to be considered in the project are not especially severe. However, in order to face fu-
ture enhancements and grid developments without having to replace components, the following values
have been chosen:
Voltage level Short-circuit value

220 kV 40 kA 3 s
110 kV 31,5 kA 3 s
30 kV 25 kA 3 s
The values specified for the equipment shall be at least equal to these values.
2.5.3 Isolation level
The coordination of insulation is the selection of the dielectric behaviour of equipment according to the
tensions which can appear in the network for which equipment is intended. The purpose of it is to find
an optimum between the economic point of view and that of the exploitation so that the probability of
defect due to the electric constraints imposed on equipment remains on an acceptable level.
2.5.3.1 Overvoltages during operation
Equipment is subjected to dielectric constraints which can be generated by various types of tension:
• overvoltages at industrial frequency which can appear during operation,

• the temporary overvoltages generated either by switching operations, or by atmospheric phenome-
na.
2.5.3.2 Overvoltages at power frequency
They come either from a default on the network (heightening of tension of a healthy phase during a
single phase earth fault), or of phenomena of resonance (heightening of tension at the open end of a
line), or of important load loss involving an overspeed of the generators, or by phenomena of ferro-
resonance and harmonics
2.5.3.3 Temporary overvoltages
Overvoltages of atmospheric origin are earth to phase or phase to phase overvoltages which appears
during atmospheric discharge, i.e. thunder.

Lot 2 - Substations
2.5.3.4 Isolation level
The International Electrotechnical Commission (CIS), in its publications 60071.1 and 60071.2 for the
range of standardized tensions, recommended the levels of insulation according to various overpres-
sures described previously.
Taking into account the fact that the area where the project has a rather high keraunic level (see §2.1
Temperatures, wind, humidity, keraunic level), and that the reliability of the network is an important cri-
terion, equipment will be dimensioned for impulse withstand voltages among most severe permitted by
current technologies of construction
Following values are required:
Designation Unity 220 kV 110 kV 30 kV 0,4 kV

Nominal voltage kV 220 110 30 0,4
Highest voltage for equipment kV 245 145 36 1
Power frequency voltage, 60 s kV crest 460 275 70 2,5
Impulse withstand voltage kV crest 1050 650 170 -
2.6 Neutral point connection
2.6.1 220 kV neutral point
The neutral point of the 220 kV shall be earthed solidly at the neutral point of the power transformers
with a ring current transformer and associated protection .
2.6.2 30 kV neutral point
In Rwanda, the earthing of the medium voltage at 30 kV level is realized by the mean of the auxiliary
transformer. Thus, this applies to Gisagara.
In Ngozi, the earthing of the medium voltage at 30 kV level is realized by the mean of of a earthing re-
actor. Thus, this applies to Ngozi.
2.6.3 LV neutral point
The star point shall be solidly connected to earth.
2.7 Voltage change
As already mentioned the line and relative new substations shall be dimensioned for 220 kV but oper-
ated in the first years at 110 kV. This has consequences on the equipment, as summarized here un-
der:

Lot 2 - Substations
Substation Work to be performed Contractor Others
Kigoma Re-routing of the line to the future X

220 kV substation
Gisagara Replacement of the 110 kV surge Delivery only. Founda- Replacement
arrestors by 220 kV ones tion and supporting
structure suitable for
both apparatus types
Switching of the measurement trans- CT and VT must be dual Voltage change
formers voltage (110 and 220
kV).
Switching of the power transformer X
Modification of the protection X
scheme, SCADA...
Ngozi Replacement of the 110 kV surge Delivery only. Founda- Replacement

arrestors by 220 kV ones tion and supporting
structure suitable for
both apparatus types
Switching of the measurement CT and VT must be dual Voltage change
transformers voltage (110 and 220
kV).
Switching of the power transformer X
Modification of the protection X
scheme, SCADA...
Gitega Re-routing of the line to the new X
220 kV substation
Transmission Arcing horn gaps to be modified X
line
Generally speaking, the equipment shall be dimensioned first for 220 kV, which is the target voltage,
while 110 kV is a temporary voltage only.
This does not apply to the extension bays in Gitega and Kigoma which will remain 110 kV bays with
110 kV equipment.

Lot 2 - Substations
3. Clearances in the substations

The Contractor shall make the calculation of the different distances and clearances required under his
entire responsibility and submit them for approval.
The dimensioning of the clearances in air within HV substations between phases and between phase
and earth is determining while considering the following criteria:
• Isolation coordination
• Substation construction and particularities
• Substation operation
In this project, two voltage levels are encountered:
• 220 kV in the new substations and

• 110 kV in the existing ones.
The dimensions chosen for the existing substations are maintained. This is anyway mandatory in Kig-
oma which is just completed with one additional bay, identical to the neighbouring ones.
The Contractor shall calculate the minimum clearances as resumed hereunder, and submit the results
for approval:
value value
(220 kV) (110 kV)
Minimum distance dmCEI (IEC 60071-2) 2,1 1,3
Minimum distance between phases dpp 4,5 3
Specified bay width 16 11
The values mentioned here above have been used only in order to establish a tentative layout of the
substations, the layouts being in return used for better comparison of the bids. They must be checked
as well.

Lot 2 - Substations
4. 110 and 220 kV equipment
4.1 General
The following equipment will be determined according to the:
• network voltage level,

• insulation coordination,
• climate conditions,
• nominal standard values,
• flowing current,
• network short circuit current.
The concerned equipment is:
• circuit breakers,
• disconnectors,
• surge arresters,
• current & voltage transformers,
• bus bars
The following characteristics shall apply to all equipment:
Insulation
All supports and post insulators shall be made of thoroughly vitrified brown glazed porcelain with plain
sheds and shall comply with the regulations of IEC 60168 and IEC 60273. Glazing shall be free from
bulges, cracks and defects. Repair of insulators is not permitted. Each insulator shall be indelibly and
legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, a batch number, and in case of tension
and suspension insulators, with the guaranteed electromechanical strength and temperature rise.
Connection terminals
If not otherwise specified, the connection point will be in plane aluminium or copper plates, the area of
the plate and number of holes will be determined by the nominal current of the equipment. The clamps
shall be harmonized in order to reduce as far as possible the number of types and sizes.
Mechanical strength
All equipment will have the mechanical strength to resist to the following:
• Efforts due to wind corresponding to the dynamics pressure of 81 daN/m (36 m/s).
2
• Mechanical efforts due to the permanents external connection on the terminals.

• Dynamics efforts of the short circuit transmitted to the connection point.
Nominal current
The nominal current of the primary equipment shall comply with IEC standards.

Lot 2 - Substations
The minimum assigned current is given in the single line diagram and technical data specification of
each equipment respectively.
Control panels and terminal boxes
Outdoor control panels and terminal boxes of mechanical protection class of IP55 shall be provided,
external cables connection will be done via cable gland mounted on plate at lower part of the panels.
To prevent the condensation, a heating resistor switched by a thermostat shall be provided.
The circuit and wiring diagram shall be attached in the pocket available on the panel`s door.
Auxiliary supply
• 110 V DC for control, command, interlocking and signalisation;

• 110V DC for operating mechanism`s motor drive;
• 230V AC for heating resistor, lighting and socket.
Connexion and installation
The equipment will be designed for indoor or outdoor use according to the site plan, the power circuit
of the equipment will be done using tube and aluminium or copper cables.
The connexion for auxiliary circuit will be realized with insulated low voltage cables.
Operating conditions
All equipment shall be designed to be installed and operated under the climatic conditions as per §2,
4.2 Circuit Breakers
4.2.1 General specifications
The circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 62771-100.
The three phase circuit breakers shall be of the life tank, SF6 gas type for arc quenching for each pole,
connected together with the spring mechanism command operated by a direct current motor.
Local control and command shall be available.
Besides the command box containing auxiliaries, each circuit breaker will be equipped with:
• operation counter for circuit breaker(per pole for line circuit breaker);
• Mechanical indicating devices shall be provided showing whether the breaker is in the "open" or
"closed" position. The amount of drive energy stored shall also be indicated by suitable means (e.g.
pressure gauge). These indicators shall be visible from outside.
4.2.1.1 Operation
The HV circuit breakers shall be suitable for trip free independent operation. Single break or double
break per phase and rapid single shot autoreclosing for three phase or single phase switching has to

Lot 2 - Substations
be provided. A phase discordance timer relay shall trip all phases in case of prolonged phase discord-
ance. Furthermore, the CBs shall be equipped with an anti-pumping device.
The circuit breakers shall be able to carry the rated current, interrupting all currents from zero to the
symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents, as well as inductive currents.
The circuit breaker shall be operated by a spring charged operation mechanism. The drive mechanism
of each CB pole shall be autonomous and only electric supply voltage shall be necessary for its re-
loading. Any motor drive for charging a circuit breaker shall be DC operated. The stored energy shall
be sufficient for one complete rated operating cycle, plus one additional C-O operation without reload-
ing. All line bay circuit breakers shall be capable of rapid single-phase autoreclosure.
For activation of circuit breakers operation, it shall be provided with one electric closing coil and two
(2) electric trip coils per pole. The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision.
The circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the fault currents with the associated inherent
rates of rise of restriking voltages and amplitude factors. The circuit breaker switching chambers shall
be porcelain insulated and suitable for outdoor. Circuit breakers shall be mounted on hot-dip galva-
nized steel structures, which are included in the supply.
In case of low gas pressure, not permitting safe interruption of the full rated breaking current, the op-
eration shall be blocked automatically through a pressure sensitive temperature compensated device.
If the circuit breaker is of the multiple break type it must be ensured that all breaks close and open
simultaneously within the limits required by the standards.
The CB must be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by out of synchronism condi-
tions associated with auto-reclosure.
The high voltage terminals of circuit breakers shall allow connection on either side of the circuit break-
er and shall be flat contact connectors.
The circuit breaker shall be equipped with brown-coloured porcelain insulating columns provided with
shed.
The auxiliary switch for remote switch position indication shall be connected with the moving contact
member by means of mechanical linkages only.
A sufficient number of cable entry glands shall be foreseen on all operating mechanisms and terminal
blocks shall be supplied and installed as appropriate.
The mechanism of each circuit breaker shall be designed so that it can be operated via a numerical
bay control unit as well as via an outdoor marshalling kiosk (if any) and locally at the circuit breaker.
The operating mechanism shall be furnished with a local-remote selector switch and local push but-
tons or a standard control switch, mounted in the mechanism and wired in the control circuits. Local
electrical opening and closing of the breaker shall be permitted only when the selector switch is in the
"local" position.
Padlocks or other approved locking arrangement shall be provided for locking the door of the CB con-
trol cubicle and to prevent not allowed operation of the CB.

Lot 2 - Substations
All circuit breakers shall be connected for remote control as described. This shall comprise "on-off"
control and "open", "closed" and "discrepancy" indication on the switchboards and in the control room
of the station. Electrical opening and closing of the breaker locally shall be permitted only when the se-
lector switch is in the "local" position. The operating mechanism shall be provided with an operating
counter.
The operation voltage of the CBs shall be DC 110 V within a range of 80% to 110% for closing and
70% to 110% for opening.
SF6 gas will comply with IEC 60376, and the CB will shipped and stored with few SF6 pressure, the re-
filling will be done on site.
4.2.1.2 Auxiliary contacts and protections
Auxiliary contacts for external circuits will be at least 10 (5 NO& 5 NC) for carrying capacity of 10 A.
The auxiliary contacts will be dedicated to the pole respectively for the single pole command circuit
breaker.
Thermal overload Miniature Circuit Breaker and contactors will be used to protect the motor.
Any switching shall be inhibited in that case that the stored energy would not be sufficient for switch-
ing. Additionally, a signal shall be sent to the control system via a NC contact.
All auxiliary circuitry will be installed in the control panel.
SF6 pressure will be monitored by a density meter with two electric contact; one for alarm, the second
for blocking the circuit breaker.
Closing circuit of the CB shall be provided with one (1) electric closing coil and two (2) electric trip coils
per pole.
4.2.1.3 Control and command box
The control and command box will have the following elements: contactors for open and closing com-
mand, push button for open and closing command, protection devices, heating resistance, terminal for
wire connection, lighting and single phase socket.
4.2.2 Particular requirements
The command will be single pole and single pole autoreclosing for the line bays, The command will
be Three pole for the transformer and shunt reactors (if any).
The operating sequence assigned to the line bays quick autoreclosing is:
O - 0,3s- CO - 3min - CO.
The operation of the circuit breaker will be possible as:
• remote operations from the control panel

Lot 2 - Substations
• local operation in case of emergency form the local command box, the circuit breaker being possi-
bly energized.
The following technical characteristics are required as a minimum:
Required value Required value

DESCRIPTION UNITS
(110 kV) (220 kV)
Type SF6 SF6
Drive system for line bay circuit breaker Single pole Single pole
Drive system for transformer bay circuit breaker Three pole Three pole
Rated maximum voltage kV 145 245
Rated current A 1250 1250
Short circuit breaking current (3 s) kA 31,5 40
First pole to clear factor 1,5 1,5
Operating sequence (line) O- 0,3 s CO O-0,3 s CO
3min. - CO 3 min. - CO
Motor voltage VCC 110 110
Closing , opening coil signalization voltage VCC 110 110
4.2.3 Spare parts and tools
The following spare parts and tools are to be delivered for the circuit breakers as follows:
Kigo- Gisa- Ngoz Gite

ma gara i -ga
SF6 circuit breaker, 220 kV for line 1 1
SF6 circuit breaker, 110 kV for line 1 1
Set fixed and moving contacts for SF6 circuit breakers pc 3 3
Gasket/seals for circuit breaker of each type installed,
pc 3 3
complete set
Driving mechanism 3 phase, complete for 220 kV CB pc 1 1
Driving mechanism 1 phase, complete for 220 kV CB 1 1
Driving mechanism 1 phase, complete for 110 kV CB 1 1
Gaskets/seals for driving mechanism of each type installed,
pc 1 1 1 1
set
Relays for circuit breaker drive, set pc 1 2 2 1
Valve coils, set (if any) set 1 2 2 1
Close coils, set set 1 2 2 1
Trip coils, set set 1 2 2 1
Heating resistors set 1 2 2 1
Leakage detectors set 1 1 1 1

Lot 2 - Substations
4.3 Disconnectors
4.3.1 General Specifications
The disconnectors shall comply with the IEC 62271-102.

The disconnectors are composed of the following elements:
• The blades of the isolators shall simultaneously open and close in a horizontal plane;
• Insulators shall be made of brown glazed porcelain;
• Hot-dip galvanized steel structures;
• Control and command box for operating mechanism;
• Mechanical link for triple pole operation.
4.3.1.1 Primary contacts
The disconnector in close position shall ensure the nominal current flow and also supporting the nor-
mal or suddenly overloads and without excessive heat than assigned to the blades. They shall be
suitable for off-load isolation at the maximum permissible continuous operating voltage and capable
also of withstanding the short circuit forces specified. The contacts shall be made of hard drawn elec-
trolyte copper strip or plated silver. High-pressure type contacts shall wipe the contact surface while
opening and closing. The contacts shall be so designed that the wiping action shall not cause scouring
or abrasion on the contact surfaces. The wiping action shall be sufficient to remove any film of oxide,
which may be formed during the operation of the switches and so designed that binding cannot occur
after remaining closed for prolonged periods of time in polluted atmosphere.
4.3.1.2 Connection
Overhead conductors shall be connected to the disconnectors.
The earthing blades shall be installed on one or two sides of the disconnector.
4.3.1.3 Blocking
Mechanical and electrical blockings shall ensure to avoid minimum the following conditions:
• Concurrent use of closing and opening contactors

• Use of electric motor in the course of manual operation
• Electric operation when the crank for manual operation has been inserted.
• Activation of main blades when earthing blades are activated and vice versa
• Mechanical blocking of the main blades when earthing blades are activated and vice versa
4.3.1.4 Command
The command will operate three poles simultaneously and in case of motorized system, the use of
emergency manual command will automatically inhibit the electric operations.

Lot 2 - Substations
Auxiliary contacts for external circuits will be at least 10 (5 NO& 5 NC) for carrying capacity of 10 A.
Thermal overload Miniature Circuit Breaker and contactors will be used to protect the motor.
4.3.1.5 Control and command cabinet
The control and command box will have the following elements:
Contactors for open and closing command, push button for open and closing command, protection
devices, heating resistance, terminal for wire connexion and the moving parts of the disconnecting
switches have to be mounted in service-free bearing.
4.3.2 Particular requirements
4.3.2.1 Disconnectors, earth blades
The disconnectors shall be of horizontal single break type having two rotating posts per pole or of the
centre breaking type. The blades of the isolators shall simultaneously open and close in a horizontal
plane.
Each three-phase isolator shall consist of three identical poles linked together mechanically and shall
be suitable for triple pole operation.
The line disconnectors shall be equipped with earthing blades on both sides, the busbar disconnectors
on one side.
All disconnectors and earthing switches shall be remote operated from the control room and equipped
with emergency manual command system. Therefore all switches and earth switches shall be driven
by motors.
The disconnector shall be equipped with padlocking system in OFF position for security in mainte-
nance works.
4.3.2.2 Earthing switches
The transformer bays shall be equipped additionally with earthing switches.
The outdoor earthing switches are single-column switches with rotary moving knife in vertical plane,
These switches shall be operated in 3 phase mode only and shall be electrically interlocked with the
busbar disconnector.

Lot 2 - Substations
4.3.2.3 Technical characteristics
The following technical characteristics are recommended:

DESCRIPTION UNITS
(110 kV) (220 kV)
Type Three pole Three pole
Rated maximum voltage kVeff 145 245
Rated current A 1250 1250
Rated short time withstand current (3 s) kA 31,5 40
Motor voltage VCC 110 110
Closing , opening coil signalization voltage VCC 110 110
4.3.3 Spare parts
The following spare parts and tools are to be delivered for the disconnectors as follows:
Gisagara Ngozi
Current path for disconnector set 6 6
Current path for earth blades set
Current path for earthing switch set 4 4
Driving mechanism for disconnector (3 phase) pc 2 2
Driving mechanism for earth blades (3 phase) pc
Driving mechanism for earthing switch (3 phase) pc
4.4 Current transformer
Current transformers shall be used for measuring and protection purposes. They shall comply with IEC
60044. Current transformers must be suitable for outdoor installation under the ambient conditions as
described in the respective section of these bidding documents. They shall be self-supporting type and
ring core design.
The winding shall be immersed in oil and isolated by special paper with mechanical resistance and
high insulation level.
The oil resistant gaskets resistant to the temperature up to 100 °C shall be used.
The following accessories are required:
• secondary winding connexion box

• oil filling cap
• drain valves
• earthing terminal for grounding the external box
• oil level indicators, showing any gas formation or oil loss
• nameplate as IEC standards
• lugs for lifting the complete current transformer

Lot 2 - Substations
4.4.1 Nominal current
4.4.1.1 Primary current
In this project two current transformer ratio shall be used in order to adapt to the future change of the
load, as follows:
• Line bay: 400-800 A

• Transformer bay (20 MVA): 100-200 A.
4.4.1.2 Secondary currents
Secondary current of all current transformers shall be 1 A.
4.4.2 Accuracy class
The current transformer`s accuracy class to be used depend on the types of equipment to be con-
nected to.
For the above uses, the following accuracy classes shall be used:
• 0,2 for active and reactive energy meters

• 0,5 for other active and reactive energy meters
• 0,5 for wattmeter, ammeters, power and directional relays.
This error is in % and defined in IEC 60044-2: 5 and 10% (5P et 10P).
The accuracy to be used is 5% (5P) as the numerical protective relays will be used,
4.4.3 Power burden
4.4.3.1 Measurement core
The power burden of the current transformer is the apparent power in VA that the current Transformer
can deliver respecting the chosen accuracy class.
The relays, measurement equipment and copper losses are considered.
The transformers used for the differential protection shall have well balanced cores and shall be coor-
dinated with the others cores entering in this function.
The values indicated in the technical sheets are for bid comparison only, and the EPC contractor shall
make an accurate calculation to be submitted for approval. While doing this, he may find different val-
ues.

Lot 2 - Substations
4.4.3.2 Protection core
5P20 shall be used as advised by the manufacturers of the distance protection relays.
4.4.4 Rated continuous thermal current
The rated continuous thermal current is the rated primary current.
4.4.5 Specifications
The technical specifications of current transformer shall be checked by the Contractor considering the
protection relays to be used (see Chapter 9) automation and protection related, as well as the meas-
urement equipment.
The technical specifications of phase current transformer are given in table below.

DESCRIPTION UNITS
Type single pole single pole

Rated maximum voltage kVpeak 145 245
Short time withstand current (3 s) kA 31,5 40
The tentative core assignment as well as other complementary characteristics are specified in Chapter
9 - Protection under §9.1.7.
4.4.6 Spare parts
Spare current transformers shall be foreseen as follows:
• Kigoma: 0
• Gisagara: 1 pc 220-110 kV
• Ngozi: 1 pc 220-110 kV
• Gitega: 1 pc 110 kV
4.5 Voltage transformers
Two types of voltage transformer may be used, inductive voltage transformers or capacitive voltage
transformers.
The Bidders are free to choose inductive or capacitive types (or both) but will justify their choice ac-
cordingly.
The voltage transformer shall comply with IEC 60044.

Lot 2 - Substations
The power and precision classes indicated in the data sheets are for comparison of the different bids
only. The Contractor shall make a precise calculation of the burden, to be approved by the Consultant.
The calculated values may be then different.
4.5.1 Definition and general condition
4.5.1.1 Rated voltage factor
The rated voltage factor shall be equal to 1.5 permanently.
4.5.1.2 Transformation ratio
The secondary phase voltage for all equipment shall be 100V/√3.
The rated transformation ratio shall be 220 000/√3 / 100/√3 / 100/3 and 110 000/√3 / 100/√3 / 100/3.
The apparatuses shall be dual tension for easy voltage change.
The voltage transformer shall have accuracy class of 0,2 for measurement at nominal power burden
for 220 kV equipment.
The specific load power factor to be considered is 0.8 (inductive), the voltage transformer shall also
have the accuracy class of 3P as recommended by IEC 60044-3.
4.5.1.3 Characteristics
The following table shows the characteristics of 110kV and 220 kV voltage transformers:

DESCRIPTION UNITS
(110 kV) (220 kV)
Type Single pole Single pole
Rated maximum voltage kVeff 145 245
Rated primary voltage kV 110 110/220
Other complementary characteristics are specified in Chapter 9 - Protection under §9.1.7.
4.5.2 Spare parts
Spare voltage transformers shall be foreseen as follows:
• Kigoma: 0
• Gisagara: 1 220-110 kV
• Ngozi: 1 220-110 kV
• Gitega: 1 110 kV

Lot 2 - Substations
4.6 Surge Arrestors
4.6.1 General conditions
Surge arrestors shall be installed in the following areas:
• on the high voltage side of the transformer to protect the primary windings,
• on the neutral winding of the power transformer for the neutral isolated network,
• on the line bays of the transmission lines to protect the instrument transformers and circuit break-
ers when open after fault clearing for the very high keraunic level zones.
The security margin recommended by the standard is 1,4 for the rated voltage between 52 to 245 kV.
The standard to be considered for metal oxide surge arrestors are IEC 60099-4 and IEC 60099-5.
4.6.2 Surge arrestors characteristics
Specification for 110 and 220 kV are given in the technical data sheets.

DESCRIPTION UNITS
(110 kV) (220 kV)
Type ZnO ZnO
Highest voltage of the system kVeff 145 245
Discharge class 4 4
Nominal discharge current kA 10 10
Discharge counters shall be provided for each SA to indicate the number of operations for each surge
diverter.
4.6.3 Spare parts
One additional 220 kV spare arrestors shall be delivered in Gisagara and one in Ngozi as well.
One additional 110 kV arrestor shall be delivered in each substation (Kigoma, Gisagara, Ngozi and
Gitega).
4.7 220 kV Bus bar
4.7.1 General
Busbars shall be installed in the new substations (Gisagara and Ngozi) as well as in Gitega, where a
complete busbar shall be created, while in Kigoma, no extension of the existing busbar is required.

Lot 2 - Substations
These busbars shall be made of conductor cables and shall withstand any mechanical and thermal
stress caused by the short circuit, wind....
4.7.2 Disposition
Principle arrangement (not to scale)
The incomer or outgoing bay is connected in the middle of the bus gantry and then connected to the
bus bar disconnector.
As mentioned, only one bas bar will be installed within this project but the space for accommodation of
the second busbar will be reserved from the very beginning.
4.7.3 Conductors
The conductor to be used in the substation may be identical to the one used for 220 kV transmission
lines in order to keep the same standard.
For information, the characteristics of the overhead line conductors are:

Lot 2 - Substations
ACSR 240/40 Conductor Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS UNITS VALUE

Total cross-section mm² 282,5
Aluminium cross-section mm² 243,05/39,49
Conductor diameter mm 21,8
Conductor design: number of strands x diameter - 26x3,45/7x2,68
Conductor weight daN/m 0,985
final elasticity Module daN/mm² 7550
-6
Linear dilatation Coefficient 10 /°C 19,2
Theoretical breaking force daN 8646
DC ohmic resistance at 20°C Ω/km 0,1188
The Contractor may also choose a different conductor, using preferably one type for all connexions
(e.g. twin for main connections and or single conductor for secondary ones).
In any case, the Contractor shall perform its own calculation of the conductors and submit the calcula-
tion to the Consultant for approval.
The calculation of the thermal and mechanical behaviour of the conductors shall be performed accord-
ing to DIN/VDE standards and shall consider especially:
• Thermal capacity under normal conditions (conductor temperature 80°C)

• Thermal capacity after short-circuit (conductor temperature 160°C)
• Mechanical strength under normal loadings and short-circuit loadings.
In the case where the conductor would be eventually different to the overhead line one, the Contractor
shall deliver at least 200 m additional conductor on a drum as spare parts.
4.7.4 Ground wire

2
The ground wire will also be the same as on the overhead transmission line, i.e. ACS 93 mm comply-
ing with ASTM B-416.
2
Characteristics of ACS 93 mm ground wire.
CHARACTERISTICS UNITS VALUE

Total cross-section mm² 93.1
Effective section mm² 93.09
External diameter mm 12.34
Conductor design: number of strands x diameter - 7x4.115
Conductor weight daN/m 0.6195
final elasticity Module daN/mm² 16520
-6
Linear dilatation Coefficient 10 /°C 12.96
Theoretical breaking load daN 10141
DC ohmic resistance at 20°C Ω/km 0.9197

Lot 2 - Substations
4.7.5 Insulator strings
4.7.5.1 Insulator specifications
The insulators used in the 220kV substation are the same as the one used in the line for harmoniza-
tion purpose with following characteristics:
Description
Type of insulator Standard insulator
Class U160BS
Nominal diameter mm 280
Nominal spacing mm 146
Metal fitting size mm 20
Total creepage distance mm 380
Approximate weight kg 6
Withstand voltage 50 Hz in dry conditions kV 75
Withstand voltage 50 Hz in the rain kV 45
Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 ìs, in dry kV 110
conditions
Puncture voltage 50 Hz in oil kV 130
Minimum ultimate electromechanical load kN 160
The strings shall be composed of 2 x 19 U160BS insulators with horns, according to Annex 11.
The 110 kV strings shall be composed of 2x11 U160BS insulators with horns.
4.7.5.2 Accessories for insulator strings and ground wire
The ground wire and insulator string accessories shall comply with the following mechanical condi-
tions.
All elements used in the chain of insulators shall belong to the same assembling standards.
All accessories on which the tension loadings are applied shall have the same minimum nominal
breaking load as the insulators.
The security margin to be considered shall be:
• 3,3 for steel

• 4,0 for malleable cast molten steel
• 5,0 for melted alloy
• 3,3 wrought alloy
The accessories to be used for cable suspension shall withstand the maximum loadings with a safety
coefficient of 2.5.

Lot 2 - Substations
The accessories to be used for cable tension shall have withstand the maximum loadings applied with
a safety coefficient of 2.5 or 85% of the conductor breaking load.
The accessories designed for current conduction shall not be hotter under the permanent rated current
than the conductors themselves shall.
All insulator string components shall withstand the expected short circuit current.
All accessories of the chain of insulator shall be made such as the measured radio-electrical interfer-
ences of a complete string comply with the modality mentioned in IEC 437 and not exceed 200µV at
the frequency of 1 MHz with the test voltage of 155kV. They shall be in particular free of asperities.
The tension clamps shall be compression type.
Tension fittings shall be of hinge type and the use U-bolts is not permitted.

Lot 2 - Substations
5. Power Transformers
5.1 Transformer operating voltage
Ngozi transformer as well as Gisagara transformer will be operated in the immediate future at 110 kV,
but ultimately at the 220 kV. Therefore they must be designed and manufactured as polytransformers
with two primary voltages (110 kV and 220 kV).
5.2 Specific characteristics
Gisagara and Ngozi transformers will be delivered with 220 kV insulation. They will however be oper-
ated at 110 kV in the first months. Therefore, it must be possible to switch during the future to the 220
kV system.
Transformers will be delivered with an on-load tap changer (OLTC) to change the transformation ratio
in a setting of ±10% or 8 x 1.25% under 220 kV. This tap changer will be installed preferably on the HV
winding.
Cooling type should be ONAN and the transformer will be of outdoor type and oil insulated. The 220kV
bushings shall of outdoor type enclosed in a non-uniform insulation with a porcelain outfit.
The characteristics of transformers are summarized in the following table:
Transformer three-phase 220-110/30 kV, 20 MVA
DESIGNATION UNITS VALUE

Type Three-phase
Nominal conversion ratio kV 220-110/30
Rated power MVA 20
Coupling Gisagara: YNd11
Ngozi: YNd11
Short circuit voltage at 220 kV % 10
Bushings porcelain
Location outdoor
Supported domain/levels to primary changer % ± 8 x 1.25
Isolation level (Um / SI / LI / LIC / AC)
primary 220 kV kV 245/850/1050/1155/460
primary 110 kV kV 145/540/650/715/275
secondary 30 kV kV 36/ - /170/187/70
Neutral terminal isolation level (Um / LIN / AC) kV 145/650/275
Bushing rated current
220/110/N A 200
30 A 400
OLTC rated current A 200
Installation altitude m ≤2000

Lot 2 - Substations
where, acc. to IEC 60076-3, Ed. 3.0 2013-07:
• Um: highest r.m.s phase -to-phase voltage

• SI: Switching impulse
• LI: Lightning impulse 1,2/50 s
• LIN: Lightning impulse 1,2/50 s for the neutral terminal
• LIC: Chopped wave lighting impulse
• AC: Voltage test at industrial frequency (50 Hz), 1 min.
5.3 Voltage Change (110 to 220 kV)
Due to the transformer technology, some characteristics may vary while changing the voltage. Howev-
er, as the final voltage of 220 kV shall prevail, the specified values shall apply for this level. The bid-
ders are therefore requested to indicate the consequences on characteristics values such as:
• Losses
• Impedance voltage
• OLTC ranges...
A consequence of the operation under 110 kV of an OLTC sized for 220 kV is that the range of the
voltage adjustment would be doubled, i.e. ±20%. As this range is too wide for the network and for the
transformer itself, it shall be limited by the automatic voltage regulation to the standard value (±10%).
On another hand, the Bidders shall provide detailed description of proposed methodology for this
change.
Any solution supposing an opening of the tank will be rejected.
5.4 General characteristics
The equipment must meet the most recent recommendations of the IEC. The main recommendations
of the CIS taken into account are:
• IEC 60060 high-voltage test Techniques,

• IEC 60071 insulation co-ordination,
• IEC 60076 power transformers,
• IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for Alternating Voltages Above 1000 V
• IEC 60214 Tap changers
• IEC 60296 Specification for Unused Mineral Insulating Oils for Transformers and Switchgear
• IEC 60076 Power transformers
• IEC 60214 application Guide for on-load tap-changers,
• IEC 60567 Guide for the sampling of gases and oil from oil filled electrical equipment, and for
the analysis of free and dissolved gases
• IEC 60599 Mineral oil-filled electrical equipment in service – Guidance on the interpretation of
dissolved and free gases analysis

Lot 2 - Substations
Other equivalent or higher standards recognized internationally such as the French standards NF or
German standards DIN/VDE are also accepted.
The mechanical and electrical transformers design will be based on the following requirements and
conditions:
Database design of the works,
• The permissible maximum temperature rise of the transformer oil (top insulating liquid, average
winding and hot spot) shall fulfil the requirements of the IEC 60076-2, assuming the altitude stated
in the chapter "Site conditions".
• The transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at their rated power within the speci-
fied temperature rise limit at 10% over- or under-excited operation (this is applicable for all power
transformers and for all tap changer settings).
• The transformer, completely assembled with bushings, cable boxes and/or flange connections shall
be designed and constructed to withstand without damages the effects of short circuits as per IEC
60076-5 for at least 3 seconds at rated conditions and after all loading conditions as specified in
IEC 60354.
• The transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic voltag-
es, especially the third, the fifth and the seventh, to eliminate wave form distortion and from any
possibility of high frequency disturbances reaching such a magnitude to cause interference with
communication circuits.
• Built-in short circuit limiting reactors, if any, shall not be installed in a separate tank appended to
the main tank.
• The neutral points shall be brought out by suitable means and shall be grounded as per require-
ments of the Substation design.
• The open delta of stabilizing winding, if any, shall be brought out by outdoor bushings and shall be
shortened and earthed by solid copper bars rigidly supported and fastened.
5.4.1 Windings
All of transformer windings, isolated for a voltage of 450 kVpeak impulse test and power frequency with-
stand voltage of 185 kVr.m.s. and less, will have a uniform insulation.
Transformer windings, isolated for a 650 kVpeak impulse test voltage and and power frequency with-
stand voltage of 275 kVr.m.s. and more, will have a gradual insulation.
The technical data sheets of the transformers provide details on the required insulation levels.
High conductivity electrolytic copper (class A according to IEC standards) shall be used.
The insulation of windings and connections material will be of first quality and should not disintegrate,
char or become brittle under the action of hot oil and load variations.
The windings will be designed and built in order to withstand shock waves as well as the electrody-
namics efforts caused by short circuit currents as part of a protection with circuit breakers and surge
arresters. Appropriate fasteners must be provided between the windings and the core as well as be-
tween the primary and secondary windings. For the same reasons, the connections to the terminals
will be perfectly set.

Lot 2 - Substations
To increase the resistance to dynamic forces due to short circuits, modern technology will be applied
in the design and construction (e.g. low current density, pre-drying and prepress of the windings be-
fore mounting on the circuit, etc.).
5.4.2 Magnetic circuit
The magnetic core and the magnetic return paths shall be made of laminations of non-ageing, cold-
rolled, grain-oriented, silicon steel of high permeability (Hi-B-type; W17/50: max. 1.12 W/kg) without
burrs. Each lamination shall be insulated with high quality insulation coating. The joints of limbs and
yokes shall be designed and constructed to keep the losses as low as possible.
The core and its clamping plates shall form a rigid unit structure which shall maintain its form and posi-
tion under the severe stresses encountered during shipment, installation and short circuits. Care shall
be taken to secure uniformly distributed mechanical pressure over all the laminations to prevent set-
ting of the core and to limit noise and vibrations to a minimum under service conditions.
Unless specified otherwise in the Technical Data Sheets the maximum magnetic flux density in the
legs and yokes of the core shall not exceed 1.70 Tesla at rated voltage and frequency.
In order to prevent closed magnetic circuit via the tank, the top main core clamping structure shall not
be connected to the tank cover.
The magnetic core shall be earthed to the tank cover at one point only through removable terminal
placed in an accessible position on the tank cover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insula-
tion between the core and transformer tank. In this way it will be possible to subsequently disconnect
this link and isolate the magnetic circuit of the transformer tank to check the quality of the insulation
during the operation.
Magnetic circuits with an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a separate link for
each individual section.
Main internal earthing connections shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 80 mm² but con-
nections inserted between laminations may have cross-sectional areas reduced to 20 mm² when in
close thermal contact with the core.
5.4.3 Transformer tank
Transformer tank shall be rectangular in shape and type with bolted cover. The tank will have to with-
stand, without permanent deformation, the vacuum, it will be built in steel and will be sufficiently rigid
to withstand transportation and mounting without any deformation.
All cords and gaskets, other that are provisional, will need to be welded with X-Groove to ensure du-
rable and leak-proof connections.
The lower part of the tank will be rigid structure..
Fully mounted transformer gas and oil-tight and must resist the forces due to pressures in excess of
25% the normal operating pressure without damage.

Lot 2 - Substations
The tank and accessories shall be designed to avoid the formation of gas pockets. If pockets cannot
be avoided, it will be expected purge pipe to vent the gas in the main drain hose. The hoses should
have a minimum inside diameter of 25 mm.
All elements connected to the tank will be equipped with gas and oil resistant gaskets. All the seals will
be placed in housing grooves. The seal shall be kept in time (Torque limiter, quality of seal); impreg-
nated Cork is not accepted.
The tanks will be equipped with manholes and access openings with dimensions appropriate to facili-
tate the installation and maintenance (e.g.: for OLTC, current transformers). All openings, including
bushings, will be equipped with appropriate clamps for fixing. It shall be possible to disassemble every
bushing without removing the cover of the tank.
To prevent deformation of the tank during operation, a safety valve (pressure relief valve) will be
mounted directly on the tank cover to limit the pressure. This pressure relief valve must operate at a
static pressure which will be lower than the pressure of hydraulic test.
The cover must be fitted with several buckets with cover plate for the measurement of the temperature
of the oil. All protection, measurement and surveillance equipment mounted on the cover will be spe-
cially protected against rain and dust. The construction of the cover will be made in such a way that no
thermally blind region could appear.
Each transformer will be provided with the following facilities:
• 4 plates reinforced to allow the uprising using jacks,

• 4 hydraulic jacks,
• 4 lifting eyes for the lifting of the whole transformer,
• Lifting eyes for the lifting of the core, coils, the tank and/or cover,
• Towing rings of for horizontal displacements,
• Rolls with flange (according to DIN 42561), adjustable in two perpendicular directions with locking
device. The distance of rollers will be 1435 mm or a multiple of this value. The isolation of the tank
from the earth will be done by inserting insulation between the rolls and the tank,
• Taps purging and sampling of oil with appropriate adapters will be provided at convenient height
from the ground,
• Fittings for connection of processing equipment oil with bleed valves and pipes will be provided in
sufficient numbers,
• 2 terminals Terminal grounding of appropriate size, able to withstand for 5 seconds maximum
short-circuit current (on the side of low voltage of the transformer), will be provided diagonally at
the bottom of the transformer tank.
5.4.4 Terminal
All bushings will be at least isolated to the same level as those of the respective windings or neutral.

Lot 2 - Substations
5.4.4.1 Bushings
Bushings shall be of the outdoor type designed for areas with a heavily polluted atmosphere. They
shall correspond to IEC 60137, shall be free from defects and shall be thoroughly vitrified.
Insulators are brown and first quality, homogenous and non-porous, and shall be in one piece. If insu-
lators are composed of several parts jointed together by synthetic resin, this shall be brought to the at-
tention of the Employer who will have to give his approval.
Bushings must be installed on the cover of the tank so that their removal is possible without lowering
the oil at a level where the windings are exposed to the atmosphere. Disassembly and Assembly will
be possible without removing the cover.
Current transformers (if any) can be fitted around the lower part of the body of the bushing; their re-
placement must be done by simple removal of the bushing.
Bushings for rated voltages 72,5 kV or greater will be the capacitor with internal insulation by paper
impregnated with resin synthetic and equipped with capacitive test plugs for the measurement of the
dielectric properties, related to the mass in normal service.
Bushings for nominal voltages of 52 kV or lower may be of the type with oil according to the DIN
standard or equivalent (to be submitted for approval). The bushings other than those of the open Delta
winding will be equipped with adjustable protection horns.
The neutral bushing terminals will be dimensioned for high overcurrent that can cross the windings.
Bushings for less than 52 kV nominal voltages will be installed vertically.
A diagram of the bushings indicating the essential dimensions and cuts will be submitted to the super-
visor for approval.
5.4.5 Instrument transformers
The measuring transformers meet the recommendations of IEC 60044-2. They will only have the role
of creating the thermal image of the transformers.
The characteristics of current transformers, including the magnetization curves will be submitted for
approval by the supervisor.
Current transformers will be sized for an overload of 110% in order to support the cyclic loads accord-
ing to IEC 60354.
5.4.6 Cooling ONAN
The transformers will have a system of natural cooling by air-oil radiators, demountable and contigu-
ous to the tank.

Lot 2 - Substations
The radiators will be complying with DIN standards or equivalent. The radiators will be connected
through butterfly valves so that each radiator can be disassembled without switching the transformer
out of operation and draining oil from the tank.
If the radiators are connected by a common conduit (general collector) to the tank, this common line
will be connected by valves disc welded directly on the transformer tank. The accumulation of air in
the radiators should be avoided. Radiators with collectors of elbow type will not be accepted. Sets of
radiators mounted on the tank or mounted separately from the transformer are not tolerated. The radi-
ators will be assembled and attached to the tank safely and in order to avoid vibrations.
The elements of radiators will be strengthened by welded flanges (horizontally and diagonally) to en-
sure stiffness and prevent vibration during the operation of transformers. The distance between hori-
zontal flanges shall not exceed 100 cm. The radiators will be designed to withstand without permanent
deformation vacuum and overpressure; they will be completely watertight. The radiators will be
equipped with devices purge for the complete filling and drainage. All equipment must be readily ac-
cessible for inspection and maintenance.
The following items shall be provided:
• 1 butterfly valve for the inlet and outlet of each radiator, directly accessible from the ground level
and the tank cover,
• 1 disc for the connection of the possible common conduit (general collector) (if applicable) trans-
former tank, valve
• 1 thermometer pocket screwed and placed on the input and output of the collector general (if appli-
cable),
• 1 drain plug with protection cap screwed to the low point of each general collector (if applicable),
• 1 plug vent with protective cover screwed at the highest point of each general collector (if applica-
ble),
• 1 drainage with protective cover plug screwed out of each radiator that can be used to connect
sensors for measuring temperature during the heat tests,
• 1 drainage with protective cover plug screwed at the entrance of each radiator that can be used to
connect probes for temperature measurement when the temperature-rise tests.
5.4.7 On-Load Tap Changer
The on-load tap changer will be based on the "Dr. Jansen" principle including an on-load selector with
switch coarse tap selector.
The on-load tap changer shall be conform to IEC 60214 and IEC 60542 recommendations. The OLTC
will be mounted in the tank transformer, accessible through manhole and housed in a clean compart-
ment, independent of the transformer oil with an own subsection in the oil conservator. Internal protec-
tion will be achieved by controlling the flow of oil and gas gauge. In addition, an overpressure detect-
ing device with tripping contact will be installed on the tap changer.
The diverter switch compartment will be equipped with a vacuum pipe connected to a valve for sam-
pling. The head of the tap changer will be equipped with a pipe connected to the primary Buchholz re-
lay to avoid pockets of gas below the head of the tap changer outside the diverter switch compart-
ment.
The power supply to the motor will be 110 VDC.

Lot 2 - Substations
The power of the transformer will remain constant at all taps. The on-load tap changer will be sized for
the maximum charging current of the transformer (i.e. all load cases specified in recommendation IEC
60354, up to 180% of the maximum nominal current of plug).
The motor drive and all auxiliary equipment of the tap changer will be incorporated into a weatherproof
aluminum box. All external moving parts of the cabinet will be protected along their entire length.
The motor drive mechanism will be available without disassembly of equipment and auxiliary cables.
The following equipment will be installed in the control cabinet:
• a motor with protective equipment,

• an operation counter,
• 2 push buttons for local control, increase and decrease in the taps with possibility of locking,
• a limit switch,
• Mechanical stops at the limit,
• mechanical position indicator ('1' refers to the position with the maximum voltage) mounted in the
control cubicle and visible, door closed,
• a local/remote switch
• Auxiliary relays,
• Relays for monitoring the voltage to control circuits, - a circuit breaker for each additional supply
circuit
• a hygrostat-controlled heating device
• a device for heating controlled by thermostat,
• a portable lamp with contact (operation with the door opening),
• terminal connections for the connection of cables up to 10 mm². 10% of spare terminals will be pro-
vided for each block of terminals,
• a command by hand by crank
• a tap position indicator disk (potentiometer and contacts),
• additional limit switch contacts,
• a spare socket, low voltage, 10 AAFC socket,
• a plate indicating all control circuits and all connections inside the door,
• padlocks and locks for the front door and push buttons.
A drawing and documentation pocket for will be fixed inside the cabinet door.
The tap-changer control will be possible by:
• hand-operated by detachable crank in the case of one defect in the power system,
• local operation by push button from the local control cabinet
• selector switch local/remote
• local/remote operation by pushbutton from the local control room,
• automatic operation controlled by automatic voltage regulation and control of parallel operation,
• distance, from the national dispatching,
And allow:
• step-to-step operation with automatic shut-off after each step,

• control of automatic passage to central position.

Lot 2 - Substations
The tap changer equipment will be designed and constructed so that tap changer switches require vir-
tually no maintenance, i.e. life of contacts and mechanisms shall withstand 70,000 operations without
maintenance.
Devices and instruments necessary for remote control from the local control room or a distribution cen-
tre including connections and control cables leading from transformers to external and internal circuits
of the substation are included in the scope of delivery and installation and must be coordinated during
the substation design.
5.4.8 Parallel operation and voltage regulation
Each substation power transformers will be able to be run in parallel without restriction.
Inspection and control for paralleling equipment shall be operated from the substation control panel
and the network dispatching.
Equipment necessary for automatic voltage control, such as the automatic voltage regulation, auxiliary
relays, counters, indicators, switches, signal lamps, test terminals and other accessories necessary to
the operation (such as cables of command and signalling between the transformer and the control
building) will be part of the contract.
5.4.9 Auxiliary drive characteristics
The drives will be capable of operating at rated power and in continuous mode with the following ser-
vice:
• The nominal supply voltage variation: ± 10%.

• Nominal frequency: ± 5%.
• Over or under excitation: ± 10%.
The drives will be able to start directly without exceeding the temperature of winding under a voltage
of 85% of the rated supply voltage. The vibration of the drives shall remain within the limits specified in
the applicable standards. The insulation will be tropical and fungicide treated, in an appropriate man-
ner to the hot and humid climate.
5.4.10 Transformer Oil
As far as possible transformers will be provided and transported with the initial oil fill.
In the opposite case transformers will be supplied and transported filled with dry nitrogen. Removed oil
shall be delivered in drums or containers in a sufficient quantity to refill the transformers completely
and to replenish losses during subsequent processing at site.
Insulation oil is pure mineral oil without additives and will be refined with acid, consistent with recom-
mendation IEC 60296 quality, class II. Insulation oil to be used on-site will have the same quality that
is used during factory acceptance tests.

Lot 2 - Substations
Dryness and all other properties of the oil must be assured before use. The dielectric strength of insu-
lation oil will be tested on-site during power-up.
5.4.11 Oil conservator
Conservator vessels will be mounted in a position where they do not interfere with the electrical con-
nections of the transformer. They will have sufficient capacity to allow the expansion of the oil having a
variable temperature of-5 °C to 120 °C.
To avoid inadmissible mechanical stresses between the tap changer compartments and the main tank
of the transformer, all the compartments of the conservator will be designed so that at the same tem-
perature of oil all oil levels are almost equal. Conservator reservoirs will be completely watertight vac-
uum and designed so that they can be completely purged the transformer in operation. Each Conser-
vator tank has a drain valve; a balance between Conservators tap shall be provided at a height of
suitable soil.
Magnetic indicators of the oil level indicating the full range of level will be installed on all oil tanks; the
normal level will be clearly marked.
Each oil tank must be fitted with two orange parallel air filled with silicagel dryers (silicon dioxide, dark
brown when wet) as dryer agent. Parallel dryers will be connected to the pipes leading to the conser-
vator by a three way valves allowing only a single dryer service.
Following excessive moisture, air dryers will be oversized and will be provided with oil separator. The
volume of silica gel will be determined by the power of the transformer with the following minimum vol-
umes per dryer:
• 2.5 kg for the conservator of the tap-changer

• 4.0 kg for the main Conservator and rated power of equal to or less than 20 MVA transformer
• 5.5 kg for the main conservator and rated power of the transformer up to 20 MVA
5.4.12 Piping and valves
Valves shall be provided at the conservators to cut off the supply and to drain the conservator.
All piping required for the connection/filling of the various parts of the transformers as well as the
valves required for oil sampling, draining, filtering, connection of the radiators, vent plugs, etc. are to
be included. The inner diameter of vacuum application pipes shall be at least 25 mm.
All valves and faucets will be mounted at height of man and are lockable by padlock. Fittings suitable
for pipes and conduits for all valves in oil sample will be included in the supplies. An engraved plaque
will show the tag the valve.
5.4.13 Measurement and protection equipment
The equipment of this item shall be wired up to terminal blocks inside control cubicle. The complete
wiring will be done in isolated copper conductors protected at the ends.

Lot 2 - Substations
Thermometers and thermostats will have contacts of spring type for at least 2 Acc. The contacts will
be adjustable on the dial and easily accessible.
Thermometers will be mounted on a suitable non-corrosive material fixation device. Capillary tubes will
be protected along the entire length. To avoid damage at the points of connecting capillary tubes, and
temperature sensors, all ends will be completely covered by protective sheaths.
The following standard accessories will be required for each power transformer:
• 1 Buchholz relay to two floats (one for accumulation of gas, the second for the movement of oil) to
the transformer tank with device for sampling of gas and test at height of man, with glass windows,
electrical connection box. The pipes connecting the Buchholz relay have valves with disc on the
side of the (easily accessible from the tank cover) conservator to allow the disassembly of the relay
without loss of oil. The small hoses coming out of the Buchholz relay will be protected by armored
sheaths,
• 1 protection relay 'flow of oil' with a trip contact for the OLTC switch of the on-load tap changer. The
pipes connecting the relay have valves disc on the side of the (easily accessible from the tank cov-
er) conservator,
• 1 discharge valve of the spring type with a trip contact for the OLTC switch of the on-load tap
changer (safety valve),
• 1 pressure relief device with trip contact for the on-load tap changer diverter switch,
• 1 pressure relief device of the type spring contact of trigger for the main tank of the transformer
(safety valve),
• 1 thermometer dial and display of the maximum, indication of the temperature of the layer of oil,
mounted at man's height, equipped with 4 adjustable contacts for alarm and triggering (at 95°C and
105° C, oil temperature) and control of cooling units. The temperature range is from 0°C to 140°C,
• 1 thermometer with adjustable contacts for triggering on oil (to 105°C) temperature,
• 1 relay thermal image to be connected to each coil (with the exception of compensation windings)
via current transformers. Current transformer associated (ext. 110%) must not be of the class P.
• 1 dial thermometer with indicator of maximum (resistance type) for each imaging thermal relay with
indication of distance and four adjustable contacts for alarm and triggering the temperature of hot
point of the winding (115°C and 125°C). The temperature range is 0°C to 160°C,
• 1 indicator oil level magnetic with contact trigger (minimum and maximum oil level) for each tank of
the conservator,
• 1 indicator oil level magnetic with contact trigger (minimum and maximum oil level) for the reser-
voir, the conservator of the tap-changer diverter switch,
• 1 ammeter connected to the current transformer of the thermal image; after disconnection of the
secondary circuit the instrument may be used for the measurement of oil temperature;
• 1 bucket of spare thermometer into the cover of the tank for the connection of PT100 for the deter-
mination of the exact oil temperature during temperature rise test.
5.4.14 Control panels
Control panels and cabinets will be waterproof sealed (IP55 protection).
Individual control units will be provided for each transformer. Control circuits will be protected by minia-
ture circuit breakers with alarm contacts properly wired and integrated in the substation alarm system.
Fuses will not be accepted. All circuit breakers and switches to break load will be mounted in an easily
accessible position. No electrical equipment will be installed on the front door of the control cabinet.

Lot 2 - Substations
The multicore cables used will be armoured type, PRC isolated, with exterior polyvinyl coating, mini-
mum cross section of 2.5 mm², cable protection conduits at the ends.
Identification tags will be provided for all instruments, relays, control switches, pushbuttons, lamps
nameplates, circuit breakers, etc.
The relay will be clearly marked according to their function in circuits. Indications will be identical to the
designations employed in handbooks.
Plates of instruction in English language of the single line diagrams and instructions for maintenance
will be mounted inside the front of the cabinet door.
All wiring connecting the motors and alarm and triggering devices will include an insulated (in color
green/yellow") protection conductor of the same section.
Appropriate Earth conductors shall be provided for all ground connections of the control units with the
transformer tank as well as for the connection of protective earth between cabinets of control and
2
doors or covers of the terminal boxes. The minimum section will be 16 mm . The insulated
groundwires shall be green/yellow coloured.
At the bottom of the cabinets glands shall be used for the connection of the cables to the accessories
placed on the transformer. A removable plate for mounting of the cable glands of the external circuits’
connection cables shall be foreseen as well.
Cables connecting accessories to the cabinets will be protected along the entire length by spiral
guards’ stainless metal. The use of shielded cables is not considered to be sufficient protection. All
wiring to ventilation fans, measurement and control devices etc. will be designed for a minimum con-
ductor temperature of 110°C.
Heating resistors set by thermostat and hygrostat to prevent condensation and moisture must be in-
stalled in cabinets. The elements will not be mounted on the front door.
Degreasing, surface preparation and painting shall conform to the specifications.
Control panels will be lit by lights switched on by door contact. Folding doors are equipped with clo-
sures with one lever (with two latches on the back side of the front door). A metal pocket to shelter
single line diagrams, documentation… will be fixed inside the door; a metal plate indicating all circuits
and all terminal blocks as well. A low voltage 230 V, 10 Aca socket for local use will also be installed.
Standard terminals shall be designed for cables up to 10 mm² and the terminals for the connection of
the power cables and current transformers for cables up to 35 mm². Each terminal block will be
equipped with at least 10% spare terminals.
5.4.15 Name plate
External plates will be polished, high quality stainless steel. The Interior plates for control and com-
mand cabinets will be made of material as per manufacturers’ standard (to be submitted for approval).

Lot 2 - Substations
The following plates will be foreseen:
• a name plate in accordance with IEC 60076,

• a plate showing the connections and vector group of windings and, in addition, a drawing of the
transformer showing the correct physical position of the terminals,
• a plate showing the exact position and the function of all valves, blind flanges and plugs,
• a plate showing the transport dimensions,
• Identification plates for fans, valves, plugs, control panels and accessories (minimum size: 100 mm
x 50 mm), fixed with rivets on non-corrosive base plates. The description of the device will be clear-
ly shown on these plates. The size of the characters on identification plates shall be clearly legible
from the ground,
• Plates showing all circuits, oil, measuring and control monitoring and terminal blocks. These plates
will be installed on the inside of the door of the respective cabinet
• Plates showing the complete on-load tap changer control circuit. These plates will be installed in
the tap-changer cabinet.
5.4.16 Painting and corrosion protection
All surfaces shall be well cleaned, free from rust, dirt and grease and all imperfections will be removed
by approved methods.
The following treatments will be applied:
5.4.16.1 External surfaces
All steel surfaces are sand-blasted according to DIN 55928-4 (equivalent to SIS 055900) and will have
the following painting:
Vessels, conservator, cable box, etc.:
1 coat of primer 80 μm
zinc phosphate based 2-component epoxy resin or
of zinc powder based 2-component epoxy resin
1 intermediate layer 100 μm
d 2-component epoxy resin based micaceous iron oxide
1 layer of coverage 40 μm
2-component polyurethane
Thickness of layers Total 220 μm

Lot 2 - Substations
Corrugated surface tank, radiators:
1 coat of primer 80 μm
zinc phosphate to d 2-component epoxy resin base or
lamellar zinc on d 2-component epoxy resin
1 intermediate layer 100 μm
d 2-component epoxy resin based micaceous iron oxide
1 layer of coverage 40 μm
2-component polyurethane
Thickness of layers Total 220 μm
The final layer of paint will be without porosity and uniform quality and will have uniform colour of the
RAL 7032 (Flint grey) code.
For parts made of hot galvanized steel, the same painting method will be applied, but instead of the
primary layer, adhesive layer of base will be applied. In this case the overall thickness will be 55 μm.
5.4.16.2 Interior surfaces
The sandblast will be carried out according to DIN 55928-4 (equivalent to SIS 055900). After that, free
from solvents and waterproof oil layers will be applied.
The minimum thickness will be at least 35 μm.
5.4.17 Testing
Acceptance tests will be performed on all transformers to verify the conformity to the guaranteed val-
ues and values of other design data.
Transformers should be completely assembled including the original bushings. However, the radiators
can be fitted only to the transformer intended for temperature-rise tests. Other heaters must be availa-
ble for visual inspection.
The tests will be carried out according to the requirements of IEC 60076 and IEC 60060.
Following type, routine and special tests shall be performed as acceptance tests on each transformer
in each configuration, when applicable:
• Measurement of winding resistance

• Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement
• Measurement of DC insulation resistance between each winding to earth and between windings.
• Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss
• Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90 %, 100% and 110 % of rated voltage
• Dielectric tests
• Determination of capacitances windings-to-earth and between windings.
• Measurement of dissipation factor (tan δ) of the insulation system capacitances.
• Determination of transient voltage transfer characteristics

Lot 2 - Substations
• Measurement of zero-sequence impedance(s)

• Measurement of frequency response (Frequency Response Analysis)
• Tests on on-load tap-changers
• Leak testing with pressure
• Vacuum deflection test
• Check of the ratio and polarity of built-in current transformers.
• Check of core and frame insulation
• Temperature-rise type test
• Determination of sound level.
Following routine and special dielectric tests shall be performed as acceptance tests in each configu-
ration
• Full wave lightning impulse test for the line terminals (LI)
• Chopped wave lightning impulse test for the line terminals (LIC)
• Lightning impulse test for the neutral terminals (LIN)
• Switching impulse test for the line terminal (SI)
• Applied voltage test (AV)
• Induced voltage withstand test (IVW)
•
3
Induced voltage test with PD measurement (IVPD)
• Line terminal AC withstand voltage test (LTAC)
• Auxiliary wiring insulation test (AuxW).
• Frequency response analysis: in factory and before commissioning, according to IEC 60076-18
Power transformers - Part 18: Measurement of frequency response
• Dielectric response analysis: in factory and at the end of the guarantee period. The method shall be
stated by the Bidders (e.g. PDC/FDS method or equivalent)
• Desolved gas analysis: in factory and at the end of the guarantee period (in laboratory)
5.4.18 Losses capitalization
In case that the losses of the supplied transformers are higher than the values as indicated in the data
sheets, the transformer will be penalized by the following rates :
• No-load losses: 5500 EUR/ kW

• Load losses: 2400 EUR / kW
Determination of losses shall be in accordance with IEC 60076.
Any losses surpassing the guaranteed values shall be calculated as above and deducted from the
contract amount.
5.4.19 Rejection of Transformers
The Employer has the right to reject any transformer if the actual values are in excess of the guar-
anteed values by more than the margins (including the tolerances) as specified in standard IEC
60076-1 (chapter 10 Tolerances) as well as:
3
The requirements of the IVW test can be incorporated in the IVPD test so that only one test is required, if applicable

Lot 2 - Substations
• Temperature rise limit + 2%

• Noise level + 3 dB(A)
5.5 Spare parts
The power transformers will be delivered with the following spare parts (each):
• 1 x 220 kV bushing
• 1 x 30 kV bushing
• 1 valve of each type
• 1 complete radiator with isolation valve
• 20 kg Silicagel (non-toxic)
• 1 oil test unit
• 1 oil thermometer
• 2 Buchholz relays

Lot 2 - Substations
6. 30 kV Switchgear
The 30 kV of Gisagara and Ngozi substations shall be delivered according to IEC 62271-200 stand-
ard. The design shall be fully type tested, and the switchgears shall be subject to the routine test re-
quirements as specified.
Main characteristics according to IEC 62271-200:
• Service continuity of the switchgear: LSC 2

• Internal arc classification: A FLR 25 kA, 3 s
• Partition class: PM
• Maximum gas leakage: 0,1% per year
6.1 Construction characteristics
The switchgears will be gas insulated (GIS), fully prefabricated at the factory, closed, metal-enclosed,
isolated busbar in the SF6, equipped with fixed circuit breakers. They will be expandable on both sides
and each compartment of each bay shall be an independent gas zone to enable easy replacement of
an entire bay. Having an entire busbar as a single gas zone shall not be allowed.
Each bay shall consist of:
• Multifunctional bay control and protection unit

• Capacitive voltage indicator system
• Cable plug
• Current transformer as required by the protection schemes
• Voltage transformer, if required
• Three-position disconnector/earthing switch
• Circuit-breaker
• Busbars
• According walls, shutters and internal connections.
6.1.1 Construction details
The walls of the cells will be made of 2 mm sheets segregating cubicles from each other and the vari-
ous compartments inside each cubicle. Front door, dustproof and independent from the withdrawable
rack closes each cell. A bare copper ground bar shall be provided on the entire length of the switch-
gear and each bay shall be connected to the earth bar. Provision shall be made for the connection of
the ground bar to the general earthing grid of the substation.
Cells must allow the easy implementation of cables and their ends. Their degree of protection is IP 3 X
according to IEC 60529.
Busbars will be unreachable under normal operation; they will be SF6 isolated and mechanically pro-
tected by a sheath of synthetic material.

Lot 2 - Substations
LV wiring will be separated from the HV part by grounded metal shields. Access to the LV hardware
shall be possible the cell being in service.
Heating resistors, current AC single phase, will be planned in each of the compartments in order to
prevent condensation.
For reasons of uniformity (reductions of types of spare parts, flexibility of operation), the devices will be
standardized on the basis of:
• Equal nominal currents

• Short-circuit characteristics
• Dimensions of identical switchgears
6.1.2 Locking
The equipment will be designed and built taking into account the staff safety and will be equipped with
adequate mechanical locks.
The operation of an isolator will be possible only when:
• Doors or covers of the cell to which it belongs are closed

• The associated breaking (breaker or disconnector) unit is open
The control will be mechanical, local, unique and can be padlocked in both open and closed positions.
6.1.3 Relay, instruments and wiring
These devices will be mounted in the LV compartment. Measuring devices will be mounted on the
front door. The protection relays will be mounted inside the door; the door being cut to the dimensions
of the relay in order to allow the front to be fully visible. All LV circuits shall be connected to terminals.
6.1.4 Tagging
Each item of equipment will be identified by a nameplate in a unambiguous way. Each switchgear will
be clearly identified by a plate indicating the name of the outgoing and its number. Danger signs shall
be placed where necessary.
6.2 Characteristics of the equipment
6.2.1 Disconnectors and earthing switches
The disconnectors and earthing switches shall meet the requirements of IEC 62271-102.
Busbar switches are manually operated by lever and locking handle. Busbar earthswitches shall be
hardwire-interlocked with incoming transformer circuit breaker to prevent earthing of a live busbar.

Lot 2 - Substations
Earthing switches will be the sudden snap. The closure of an earth disconnector is possible only when
the circuit breaker to which it belongs is open. The control will be mechanical, local, from only one
place from the front and can be padlocked in both open and closed positions.
6.2.2 Circuit breakers
Circuit breakers will be three-pole, fixed, in vacuum. They shall have spring energy accumulation
drive, spanned manually and by an electric motor. Circuit breakers shall allow a local tripping by the
mean of a "turn-push" switch with light.
Auxiliary contacts will be provided to ensure the interlocks and signalling. At least 4 spare contacts
shall be provided.
The nominal sequence of operation shall be:
• For circuit breakers connected to isolated cables: O - 3 min. - CO - 3 min. - CO

• For circuit breakers connected to overhead lines: O - 0.3 sec. -CO - 3 min. - CO
6.2.3 Instrument transformers
The measuring transformers shall meet the requirements of IEC 60044.
6.2.3.1 Current transformers
The Contractor will be responsible for the selection of the characteristics of transformers, their rated
current and power, in particular, which will be coordinated with the characteristics of the connected
equipment. The values shown on the diagrams are given for information only.
Characteristics to be met are as follows:
• Single-phase synthetic resin moulded type

• Rated primary current transformer bay: 500 A
• Rated primary current line bay: 150-300 A (secondary reconnected)
• Rated secondary current of 1A
The burdens will be determined by the Contractor, but will be at least 5 VA and 120% of the calculated
load.
6.2.3.2 Voltage transformers
The Contractor will be responsible for the selection of the characteristics of the transformers voltage
and in particular for the coordination of their power with the characteristics of the connected equip-
ment. The values given in the diagrams are given for information only.

Lot 2 - Substations
Characteristics are as follows:
• Single-phase synthetic resin moulded type

• Primary voltage: 30 kV
• Connection phase-ground
• Secondary voltage: 100 V
The precision factor will be determined by the Contractor but will not be less than 20.
These transformers will be fitted with protection fuses.
6.2.4 Protection
The 30 kV protection scheme shall be installed according to the specifications under Chapter 9, §9.7.
6.3 Electrical characteristics
The general characteristics of the 30 kV systems are summarized below:
Features Units 30 kV
Rated voltage kV 36
Frequency Hz 50
Dielectric strength:
• 50 Hz kV 70
• shock waves (1.2/50 µs) kVpeak 170
Rated busbars current A 1250
Rated current of the circuit breakers A 1.250 for all
Short-circuit 3 sec kA 25
Short-circuit dynamic (peak value) kA 63
breaking capacity of circuit breakers kA 25
Index of protection - > IP 3 X
General characteristics of 30kV systems
6.4 Equipment of MV switchgears
6.4.1 30 kV power transformer incoming
The 30 kV power transformer incoming cubicle will be equipped with the devices specified in the fol-
lowing table:
Devices Quantity
Three positions disconnector 1
Three-pole circuit breaker 1
Voltage presence indication 1

Lot 2 - Substations
Devices Quantity
Bay Control and Protection Unit 1
Current transformer 3
Voltage transformer 3
Ammeter 3 (1 per phase)
Power meter 1
Switchable voltmeter on the 3 phases 1
MV (30 kV) switchgears equipment: 220/110/30 kV transformer incoming
The minimum technical characteristics of the circuit breakers, current and voltage transformers are de-
tailed in the data sheets.
6.4.2 Line feeder
30 kV line switchgear (cable or overhead) will be equipped as per following table.
Devices Quantity
Bay Control and Protection Unit 1
Voltage transformer 3
Power meter 1
Equipment of the MV (30 kV): line incoming
The minimum technical characteristics of the circuit breakers, transformers of current and potential are
detailed in the data sheets.
6.4.3 Auxiliary transformer Switchgear (Burundi)
30 kV auxiliary transformer incoming cells will be equipped as per following table:
Devices Quantity
Bay Control and Protection Unit including the DGPT2
1
function
MV (30 kV) switchgear: auxiliary transformer incoming

Lot 2 - Substations
Minimum technical characteristics of switches and current transformers are detailed in the technical
data sheets.
6.4.4 Spare parts
The Bidder shall provide one set of recommended spare parts and tools in Gisagara and one in Ngozi
for a normal maintenance over 5 years, comprising but not limited to:
• 1 voltage presence indicator

• 1 measurement transformer of each type
• 5 Lamps, fuses, MCB of each type
• 1 circuit breaker maintenance set
• 1 SF6 gas-handling device.
The safety equipment is indicated in the building equipment and furniture.

Lot 2 - Substations
7. Auxiliary Services
7.1 Auxiliary service supply
The substations auxiliary services supply will be energized by different form of energy to satisfy the
operation of high, medium and low voltage equipment of the substation.
These are:
• Alternative current (AC)

• Direct current (DC)
The power supply for the auxiliary services will provided by:
• Substation service transformer 30/0.4 kV.

• Substation standby generator of 63 kVA.
7.2 Auxiliary Transformer
7.2.1 Technical specification
MV/LV transformers in this project will be Substation service transformers as follows:
7.2.1.1 Gisagara:
The main characteristics of the substation transformers are the following:
• Rated Power: 315 kVA

• Nominal voltage: 30/0,4 kV
• Vector group: ZNyn11
• Ucc%: 4%
• Voltage regulation: off load ±2 x 2,5 %
• Cooling system: ONAN, hermetic oil
• Protection: Circuit breaker on LV side, DGPT2 or equivalent.
• MV Connection: insulated cables.
• LV Connection: in a cable box to prevent any contact to the live parts.
7.2.1.2 Ngozi:
The main characteristics of the substation transformers are the following:
• Rated Power: 250 kVA

• Nominal voltage: 30/0,4 kV
• Vector group: Dyn11
• Ucc%: 4%

Lot 2 - Substations
• Voltage regulation: off load ±2 x 2,5 %

• Cooling system: ONAN, hermetic oil
• Protection: Circuit breaker on MV and LV side, DGPT2 or equivalent.
• MV Connection: insulated cables.
• LV Connection: in a cable box to prevent any contact to the live parts.
7.2.2 General specification
Substation transformer shall be hermetically sealed and comply with IEC 60076.
All synthetic insulator containing polychlorobiphenyls especially Askarel are prohibited.
They are hermetically sealed and have a tank with varying volume to contain the oil depending on the
variation of the temperature.
The medium voltage side will be equipped with an off load tap-changer with 5 taps, with variation ±
2.5% per position.
The transformer will be equipped with 4 wheels installed on two axis to facilitate the movement; the
main tank will be equipped with two lifting eyes and nameplate.
Each transformer shall have a nameplate written in English (Rwanda) and French (Burundi) with clear
indication mentioning the following information:
• Manufacturer’s name
• Serial number
• Manufacture year
• Type of transformer
• Number of phases
• Rated power
• Rated frequency
• Transformer ratio
• Coupling symbol
• Short circuit voltage
• Total weight
• Oil weight
• Core material
The external surface of the transformer will be treated as the power transformer.
7.2.3 Spare parts
The following spare parts shall be delivered:
• 1 DGPT2 relay (or equivalent)

• 3 30 kV outdoor plugs

Lot 2 - Substations
7.2.4 Tests
7.2.4.1 Type tests
The supplier shall submit 3 copies of type test certificates to witness that the material comply with
IEC 60076-2, IEC 60076-3 or NFC 52-113 recommendations.
7.2.4.2 Routine tests
All routine tests according to IEC 60076 shall be done on all transformers..
7.2.4.3 Installation
Each Auxiliary transformer shall be connected with 30 kV cables from one of the feeders of the 30 kV
switchgear.
In Gisagara, the transformer shall be installed in the vicinity of the power transformer, on the same pit.
In Ngozi, the transformer will be placed along the control building, as shown in the relevant drawings.
7.3 AC Auxiliary services
Alternative current auxiliary services will be made by distribution board with three incomers with a
coupling system between the two sources (auxiliary transformer or gen-set) and one spare from the
Medium voltage for future connection.
AC distribution board is made of single copper bus bar.
It is used for three phase energy distribution for different outgoing feeders via LV circuit breakers.
All circuit breakers will be equipped with auxiliary contact for position indication. The indication light
will show if the circuit breaker is on or off.
An ammeter and voltmeter installed on the panel will display all electrical parameter.
The AC distribution board shall supply:
• All equipment in the substation (lighting, air conditioning)

• Internal and external sockets
• External lighting
• 48 V battery Charger
• 110 V battery Charger

Lot 2 - Substations
7.4 DC Auxiliary services
This system is made of static battery charger, DC distribution board, batteries and supplies the follow-
ing:
• Circuit breaker and disconnector’s motors

• Transformer tap-changer`s motor
• Polarities for different bays
• Telecommunication equipment
• Protection relays
• Control and command circuits
• Alarm system
• Automation and monitoring system
• Emergency lighting
All circuitry is supplied by 110 V DC except the communication, which is supplied by 48 V DC.
Two sets of batteries for 110 V DC and 48 V DC shall be installed for redundancy purpose, each set of
battery will have 100% of required capacity and be supplied by a separate battery charger and con-
nected to a different distribution board.
7.4.1 Battery charger
The battery charger is supplied by AC three phase (400V AC). Battery charger shall be both voltage
and current regulated.
It shall be equipped with a commutator to change from manual to automatic mode:
• In manual the voltage is adjustable to ±10 %,

• In automatic, the battery charger run in floating mode
The equipment is mounted in a metallic panel with a front door, each equipment is easily accessible
and dismountable.
Measurement, fault signalization light and the ON and OFF commutator are mounted on the front side
of the panel.
7.4.2 Batteries
Alkaline batteries shall be used, made of Nickel Cadmium with hydroxide of potassium as electrolyte,
which has the following advantages:
• Long life span( up to 25 years)

• Less or Maintenance free.
• High temperature resistant.
All batteries shall be mounted in a separate room from the other equipment in the substation.

Lot 2 - Substations
7.4.3 Battery and battery charger capacity
7.4.3.1 110 DC batteries
The battery shall feed all loads as defined, over a time of at least 8 h. The contractor shall dimension
the battery accordingly while considering a power reserve of at least 1/3 for possible future extensions.
The battery charger nominal current is 100 A.
The calculation shall consider the maximum load and take into account all HV bays trip caused by
busbar differential protection as critical case.
7.4.3.2 48 DC batteries
The battery shall feed all necessary consumers over a time of at least 8 h. The contractor shall dimen-
sion the battery accordingly while considering a power reserve of at least 1/3 for possible future exten-
sions.
7.4.3.3 Distribution board
DC distribution board shall be equipped with bipolar miniature circuit breakers (MCB) suitable for
breaking DC currents, with auxiliary contact to monitor the status of the MCB by switching on the light.
7.5 Emergency generator
7.5.1 Description
The generator shall be design to start automatically in case of power cut off and the change-over facili-
ty will be delivered together.
In case of 400 V outage, the utility circuit breaker shall open, the generator will start automatically and
be connected to the load and, when the power comes back, the generator will stop and the utility cir-
cuit breaker shall close automatically.
The emergency generator will be installed in a ventilated room in the control building; a 200 l (to be re-
confirmed by Contractor) diesel tank will be installed outside the room and shall have a sufficient ca-
pacity to supply the generator for a 24h continuous running in full load.
The diesel engine shall be supplied by gravitational in fuel and start by its own battery 12 V or 24 V.
The technical specifications are here below:
• Type Genset on common chassis

• Installation Indoor
• Altitude approx. 1700 m
Engine:
• Type 4 stroke engine

Lot 2 - Substations
• Speed 1.500 rpm

• Cooling system water, external radiator
• Starting Starting on battery
• Tank capacity sized for 24 h running at full load
Generator:
• Frequency 50 Hz
• Voltage 400/230 V +/- 10 %
• Rated power 63 kVA
7.5.2 General
The Diesel generator 400/230 V +/- 10 % will be supplied and shall have the following characteristics:
• Diesel engine
• Brushless excitation alternator
• Fuel supplying system
• Control and command box including the signalizations
• Automatic speed regulator
• Automatic voltage regulator
• Protection system
• Exhaust system
The emergency generator will be installed in a ventilated room in the control building and shall have
the capacity to supply the following loads:
• Battery chargers
• Substation lighting
• Motors for circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing disconnectors
• Heating resistors
• Any other equipment for the good operation of the substation.
While designing the generator, the altitude shall be taken care with the air rarefaction because they
have a big impact on the generator consumption and performance.
7.5.3 Diesel engine
7.5.3.1 Type
The engine type shall be a four stroke engine with 1500 rpm, designed to run with the fuel available
locally.
The motor shall be directly coupled to the alternator and both will be mounted on a strong metal base
with anti-vibration supports.

Lot 2 - Substations
7.5.3.2 Start equipment
The engine shall be designed to make a cold start on battery, the starting system shall have a battery
with sufficient capacity to start eight times without recharging.
The associated alternator will charge the staring battery automatically.
7.5.3.3 Cooling system
The diesel engine shall have a water cooling system in closed circuit, with a radiator and fan.
The Cooling and combustion air will be taken from outside and forced in by an axial type fan connect-
ed to the generator.
The hot air shall be expelled outside of the room using a fan in order to keep a good temperature.
7.5.3.4 Exhaust
The gas exhaust system will be equipped with silent brides and drain Plug.
The silent shall be design in order not to reach 70 dBA at 10 m distance.
The exhaust tubes inside the room shall be isolated using Plexiglas of 50mm of thickness and alumin-
ium sheet.
7.5.3.5 Fuel supplying system
Fuel supplying system shall have:
• 200l fuel tank

• fuel pumps(1 manual and 1 electrical pump)
• fuel piping and piping connection accessories
7.5.3.6 Voltage regulator
The voltage regulator shall be Woodward UG8 type or equivalent, the frequency will be kept at ± 1%.
7.5.4 Generator and excitation
7.5.4.1 Type and capacity
The alternator shall be salient pole synchronous motor type, air-cooled.
The main characteristics are:
• Voltage: 400/230 V
• Frequency: 50Hz

Lot 2 - Substations
• Rated power: 63kVA

• cos φ: 0.8 continuous operation
7.5.4.2 Voltage regulator and exciter
The exciter will be of turning diode type, brushless and will be commanded by a static regulator
Every generator exciter regulator will be independent and autonomous from the external source.
An automatic voltage regulator shall keep the output voltage in the following limits:
• ± 5% of the nominal voltage

• ± 15% for the load switching
7.5.5 Control equipment
7.5.5.1 Control panel
The control panel shall be supplied and installed in the generator’s room.
The control panel shall be equipped with all equipment necessary for the control, command and moni-
toring of the generator and its auxiliaries in particular:
• electrical protection relays

• automation relays
• instrumentations
• alarms and signalization elements
7.5.5.2 Description
The panel will have the following elements:
• commutation equipment for normal, automatic and emergency

• equipment for start control and monitoring which inhibits the start when water or fuel level is low
• protection and control equipment which will stop the generator for the following fault:
– overload
– short circuit
– oil low pressure
– overspeed
– engine high temperature
– overvoltage
– undervoltage
• starting equipment which makes three starting attempts and gives alarm after the third unsuccess-
ful attempt
• signalling box with light for each fault
• output contact to the control room for the following information :
– Generator not available
– Generator in service

Lot 2 - Substations
– Generator stopped by fault

• Auxiliary circuit for fuel monitoring

Lot 2 - Substations
8. Miscellaneous equipment
8.1 30 kV power cables
This cable shall be used to connect:
• 220-110/30 kV power transformer

• 30/0.4kV auxiliary transformer
• 30 kV outgoing feeders
This cable shall be copper, N2XSY type, single core and has an external protection sheath resistant
to:
• at water penetration
• at solar radiation
• alkalis and acids
• harmful insects
Cables shall be laid in cable trench and shall not be joined.
8.1.1 Technical specifications of power cables
CARACTERISTICS UNITS 30 kV
4
VDE code designation N2XSY 1x…/RM…
Standard DIN VDE 0276 or equivalent
Type Single
Rated voltage kV 18/30
Conductor type Cu
Insulation material XLPE
Test voltage (5 minutes) kV 63
Impulse withstand voltage kV 170
8.1.2 Medium voltage cable terminations
The cables are connected by the mean of plug-in type terminations.
On the auxiliary transformer the cables shall be connected via plug-in cable sealing ends. Connection
of different sizes and numbers of cables per system as already mentioned above must be possible.
Suitable cable plug-in sealing ends have to be provided. Details regarding size and number of neces-
sary sealing ends shall be co-ordinated with design and size of power cables.
Terminations used for overhead line connection on the dead-end tower and on the power transformers
shall be of outdoor type.
All cable termination shall be provided with all accessories.
4
Section to be defined by the contractor and justified by calculation

Lot 2 - Substations
8.1.3 Installation of cables between 30 kV switchgears and dead-end towers
The cables will be in conformity with the specifications indicated to the §8.1 30 kV power cables. If a
copper cable is retained, all the precautions will be taken to prevent any corrosion in consequence of
the difference in electronegativity between the copper and the aluminium of the line (bimetallic wash-
ers in particular).
The cables shall generally be laid according to the following sketches:
The connection of the ground cable to the overhead line pole/tower shall consist of:
• connection to the overhead line conductors

• 30 kV surge arrestors with bracket
• 30 kV cable terminations, outdoor type
• cables, including fittings,
• cable tubes for protection of the cable from ground up to the tower (lowest brace, minimum 2 m
above ground).
The cable fittings shall be able to withstand the loadings in case of short-circuit.
8.2 30 kV Surge arrestors
8.2.1 Standards
The surge arrestors shall follow the following standards and recommendations:
IEC 60099 Surge arrestors

IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in polluted
conditions
UTE C 11-001 Conditions techniques auxquelles doivent satisfaire les distributions d'énergie élec-
trique
NF C 11-201 Règles de construction des réseaux de distribution d'énergie électrique

Lot 2 - Substations
8.2.2 Characteristics and construction
The surge arrestors are of variable resistors type, zinc oxide, without spark-gaps.
The main features of the arrestors are summarized in the following table.
Characteristics Unit Specified values

Type ZnO
Rated maximum voltage kV 36
Rated frequency Hz 50
Nominal voltage kV 30
Discharge class - 3
Nominal discharge current kA 10
A failure of the lightning protector should not cause explosive rupture of the envelope, nor of ignition of
the latter. The lightning protectors must be able to support combined constraints, as they may occur
during service. These constraints should cause neither deterioration, nor thermal runaway.
The envelope of the surge arrestors is made of synthetic material and consists of only one element. It
must observe the recommendations IEC 60099 and IEC 60815, in order to respect the principal follow-
ing constraints:
• creepage withstand
• good behaviour against fire
• good behaviour towards climatic conditions
The surge arrestor does not comprise any disconnecting device. On the other hand, it comprises a
signalling device, detectable or visible remotely and indicating without ambiguity that the apparatus is
damaged. Visible remotely means that, during the day, the signal must be well visible from the ground,
at a distance of 25 m around the pole. At night, this signal must be visible in the same way using a
flashlight. Invisibility is accepted solely under fog or conditions of fog.
The elements of surge arrestors must have a total sealing under the specified operating conditions.
The total mass of a lightning protector, including the connections should not exceed 4 kg.
The surge arrestors are connected side line via a suitable connector suitable for underground-
overhead incoming connection.
The part of the lightning protector connected to the ground is directly connected to the ground via the
bracket on which it is fixed. The parts in contact with the fitting should not present electrochemical in-
compatibility with galvanized steel.
8.3 Approach cable (OPGW)
This chapter describes the cable between the OPGW of the transmission line and the substation pro-
tection, SCADA and telecommunication systems.
This cable shall have following characteristics:

Lot 2 - Substations
• Fibres compatible with the OHTL cable

• Fully dielectric cable that avoids any interference with electromagnetic fields
• Fibre core protected against moisture penetration and longitudinal water propagation
• Rodent protection with glass yarns/tape
• Termite resistance
Performance and testing according to IEC 60794.
8.4 Low voltage cables
All low voltage cables shall have 0,6/1 kV rated voltage and made of copper for cross sections from
1.5 mm² to 95 mm². For greater sections, aluminium may be used as well.
The conductor for the power cable shall be isolated by chemically extruded polyethylene (PRC).
The cables for DC circuit will be equipped with the protection against electromagnetic perturbation.
This protection shall be made of a continuous copper or aluminium ring, allowing the bending of the
cables.
They will be also used for AC circuits except on heating and lighting system.
The LV cables shall be used for the following connections:
AC auxiliary circuit:
• Connection between the transformer and auxiliary services panels

• Lighting, sockets, fans and heating circuits
• Supply of bays
The connection between the service transformer 30/0.4 kV shall be made of LV single core cables 240
mm² made of copper and PRC isolated.
AC measurement circuit:
• The connection between the current and voltage transformer and protection and automation
equipment
• Measurement devices located in the control building
DC circuits:
• The connection of the equipment in the control building

• The connection between the equipment in the control building and primary equipment located in
the switchyard.

Lot 2 - Substations
9. Protection
9.1 General
9.1.1 General requirements
This Specification covers the design, manufacturing, factory tests, delivery to sites, erection, setting,
parameterisation and architecture configuration, field testing, commissioning, warranty and lifetime
support of 220kV, 110kV, 30KV substation protection.
The general purpose of the protection equipment is to isolate every fault on the power system with
sensitivity, reliability and selectivity, and in the minimum desirable time.
Protection Relays must operate correctly and predictable, and must be stable during all passing sys-
tem transients caused by switching, external unconnected faults and other disturbances systems and
equipment included in the contract works.
All systems, sub-systems and components shall be of approved and reliable design. The highest de-
gree of uniformity and interchange ability shall be attained, as far as possible. The design shall facili-
tate easy maintenance, fault diagnosis and repair of the components.
The systems shall be of the state-of-the art for operation under electrical conditions present in high-
voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, ensure long-term compatibility requirements
and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.
All protection relays and associated auxiliary equipment shall be of standard construction from experi-
enced and reliable manufacturers. The protection equipment supplied under this contract and its as-
sociated software shall have a conclusive number of reference installations at similar voltage levels
and at least two years of operational experience in similar substations
Main 1 and main 2 protections shall be of different make.
The offered protection system shall support remote control and monitoring from the National Control
Center (NCC) and from the Digital Substation Control system including communication ports for
IEC61850 Ethernet communication.
The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background in microprocessor- based
technology are able to operate the system easily after having received minimum basic training.
Relay panels shall be supplied by the respective relay manufacturers, with relays fully assembled,
wired and tested under their close supervision and shall be fully responsible for design and engineer-
ing of protection systems, schematic diagrams and mature performance.
All equipment as well as the terminals of the cubicles shall be easily accessible.
For all of the protection systems, cubicles shall be provided, and be placed and co-ordinated suitably
in the respective room(s).

Lot 2 - Substations
All relays shall be clearly labelled in relation to their functions and to the equipment to be protected or
supervised. It shall be understood that all auxiliary facilities shall be provided as necessary, i.e. for
testing, adjustment, resetting, etc. even if not explicitly specified hereafter, and deemed necessary to
complete the work.
All the wiring internal and external ending in the protection equipment shall be identify and marked
with durables ferrules according to the drawing and schemes.
Where two groups of relays are used to protect a circuit, the VT-circuits and DC supplies shall be ar-
ranged in a redundant manner so that one group may be switched off without affecting the perfor-
mance of the other group.
As far as possible, numerical protection relays and products shall be provided. The hard ware devices
shall be based on offering integrated functionality, a higher degree of self-supervision and data ex-
change with computer control systems (SCMS-Engineering Workstation) via serial communication
ports using IEC protocols.
rd
Where appropriate, 3 party interrogation software shall be supplied to access the database of set-
tings and configuration files from Engineering Workstation and allow read and modify relay operational
settings and configurations.
Insulation of all the related circuits shall comply with IEC-60255 or other international standard(s).
Important functions and features, in addition to the fault measuring capabilities, shall include:
• Programmable scheme logic

• Remote communication interface for setting/interrogation from SCMS or Control Centre
• Local communication interface via LCD-Keyboard and/or front panel serial port facilities
• Time-tagged status events, alarms, fault and disturbance records
• Display of measured/processed quantities
• Self-monitoring (Hardware/Software)
• Inter-protection communication
• Real-time fault locating (distance relay)
• Electronic transducer communication, if applicable.
The protection scheme(s) shall include all hardware and software to permit remote set-
ting/interrogation/fault evaluation from the SCMS (engineering) workstation or from the computer
monitoring system.
If existing protection on a running remote-end circuit terminal is required to be modified for any reason,
e.g. to operate with newly installed equipment, the Bidder/Contractor shall supply all the necessary re-
lays, boards, wiring terminals, wiring, etc. in order to ensure satisfactory coordination and perfor-
mance.
Protection requirements shall include the necessary modifications of the “remote end” (other station
and/or other switchgear part) of any protected circuit/ system. The Bidder/Contractor shall also modi-
fy/improve the corresponding drawings, erect all necessary equipment and perform the commissioning
with the requirements given in the specifications as agreed upon with Engineer. Tests shall include
secondary, primary and load tests on those protection systems affected by the modifications. The Bid-
der/Contractor shall also be responsible for providing the new as-built drawings for the remote-end cir-

Lot 2 - Substations
cuit terminals showing the design and engineering changes undertaken in both AutoCAD and PDF
formats, in addition to supplying hard copy drawings.
Control and relay circuits, current and voltage transformer secondary circuits, battery and auxiliary
power supply wiring, supervisory, alarm and communication circuits shall be protected against conduc-
tive, electrostatic and electromagnetic influences.
Where additional relay equipment is to be installed in an existing station, it is the responsibility of the
Bidder/Contractor to ensure that the existing batteries and chargers have sufficient capacity to meet
the additional load requirements of the new equipment.
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply block diagrams and circuit diagrams of the protection scheme dur-
ing all the phases of this project, which shall be subject to approval of the Consultant. These diagrams
shall include information concerning control and alarm circuits, secondary circuits of current and volt-
age transformers, circuit breaker trip coils, DC supplies and communications circuits.
The block diagrams, as well as any other documentation, shall be updated whenever modifications are
made at any later date during the Contract execution period.
Whether explicitly indicated or not, all necessary elements to co-ordinate and assure the approved
and correct functioning of the protection system, new or existing, in accordance with the requirements
of this Specification shall be included.
The design life and provision of adequate actualized software of numeric protection relays shall be
greater than 15 years included in the price. The Bidder/Contractor shall state how long lifetime support
for the protection and associated systems will be provided, assure for lifetime support maintenance
and make recommendations on spare part provision.
The evolution and change to new version of software will integrate the previous model of the existing
relays in the project.
The bids shall include a list spares predicted as being required for the first 5 years of operation and
additionally over the design lifetime of protection. This list shall be placed in the Schedule No. 6. Rec-
ommended Spare Parts of the substations.
Relay equipment shall be segregated feeder-wise, and mounted on a suite of panels, which, unless
specified otherwise, shall be erected in the station relay or control room. All equipment and devices
shall be mounted taking into consideration both reliability and ease of access to them for maintenance
purposes. The equipment shall be mounted no lower than 300mm or higher than 1.65m from the floor.
The function components of each relay shall be suitable for operation under the local climatic condi-
tions.
To minimise the effect of electrolysis, relay coils operating on DC shall be connected so that the coils
are not continuously energised from the positive pole of the battery.
It shall not be possible to manually operate any relay, except reset, without first opening its case or
cubicle door. Each indicator, whether of the electrical or mechanical type, shall be capable of being
reset by hand. Opening of the relay dust proof enclosure shall be avoided as far as possible. In gen-
eral, external reset facilities shall be provided; however, in case of the electronic and static relays be-
ing built into cubicles, the reset procedure might become possible after opening the doors only.

Lot 2 - Substations
The requirement of communication interfaces for command teleprotection signalling channels and pro-
tection data exchange channels to the remote and terminals shall be coordinated with SDH telecom-
munication systems for supporting multiplexed operation over diversely routed fibre optic communica-
tion medium. Reference shall be made to the relevant part of the communication equipment specifica-
tions, in chapter 10 and 11.
The protection schemes shall incorporate any interface facilities to transform any insufficient contact
rating used in the protection-related equipment, such as protection signalling equipment, to the rating
required in the input/output circuits, e.g. for tripping requirements of the relay functions with the appro-
priately designed contacts.
Any protection relay output contact shall be co-ordinated with the station requirements, however, if not
otherwise specified, the minimum contact ratings shall be as follows:
• Switching voltage : 250 V

• Contact rating : 2500 W/VA
• Making current : 30 A ac or dc for 3 sec
• Breaking current (Power) : 30 W/VA (L/R<40ms)
• Typical pick-up time : 5 – 8 ms
All main protection relays shall be individually provided with an IN/OUT switch (lockable).
The contractor shall provide the following materials after commissioning and before the taking over
certificate being issued:
• Copy of software loaded in each protection relays (hard copy and electronic copy);
• Software of final back up settings on electronic copy;
• All software used or necessary for maintenance, diagnosis and routine testing of the relays;
• Instruction, maintenance and operation manuals of all relays;
• Setting calculations, etc.;
• Sufficient quantity of communication cable to communicate the relays with a computer for loading
and unloading of any files or settings
9.1.2 Protection of 220 kV OHL (operated in 110 kV)
The protection at both ends substation A (Gisagara and Ngozi) and B (Kigoma and Gitega) will be at
the type described under 220 kV OHL protection.
In future, when the line will be operated at 220 kV the end in substation B will be a new substation B
220 kV.
The protection 220 kV previously supplied under this project in the 110 kV substation B will be trans-
ferred to the new feeder 220 kV in new substation B (by others).
For the 110 kV feeder in the substation B, a new protection 110 kV OHL protection will be delivered
under other project.

Lot 2 - Substations
9.1.3 Protection of the 110 kV RN1 line in Gitega
For this feeder be delivered the protection as mentioned under 110 kV OHL protection.
9.1.4 Protection coordination study
The contractor shall elaborate a protection coordination study for the whole 220 kV, 110kV system that
shall include:
• Short circuit calculation;

• Setting of the new relays;
• Impact of the new equipment and its settings to the setting of the existing relays in other neighbour-
ing substations.
The contractor is responsible for relay settings/ coordination, setting range, operating limits. For this
task shall be provided enough documents, supported by design calculations for all protective equip-
ment being supplied and for associated substations existing protection systems. This is a specific re-
quirement to ensure discussion and approval before factory testing begins and no departure from this
requirement will be allowed.
The above-mentioned calculations should be revised and submitted to the Employer’s Representative
for approval three (3) months before the site commissioning tests begin. Protection circuits shall be
designed to reduce the standing load on the DC supply to the minimum.
9.1.5 Bay protection functions
The Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED´s) shall have separate protection and control functions for
providing faster and independent means of protection on HV level
All IEDs shall be integrated for data sharing and meet the real-time communication requirements for
automatic functions or monitoring functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various
IED shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data exchange requirements of
NCC and Digital Substation Control system.
The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals and binary inputs
and relay outputs for all built-in functions and signals shall be possible both locally and remotely
through graphical interface.
Each IED should contain an event recorder able to store at least 256 time-tagged events.
IED having bay protection functions shall provide the user either locally or remotely (Engineering
Workstation) with complete information on the last ten disturbances.
A disturbance recorder with a minimum of 5 seconds recording time for at least 10 disturbances shall
provide the user with time-tagged disturbance records. The phases of the pre-fault and fault currents
and voltages shall be recorded for each disturbance and available for further evaluation purposes.

Lot 2 - Substations
At least the analogue inputs and the characteristic analogue measurement quantities, related to the
activated protection functions, as well as 16 binary signals must be recorded with a sampling rate that
guarantees the posting of up to fifth harmonic component of any recorded analogue signal.
9.1.6 Engineering Workstation
One engineer workstation of industrial type for Gisagara and Ngozi substation, each suitable for sub-
station control and monitoring and for SCMS system configuration/maintenance shall be provided. The
engineer workstation must be configured in addition to its original configuration as operator work-
station back-up to be used when needed.
HMI workstations and Engineering workstation shall be connected via the redundant date exchange
through LAN-A and LAN-B system to the substation control units.
Engineer workstation shall display switchgear status by a customised overview, and by single line dia-
grams with colours mimic display of the different sswitchgear components.
Engineer workstation shall comprise a modern powerful computer with an operating speed of 1.0 GHz
or more (top of the range), one (1) nos. 21” low radiation (complying with TCO 95 and MPR II), high-
resolution TFT LCD colour monitors.
Additional software for fault recording analysis and protection relay programming and diagnostic.
The software shall support automatic upload of data from protection relays (IED´s) (Disturbance Re-
corder, Event Recorder, Fault Locator from Main 1 and 2) and be capable of transmitting the fault data
to NCC and Digital Substation Control system and hold such data until the next event.
Facilities shall be provided to download settings into protection relays from this workstation.
Workstation shall have access to a hardcopy LaserJet colour printer and one black (dot matrix) data
loggers.
Keyboard with mouse, pointing device and associated furniture to be provided. The technical data and
equipment supply are subject to state-of-the-art design criteria at the date of contract award.
9.1.7 Current and voltage transformer requirements
The Contractor is responsible for defining the final characteristics of the CT's and VT's cores for pro-
tective relaying functions (dedicated or combined measuring/protection) to satisfy the performance re-
quirements of the offered relays.
The compliance of the CT's and VT's shall be documented and submitted for Employer's approval pri-
or to their manufacturing.
Current transformer requirements shall be determined to ensure high protection performance. The
Bidder/Contractor shall submit comprehensive technical report that includes the required CT burden
and knee point voltage calculations. The report shall confirm that CTs will be designed to ensure a
saturation-free performance under both transient and steady state fault conditions, taking due account
of system X/R ratios, system fault levels and remnant flux conditions in the CT core.

Lot 2 - Substations
Typical X/R ratios of 25 and 15 shall be considered for 220kV and 110kV systems respectively. The
bus fault levels shall correspond to the respective switchgear ratings, unless specified otherwise.
Current transformers shall be preferably of the low reactance type (for all secondary taps in case of
multiple ratios). The performances shall not be inferior to that defined in the IEC Publications.
For the class “X” type, the knee-point voltage (defined as the point on the excitation curve at which a
10% increase in the rms value of the applied voltage results in 50% increase in the rms value of the
secondary exciting current) shall be for each of the possible ratios above the secondary voltage for
maximum short-circuit conditions, actual secondary winding resistance at 75 °C and 150% of the an-
ticipated external burden.
The following minimum requirements apply:
• Magnetizing current at knee-point voltage not higher than 5% of the nominal secondary rated cur-
rent;
• Maximum secondary resistance so as to not exceed 50% of the secondary rated burden.
For the high impedance protections, scheme specific requirements shall be taken into consideration
for selecting knee-point voltage and magnetizing current.
Wiring of CT and VT circuits and (cores) shall be in separate multi-core cables carefully segregated
and screened. The CT neutral shall be earthed in the respective relay panels via an isolation link.
The minimum cross section of CT circuits inside the protection cubicle / control cubicle shall not be
2 2
less than 2.5mm whereas for the inter panel / field cabling it shall not be less than 4.0 mm .
CT / VT field cables shall have the colour code of Red, Yellow, Blue and Black.
9.1.8 Auto-reclosing concept
The 220 kV and 110 kV OHL feeder protection systems shall be designed for operation in conjunction
with three-phase and one phase auto-reclosing cycles. The 30 kV feeder protection systems shall be
designed for operation in conjunction with only three-phase auto-reclosing cycles.
9.1.9 Testing facilities, indications
Testing of protection functions, including the full schemes involving control, communication, supervi-
sion, etc., shall be performed at the workshop (manufacturer’s test field/laboratory) prior to shipment.
Adequate test and isolation facilities shall be provided within the protection scheme(s), to enable end
users personnel to carry out recommended commissioning and maintenance test procedures in a safe
and convenient manner.
Trips, alarms, events and other hardware and software status conditions shall be indicated on the pro-
tective relaying front panel user interface and/or on the switchboard externally, where appropriate, in
suitable manner.

Lot 2 - Substations
In addition to the local indication, remote indication facilities shall also be provided in the control room
via a communication interface.
Unless otherwise specified, each relay or relay function group of solid-state elements shall have indi-
cators to enable identification of the faulted phases and zones of operation, receiving and sending of
all associated HF signals (blocking , permissive ,direct trip ,Associated HF channel(s) failure or OPGW
(PLC) failure ,test in/off status.
The relay panel front is always visible for the alarm LEDs and display unit.
Function elements in numeric relays shall have LED indicators on the front panel to enable identifica-
tion of their operation, faulted phases, zones, hardware and software status, etc.
Every cubicle and panel shall have at the top left-hand corner one easily visible lamp to indicate that
an element in the cubicle or panel has initiated an alarm. On the station alarm panel an alarm shall be
given which can only be reset when this cubicle alarm has been reset at the panel or cubicle. The
panel alarm lamp can only be reset when the element in the cubicle causing the actual alarm has
been reset. The reset button shall be located outside on the door.
Test blocks shall be provided to facilitate tests by secondary injection of all major fault-measuring re-
lays without disconnecting any wire or permanent connection. The test block shall permit direct injec-
tion of currents and voltages into the individual relays.
The test terminal blocks shall isolate the trip contacts of main protection relays on both sides. Injection
sockets shall be arranged so that it shall not possible to open the current transformer secondary cir-
cuits when inserting test plugs.
The trip functions, if not interrupted by a test switch, shall be blocked when inserting the test plugs.
Similarly SER, SCMS, FMS and alarm circuits shall also be suitably blocked (test switch or else).
The incoming voltage, current and dc circuits shall be connected to the bottom of the test block and
the relay connection shall be taken from the top.
Four plugs for each type of test plug, provided per station, shall be supplied and handed over to Cus-
tomer store.
When separate interposing current transformers (ICTs) are used, there shall be a test socket or link to
measure both the primary and secondary currents of the ICTs.
9.1.10 Auxiliary supply
For each individual functional unit, the supply of static relays shall be ensured by separate DC battery
or independent DC/DC converters. Basically, main and back-up or duplicated protection systems of
the same network element shall be supplied from different DC battery circuits and or DC/DC convert-
ers. The relay cubicle DC supply shall be monitored and a central alarm issued whenever the voltage
exceeds the limits for reliable operation. Schemes shall be based on the fail-safe principle, e.g. DC
supply loss or open circuit shall not cause incorrect opening or closing of relay contacts.
If not stated otherwise the following basic design data are to apply:

Lot 2 - Substations
• DC control voltage: 110 V DC (+10% -20%);

• DC trip circuits 110 V DC (+10% -50%);
• VT phase secondary voltage: 110/√3 V, 110/√3 V;
• Rated frequency: 50 Hz (-6% +2%);
Within the specified DC voltage variations the offered relays shall retain their rated characteristic accu-
racy and full operation capability
9.1.11 Compliance with Standards and requested type test
For design and type testing of the protection and control equipment, the following standards shall be
applicable:
General
IEC 600255: Electrical relays

IEC 60038: IEC Standard voltages
IEC 60068: Environmental testing
IEC 60664: Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
IEC 60870: Telecontrol equipment and systems
CISPR 11 and following Electromagnetic compatibility
CE-marking
EN 50081-2 Emissivity (Industry)

EN 50082-2 Immunity (Industry)
Type Tests
Type test has to be performed according with following standards and included on the price for the
protection equipment.
• Insulation
– IEC 60255-5
– IEC 60870-2-1
• EMC test for interference immunity
– IEC 60255-6 and 22
– IEC 61000-4
– IEC 60694
– IEEE Std C37.90.1
– IEEE Std C37.90.2
• EMC test for interference emission
– IEC 61000-6-3
– IEC 61000-3-2
– IEC 61000-3-3
– IEC –CISPR 22
• Mechanical Test (oscillation, shock, seismic )
– IEC 60255-21
– IEC 60068-2

Lot 2 - Substations
• Vibration and shock resistance (transport)

– IEC 60255-21
– IEC 60068-2
• Climatic Stress
– IEC 60255-6
• Supply Interruption
– IEC 60255-11
9.1.12 Factory acceptance tests
The Employer/Consultant will attend the factory tests for the protection equipment.
9.1.13 Commissioning tests
The commissioning test program shall be submitted to the Employer and the Employer's Representa-
tive for approval.
Minimum equipment to be provided by the contractor during commissioning
• 6x Analogue Multimeter
• 6x Digital Multimeter
• Equipment for measuring continuity, phase sequence
• Primary in feed test
• 3x Phase Voltage and current Secondary in feed test with timer for testing all the protection equip-
ment
• 2x operational Walk Talkies
Minimum test requirements are as follows:
Current transformers
• General check of insulators, earth connections and terminal identification.
• Magnetization curve, polarity test till protection and measuring boards, ratio, secondary resistance
tests, insulation resistance tests.
Voltage transformers
• General check of insulators, earth connection and terminal identification.
• H.V. tests, ratio, polarity, measuring of insulation resistance and winding resistance, magnetizing
currents.
• Secondary injection of voltage transformer circuits secondary injection of VT circuits. Measuring of
voltage shall be at each point of VT secondary by applying 100 V at the secondary circuit of the VT.
Protection basic tests

• Insulation resistance of all secondary circuits (current and voltage transformers, control, indication
and alarm circuits, etc.).
• Primary injection of current transformer circuits, including overall injection of differential protection
circuits, to prove all connections and to check ratios, fault settings, stability and phase identifica-
tion.
• Secondary injection of AC and DC relays to check their operating characteristics.

Lot 2 - Substations
Check of schemes
• Complete functional tests of tripping, alarm, and control and indication circuit. Operation of tripping
elements at reduced (80%) DC voltage.
• Tripping and Auto reclosing test
• Phasing tests (of main plant) prior to making alive.
• Measuring of the end-to-end teleprotection channels transmission times.
• Simulation by secondary injection and signal transmission of the various protection transferred
trips, phase segregated differential protection trips and all auto reclosing programs with their asso-
ciated breakers.
• Load tests for protection and directional units.
• Test of all functions defined in the protection schemes, alarms
• Test of teleprotection logic schemes
• Secondary in feed of protection from the test block , test setting characteristics (provided by the
contractor)
9.1.14 Tripping Circuits and supervision of tripping circuits
The trip output shall always be directly from the relevant protection relay, reinforced by a contact from
the master electromechanical trip relay(s) type.
Trip-repeat relays shall have fast operating times to achieve an overall trip time of the scheme within
the specified limits.
Wherever two CB's trip coils are provided, the main and back-up (or duplicated) protection trip orders
shall be routed to different trip coils in different control cables.
The trip circuits shall be continuously supervised in the closed and open position of the circuit break-
ers. The trip supervision circuit shall include to the extent feasible all loops between trip contacts.
Galvanic connection between the auxiliary voltage source (110 V battery), protection tripping contacts,
CB auxiliary contacts and CB tripping coil has to be faultless all the time. Either the trip circuit supervi-
sion function of each protection device (ANSI designation – 74TC) or separate relays, which have to
be additionally installed, shall be used for the above mentioned circuits supervision. They shall signal-
ize the following, but are not limited to:
• CB auxiliary contacts failure;

• CB tripping coils failure;
• Tripping circuits disruption;
• Auxiliary voltage failure.
As block-close facilities (lockout relays) are specified, these relays shall be arranged to prevent closing
of any associated circuit breakers until it has been reset. Local and remote from LDC resetting shall be
possible. An operations indicator shall be provided which resets when the block-close relay is reset.
Tripping relays shall have an operation indicator. They must be guaranteed for operation down to 50%
of the rated DC voltage as could occurs during total black out of the Substation.

Lot 2 - Substations
9.2 220 kV Line protection
The 220 kV lines shall be protected by two main line protection relays (protection main 1 and main 2).
In order to improve the system reliability, the two main line protections shall be based on two different
measuring principles. Therefore, the following two main numerical line relays shall be provided for the
220 kV line:
9.2.1 Main 1 Line Protection
The main1 line protection shall consist of a phase segregated current differential with independent
fault measuring capabilities relay and three current inputs including a distance scheme , whose main
characteristics are described below.
The main 2-line protection shall consist of non-switched multi zone phase and ground distance protec-
tion whose main characteristics are described below;
9.2.3 Back-up Protection
The back-up protection shall consist of non-directional overcurrent and directional earth fault schemes.
9.2.4 Line bay protection summary
The protection scheme for a line bay can be summarized as follows (main functions only):
Main 1 Current differential protection

Non switched phase and ground distance protection
3-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
Non-directional earth fault protection
Directional earth fault protection directional comparison block scheme for high re-
Main 2
sistance ground fault
Back-up Non-directional overcurrent
Directional earth fault
Current transformer cores (see also Chapter 4.4)

Core 1 220kV line Main 1 protection (87L&21) (BPU)
Core 2 220kV line Main 2 protection (67N &21) (BPU)and Backup OC/EF (BCPU)
Core 3 Backup OC/EF and BCPU
Core 3 Tariff Meter –BCU (Bay Control Unit)
Core 4 Busbar Protection Main1
Core 5 Busbar Protection Main2 (for Future double Busbar)

Lot 2 - Substations
9.2.5 General Requirements for Main Protection 1 and 2
The protection trip times shall be in the range of 20-25 ms for Main 1 and Main 2 protection.
Both Main 1 and Main 2 protection schemes shall be designed to operate with one auto-reclose inde-
pendent function, to achieve single-phase trip and re-close under single-phase fault conditions, and
three-phase trip with high-speed auto-reclose under multi-phase fault conditions, respectively.
To enhance speed, reliability and security, redundant tele-protection signaling equipment one for Main
1 Line Differential Protection and (Main 2) Directional comparison scheme (each on a dedicated chan-
nel) provided by two optical ports STM-16 via redundant fiber optic cores of OPGW.
The current differential relay shall be built with an un stabilizing facility, through which, on receipt of an
external trigger, it shall communicate a signal to the remote end relay for the purpose of tripping the
remote end circuit breaker and thus cutting off the remote end infeed to the fault at the local end ex-
ternal to the protection zone
The current differential relay shall be designed with multiple differential slope settings. The hardware
shall be designed with a CT saturation detector. This detector will change the slope characteristic from
low value to high value to increase the operating current. The line terminal that detects the saturation
should send a coded message to the remote end over the same channel used to exchange current
samples, so that slope characteristic is also changed at the other end.
The earth fault measurement in distance zone 1 shall be compensated for load currents. The direc-
tional discrimination shall be based on the use of phase-locked positive-sequence voltages, and shall
provide unlimited directional sensitivity for all unsymmetrical faults. The positive- sequence memory
voltage shall be used for close three-phase faults and shall be operational for more than 100 ms.
The distance function in the main protection relay shall have at least three zones with independent
settings and in addition zones of measurement for all the usual transfer tripping schemes. The integrity
of the VT and CT circuits shall be supervised.
The main protection relay shall perform and display measurement of phase current, phase-to-earth
and phase to phase voltages, residual current and voltages, frequency, power factor, active and reac-
tive power and energy, power quality monitoring, etc.
The data exchange shall be ensured via a communication interface.
The current differential IED (BPU) should include all relevant additional functions such as:
• Extended functionality including protection, measurement, monitoring, communication and condi-

tion monitoring, etc;
• Protection functions including:
220 KV LINE MAIN 1

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
PROTECTION
Current differential protection √
Non switched phase and ground distance protection √

Lot 2 - Substations
220 KV LINE MAIN 1

PROTECTION
3-phase non-directional overcurrent protection √
Non-directional earth fault protection √
Sensitive earth fault detection
Negative sequence current protection
3-phase directional overcurrent protection √
Directional earth fault protection √
Residual voltage protection
3-phase thermal over load protection
3-phase over/under voltage protection
Under/over frequency protection including rate of change
Auto reclosure
Fault locator √
Synchro check
Open/broken conductor detector √
Trip circuit supervision
3-phase sequence monitoring (phase current rotation)
3-phase current sequence
Internal self-supervision √
Measurement and monitoring functions such as:
220 KV LINE MAIN 1

MEASUREMENT AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS
PROTECTION
Energy metering : √
Active energy value – forward Active energy value – reverse Reactive
energy value – inductive Reactive energy value - capacitive
A dedicated monomode fibre optic pair is provided under this contract for the coupling to the remote
end. It shall conform to ITU-G655.The serial working interface for the asynchronous transmission shall
have a Hamming distance of 4 assuring a jitter-free communication.
The selection of the equipment shall be done so as to allow for 20% attenuation reserve in the end-to-
end transmission. All necessary additional devices, plug connectors, conventional and short copper or
fibre-optic connections up to the terminals of the fibre optic cable are part of this supply.
Contractor shall also provide a multimode fibre optic pair with additional multimode fibre optic/G703-
E1/T1 converter for communication with SDH multiplexer or multimode fibre optic pair; conform to
IEEE C37.94 connexion to SDH multiplexer.
The protection functions shall be in the form of software such that the additional or different functions
i.e., application of specific logics, etc., can be readily implemented without changes to the existing
hardware. All configuration and setting operation shall be made using a menu-based operator program
running on a PC connected locally to the terminal for the purpose and/or remotely.

Lot 2 - Substations
9.2.7 Main Distance Function Protections 1 or 2
The distance relay shall be suitable for the protection of single and double circuit lines and cables in
solidly or low-impedance grounded systems. It shall be capable of detecting all kinds of power system
faults including close in three-phase faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high resistance
ground faults. Due consideration shall be given to power swings and changes in the direction of ener-
gy flow.
A minimum of three transfer trip signal shall be provided per circuit on 220 kV double circuits line for
cross-country faults detection of distance protection, additionally three transfer trip signals shall be
provided for directional comparison earth fault protection scheme.
The distance IED should include all relevant additional functions such as:

tion monitoring, etc.;
220 KV LINE MAIN 1&2 PRO-

TECTION
Switch on-to-fault protection √
Directional earth fault protection for high resistance ground fault √
Quadrilateral / Mho tripping characteristics √
Fault locator √
Power swing detection/tripping √
Teleprotection schemes √
Teleprotection schemes for directional earth fault comparison √
blocking scheme
Weak infeed protection √
Back up overcurrent protection
Thermal overload protection √
Stub bus protection √
Current reversal protection in case of parallel line √
Over/under voltage protection √
Auto reclosure
Single pole auto reclosure
Synchro check
VT, fuse failure and others monitoring functions √
Trip circuit supervision √
CT Supervision √
Broken conductor/phase discontinuity detection √
Self-supervision √
Event recorder √
Measurement and monitoring functions such as: -
220 KV LINE MAIN 2

PROTECTION
Operational measured 3-phase currents √
Neutral current (3IO) √

Lot 2 - Substations
220 KV LINE MAIN 2

PROTECTION
Operational measured 3-phase voltages √
Residual voltage (Uo) √
3-phase active and reactive powers √
Energy metering: - √
Active energy value- forward
Active energy value – reverse Reactive energy value – inductive
Reactive energy value – capacitive
Power factor √
System frequency √
Average as well as minimum and maximum currents and voltag- √
es
Fault/disturbance recorder √
Load blinder √
• The relay shall support telecommunication schemes such as PUTT, POTT, Blocking (including re-
verse measurement elements). All the additional logics in case of parallel lines (transient blocking)
or weak in feed have to be included.
• A sensitive directional comparison earth fault protection using a separate protection signalling cir-
cuit and a timer to co-ordinate with Zone 1 of the distance relay (where specified). Hence, this relay
shall trip single phase (single pole breaker) further timer shall trip three-phase in the event of a per-
sistent fault without receipt of the carrier signal from the remote end.
• The directional comparison earth fault protection will provided blocking scheme (Directional Com-
parison Blocking) with forward elements (overreach) and block directional start elements to com-
plete the logic of the internal faults. In the case of parallel lines all the elements to stabilized the
scheme need to be supplied
• Distance-to-fault locator, which indicates the distance in kilometre (Km), R and X values in ohm on
primary and secondary values, distance in % of the line length and R and X per unit length values.
The fault locator shall have the zero sequence mutual compensation facilities. The locator must
operate correctly for all types of 1-phase-to-earth and 3-phase faults and shall not have an inherent
measuring error in excess of 3%. It should be also indicated if a high-precision fault location has to
be provided and with which degree of independence of fault resistance and load current, taking into
account the data available of both ends of the line.
• The protection functions shall be in the form of software such that the additional or different func-
tions i.e. power swing blocking, sensitive ground fault, overcurrent protection, thermal overload,
frequency protection, signals for single/three pole autoreclosure, application of specific logics, bro-
ken conductor/phase discontinuity detection, etc., can be readily implemented without changes to
the existing hardware. All configuration and setting operation shall be made using a menu-based
operator program running on a PC connected locally to the terminal for the purpose and/or remote-
ly.

Lot 2 - Substations
9.2.8 Backup Protection
Backup protection consisting of non-directional overcurrent and directional earth fault protection shall
be implemented using separate relays and not embedded in any main protection relays as described
in item 4.9.17.
This protection can be implemented into the Bay controller and should only perform 3 phase trip and
will not activate the autoreclosing of the circuit breaker
9.2.9 Autoreclosing relay 220 KV
The auto-reclosing independent relay (numeric) shall be provided on each 220 kV line terminal, and
shall be controlled by high-speed protection relays main 1 and main 2 as specified above.
The auto-reclosing equipment shall be designed to perform with the following options:
• 1 phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose

• 1 + 3-phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose
• 3-phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose
• 3-phase trip with delayed auto-reclose
• 3-phase definite tripping.
With the selection of single-phase auto-reclose feature, a multi-phase fault shall cause definite three-
phase trip and lockout of the circuit breaker.
The three-phase auto-reclose scheme can be selected for high speed and/or delayed reclosing.
Reclose onto a fault shall cause a lockout of the circuit breaker under all auto-reclose options.
The selection of 1 + 3-phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose for multiphase fault, shall result in the
following:
• An unsuccessful single-phase auto-reclose shall be followed by a 3-phase

high-speed auto-reclose
• An unsuccessful three-phase auto-reclose shall be followed by a lockout
• A developing fault, which becomes a multiphase type during the single pole dead time shall cause
three pole tripping and reclosing without waiting for the single pole reclosure sequence to be com-
pleted.
The auto-reclosing equipment shall be provided with a lockable ON/OFF switch mounted on the front
of the relay panel, and also the remote control of this relay shall be made possible from SCMS, RCC
and NCC.
Auto re-closing blocking (other than manual blocking) shall be provided for the following cases:
• Blocking from Busbar/BFR schemes

• Blocking from CB-under pressure / spring charging failed conditions.
Any particular requirements of the circuit breaker mechanisms shall be considered and catered for in
the application of the reclosing equipment.

Lot 2 - Substations
Separate time delays for high-speed 3-phase and single-phase auto-reclosing dead times shall be
provided. The single and 3-phase time delays shall cover between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in steps of
0.05 seconds and less.
There shall be a reclaim (blocking) time following the successful completion reclosure of about ten
seconds. If during this period, a further fault takes place, a 3-phase trip and lockout shall be provided.
The check-synchronizing relay shall be part of the auto-reclose scheme, and shall be fed from the
feeder voltage transformer and the relevant busbar voltage transformer. The selective choice of the
busbar voltage shall be performed via bay control selector switches or voltage selection relays.
The check-synchronization relay shall compare the phase angle between the busbar and line voltag-
es, with the selection of permissible closing angle of approx. 5° to 30° (electrical). It shall also compare
the magnitude of the busbar and line voltages within selectable limits of 95%, 90% or 85%.
The phase angle and voltage amplitude differences shall be within the pre-set limits prior to permitting
auto-re close operation.
9.3 Busbar and circuit breaker failure protection 220 kV
The substation 220 kV have in the actual erection stage a single 220 kV busbar in a posterior stage
will be a double busbar with an interconnected coupler between both busbar
The actual busbar protection and breaker failure will provided only the modules for the single busbar
but provided the place for the modules and adequate elements for the future two main numerical bus-
bar protections
The offered busbar protection shall ensure fully discriminative fault clearance in all possible operation-
al configurations of the double-busbar arrangement without introducing sequential tripping of
buscouplers. The operation shall preferably be based on the percentage differential or directional
comparison principles employing a low impedance busbar protection.
Releasing of a trip command shall be based on at least two different trip criteria. For a faulty busbar,
tripping shall be initiated to all connected circuits, contributing or not to the fault infeed.
Stability for external faults shall be ensured:
• Up to the short-circuit ratings of the switchgear, irrespective of the distribution of current between
individual circuits;
• Under full CT saturation of any of the outgoing circuits.
Sensitivity shall be such that definite operation occurs for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth short
circuits during minimum system condition. The operating time shall not exceed 30 ms including
scheme's own tripping relays. Separate measuring elements are required for each phase.
The protection shall not operate as a result of faults in the associated secondary wiring when any pri-
mary circuit is carrying full load current.
In case of open CT condition under rated primary load, the equipment shall not suffer any damage.

Lot 2 - Substations
The protection scheme shall initiate following inter-trippings:
• Remote-end feeder circuit breaker via direct trip signalling channel;

• Transformer feeder circuit breakers on all voltage levels.
The protection scheme and associated cubicle shall be capable of being extended in a later stage with
at least 50% of the specified number of bays and number of actual busbars.
The breaker-failure scheme shall be started by the trip orders (phase segregated and three-phase) of
all protective relays associated with each breaker and shall initiate, via a settable, breaker-dedicated
time relay:
• Selective tripping of all adjacent breakers (eventually making use of the selection circuits of the
busbar protection);
• Intertrip all circuit breakers in case of transformer feeders.
The operation of the scheme shall be supervised by fast reset three-pole overcurrent relays operating
reliably on all fault types and under saturated CT conditions. The scheme shall operate correctly in
case of evolving faults (single phase to multiple-phase) preferably by provision of the timer resetting.
Combination of NO and NC auxiliary contacts on each disconnecting switch shall be provided for
opening and closing the busbar replica of the protection in such a sequence that the auxiliary contac-
tors operate before reaching the pre-arcing distance or closing the disconnector and after the pre-
arcing distance has been exceeded in opening the disconnector.
9.4 110 kV Line protection
The protection scheme for a line110 kV bay can be summarized as follows (main functions only):
Main 1 Current differential protection

Non switched phase and ground distance protection
3-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
Non-directional earth fault protection
Directional earth fault protection directional comparison for high resistance ground
Main 2
fault
Back-up Non-directional overcurrent
Directional earth fault
Current transformer cores (see also Chapter 4.4)

Core 1 110kV line Main 1 protection (21) (BPU)
Core 2 110kV line Main 2 protection (67N &21) (BPU)and Backup OC/EF (BCPU)
Core 3 Tariff Meter –BCU (Bay Control Unit)

Core 4 Busbar Protection Main1

Lot 2 - Substations
9.4.1 Main Distance Protections 110 kV Main 1 and Main 2
The distance relay shall be suitable for the protection of single and double circuit lines and cables in
solidly or low-impedance grounded systems. It shall be capable of detecting all kinds of power system
faults including close in three-phase faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high resistance
ground faults. Due consideration shall be given to power swings and changes in the direction of ener-
gy flow.
A minimum of two teleprotection schemes shall be provided per circuit on 110 kV single circuits line
one for the distance protection, and another one for the additionally three transfer trip signals shall be
provided for the directional comparison earth fault protection
scheme.
The distance IED should include all relevant additional functions such as:

tion monitoring, etc.;
110 KV LINE MAIN 1 PROTEC-

TION
Directional earth fault protection for high resistance ground fault
Fault locator √
Teleprotection PUT / POTT/Blocking √
Auto reclosure
Synchro check
CT Supervision √
Event recorder √
110 KV LINE MAIN 2 (70) 110 kV

LINE MAIN PROTECTION
Directional earth fault protection for high resistance ground fault √

Lot 2 - Substations
110 KV LINE MAIN 2 (70) 110 kV

LINE MAIN PROTECTION
Fault locator √
Teleprotection schemes for directional comparison blocking √
earth fault protection
Auto reclosure
Synchro check
CT Supervision √
Event recorder √
Measurement and monitoring functions such as: -
110KV LINE MAIN 2

PROTECTION
Operational measured 3-phase currents √
Neutral current (3IO) √
Operational measured 3-phase voltages √
Residual voltage (Uo) √
3-phase active and reactive powers √
Energy metering: - √
Active energy value- forward
Active energy value – reverse Reactive energy value – inductive
Reactive energy value – capacitive
Power factor √
System frequency √
Average as well as minimum and maximum currents and voltag- √
es
Fault/disturbance recorder √
Load blinder √
• The relay Main 1 shall support telecommunication schemes such as PUTT, POTT, Blocking (in-
cluding reverse measurement elements). All the additional logics in case of parallel lines (transient
blocking) or weak in feed have to be included.

Lot 2 - Substations
• A sensitive directional comparison earth fault protection Main 2 using a separate protection signal-
ling circuit and a timer to co-ordinate with Zone 1 of the distance relay (where specified). Hence,
this relay shall trip single phase (single pole breaker) further timer shall trip three-phase in the
event of a persistent fault without receipt of the carrier signal from the remote end.
• The directional comparison earth fault protection will provided blocking scheme (Directional Com-
parison Blocking) with forward elements (overreach) and block directional start elements to com-
plete the logic of the internal faults. In the case of parallel lines all the elements to stabilized the
scheme need to be supplied
• Distance-to-fault locator, which indicates the distance in kilometre (Km), R and X values in ohm on
primary and secondary values, distance in % of the line length and R and X per unit length values.
The fault locator shall have the zero sequence mutual compensation facilities. The locator must
operate correctly for all types of 1-phase-to-earth and 3-phase faults and shall not have an inherent
measuring error in excess of 3%. It should be also indicated if a high-precision fault location has to
be provided and with which degree of independence of fault resistance and load current, taking into
account the data available of both ends of the line.
• The protection functions shall be in the form of software such that the additional or different func-
tions i.e. power swing blocking, sensitive ground fault, overcurrent protection, thermal overload,
frequency protection, signals for single/three pole autoreclosure, application of specific logics, bro-
ken conductor/phase discontinuity detection, etc., can be readily implemented without changes to
the existing hardware. All configuration and setting operation shall be made using a menu-based
operator program running on a PC connected locally to the terminal for the purpose and/or remote-
ly.
9.4.2 Backup Protection
Backup protection consisting of non-directional overcurrent and directional earth fault protection shall
be implemented using separate relays and not embedded in any main protection relays as described
in item 4.9.17.
This protection can be implemented into the Bay controller and should only perform 3 phase trip and
will not activate the autoreclosing of the circuit breaker
9.4.3 Autoreclosing relay 110 kV
The auto-reclosing independent relay (numeric) shall be provided on each 110 kV line terminal, and
shall be controlled by high-speed protection relays main 1 and main 2 as specified above.
• 1 phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose

• 1 + 3-phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose

Lot 2 - Substations
With the selection of single-phase auto-reclose feature, a multi-phase fault shall cause definite three-
phase trip and lockout of the circuit breaker.
The selection of 1 + 3-phase trip and high-speed auto-reclose for multiphase fault, shall result in the
following:
• An unsuccessful single-phase auto-reclose shall be followed by a 3-phase high-speed auto-reclose

• An unsuccessful three-phase auto-reclose shall be followed by a lockout
• A developing fault, which becomes a multiphase type during the single pole dead time shall cause
three pole tripping and reclosing without waiting for the single pole reclosure sequence to be com-
pleted.
and NCC.
• Blocking from Busbar/BFR schemes

Separate time delays for high-speed 3-phase and single-phase auto-reclosing dead times shall be
provided. The single and 3-phase time delays shall cover between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in steps of
0.05 seconds and less.
9.5 Busbar and circuit breaker failure protection 110 kV
Busbar protection for a single busbar will be provided in 110 kV

Lot 2 - Substations
The offered busbar protection shall ensure fully discriminative fault clearance in all possible operation-
al configurations of the single-busbar arrangement without introducing sequential tripping of
buscouplers (if they exist ). The operation shall preferably be based on the percentage differential or
directional comparison principles employing a low impedance busbar protection.
Releasing of a trip command shall be based on at least two different trip criteria. For a faulty busbar,
tripping shall be initiated to all connected circuits, contributing or not to the fault infeed.
Stability for external faults shall be ensured:
• Up to the short-circuit ratings of the switchgear, irrespective of the distribution of current between
individual circuits;
• Under full CT saturation of any of the outgoing circuits.
Sensitivity shall be such that definite operation occurs for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth short
circuits during minimum system condition. The operating time shall not exceed 30 ms including
scheme's own tripping relays. Separate measuring elements are required for each phase.
The protection shall not operate as a result of faults in the associated secondary wiring when any pri-
mary circuit is carrying full load current.
In case of open CT condition under rated primary load, the equipment shall not suffer any damage.
The protection scheme shall initiate following inter-trippings:
• Remote-end feeder circuit breaker via direct trip signalling channel;

• Transformer feeder circuit breakers on all voltage levels.
The protection scheme and associated cubicle shall be capable of being extended in a later stage with
at least 50% of the specified number of bays.
The breaker-failure scheme shall be started by the trip orders (phase segregated and three-phase) of
all protective relays associated with each breaker and shall initiate, via a settable, breaker-dedicated
time relay:
• Selective tripping of all adjacent breakers (eventually making use of the selection circuits of the
busbar protection);
• Intertrip all circuit breakers in case of transformer feeders.
The operation of the scheme shall be supervised by fast reset three-pole overcurrent relays operating
reliably on all fault types and under saturated CT conditions. The scheme shall operate correctly in
case of evolving faults (single phase to multiple-phase) preferably by provision of the timer resetting.
Combination of NO and NC auxiliary contacts on each disconnecting switch shall be provided for
opening and closing the busbar replica of the protection in such a sequence that the auxiliary contac-
tors operate before reaching the pre-arcing distance or closing the disconnector and after the pre-
arcing distance has been exceeded in opening the disconnector.

Lot 2 - Substations
9.6 Transformer Protection 220 kV and 110kV
The power transformers shall be protected by 2 main protection 1 and 2. The transformer protection
relays shall be suitable for the protection of two or three-winding transformers, autotransformers, shunt
reactors, and generator-transformer block units. The numerical transformer protection shall be de-
signed to operate correctly over a wide frequency range and to accommodate for system frequency
variations. Multifunction numerical relay shall include differential function (87) as the main protection
function and phase and neutral overcurrent protections as back up protection functions. Particularly,
the main differential protection of the shunt reactor shall be faster than the distance protection function
of the 220 kV line main protection 1 and 2.
The restricted earth fault protection shall be used to detect earth faults with small magnitude within
transformer/shunt reactor. Following features shall be included:
• Through current restraint (biased) differential protection to operate reliably for internal earth faults
and providing stability for external earth faults even under condition of CT saturation;
• Adjustable sensitivity for earth faults;
• Independent high set non-restraint differential stage shall be included;
• The protection shall perform correctly at all main transformer tap position;
• Direct injection of minimum two external open commands;
• Transfer trip.
9.6.1 Transformer bay protection summary
The protection scheme for a transformer bay can be summarized as follows (main functions only):
Main 1 and 2 Differential protection

Three phase over current protection with inverse and definite time characteristics
Restricted earth fault protection
Earth fault time current protection with inverse and definite time characteristics
Three phase thermal overload protection
Buchholz I and II
Thermometer I and II
Single-phase thermal overload protection (thermal replica)
Current transformer cores - 220 kV (see also Chapter 4.4)

Core 1 220kV Feeder Main Protection
Core 2 Backup OC/EF and BCPU and REF
Core 3 Tariff Meter-BCU (Bay Control Unit)
Core 4 Busbar Protection Main1 and BFR
Core 5 Busbar Protection Main (for Future double Busbar)

Lot 2 - Substations
Current transformer cores -110 kV (see also Chapter 4.4)

Core 1 110kV Feeder Main Protection
Core 2 Backup OC/EF and BCPU and REF
Core 3 Tariff Meter-BCU (Bay Control Unit)
Core 4 Busbar Protection and BFR
9.6.2 Differential Function (Main Protection)
Multifunctional numerical differential protection with extensive self-monitoring and analogue/digital

conversion of all input quantities, suitable for fast and selective protection, control and monitoring of
two and three winding transformers and shunt reactors shall be provided.
The necessary adaptation to the current ratios and to the vector groups shall be realized by software
(with internal settable adaptation for CT ratio matching and vector group), all current inputs (1A and
5A) shall be provided to allow direct connection to the main CT and no request of any additional hard-
ware shall be made i.e. no interposing current transformers for matching transformer group and main
CTs ratio shall be required.
The differential protection shall have fast high set unrestrained differential current protection for high
speed tripping at high internal fault current.
The differential protection functions shall be provided with a 2nd harmonic restraint to avoid tripping at
magnetising inrush and 5th harmonic restraint to avoid tripping at over-excitation. Recovery inrush and
CT saturation shall not influence the differential function (the differential protection shall have stabiliza-
tion function against transformer/reactance inrush and CT saturation for external faults).
The differential protection shall have an adjustable restraint characteristic and be provided with an
adaptive differential feature for multi-circuit breaker arrangements.
The differential protection shall be stable in case of high through-faults also in multi-circuit breaker ar-
rangements. A tap-changer position indication shall be included to provide maximum sensitivity for the
differential protection. A high-set unrestrained differential current protection shall be included.
Different types of protection functions shall be included such as:
• Three phase over current protection with inverse and definite time characteristics. The over current
protection shall act as back up protection for transformer/reactor faults or network faults;
• Restricted earth fault protection for solidly or low impedance earthed system/transformer;
• Earth fault time current protection with inverse and definite time characteristics;
• Three phase thermal overload protection to protect the transformer windings against thermal
stresses;
• Binary optical coupler inputs shall be supplied in sufficient number to accept external gas and
thermal relays contacts.
Differential protection shall have the following measurement and monitoring functions on the front HMI
and connected PC or from another location over a data communication system:
• Display of service values (load current, differential current, etc.);

• Display of event records;

Lot 2 - Substations
• Continues self-monitoring and diagnostics;

• Disturbance recording and data storage for presentation on PC and further evaluation.
The data exchange between the station control system, monitoring system RCC and NCC shall be
ensured via a communication interface. The relay shall be designed with the necessary hardware for
fault recording or coupling to a substation control system.
A high flexibility of input and output signal allocation shall be provided.
9.6.3 Other transformer protections
All other transformer protection functions, such as Buchholz I and II (ANSI designation – 63), contact
thermometer I and II (ANSI designation – 26), etc., shall be connected to a protection terminal and act
via this terminal. To protect the transformer against overloading, a single-phase thermal overload pro-
tection function (ANSI designation – 49), including a thermal replica with adjustable heating and cool-
ing rate shall be provided. This protection function must match the transformer characteristics, with an
inverse time dependent response. The winding temperature must be simulated and follow rapid
changes in load. The replica element shall be designed on a digital basis.
9.7 Protection of 30 kV feeders
9.7.1 General
A modern numeric distance protection relay with the following main features:
i. At least three independent directional zones and one non-directional zone.

ii. Directional characteristic of zones 1,2 and 3 measuring elements for earth faults shall have
quadrilateral characteristic with inherent compensation to minimise overreach when detecting
resistive types of faults.
iii. Characteristic for phase to phase faults may be mho or quadrilateral or another suitably shaped
high performance characteristics.
iv. Capable of operation for close-up three phase faults, and with switch-on-to-fault facility.
v. Adjustable characteristic angle.
vi. Variable residual compensation for all zones.
vii. Time settings for zone 2 & 3 shall be up to at least 1.0s and 3.0s respectively in steps of 10 ms
& 15ms respectively, or less.
viii. Power swing detection for selective blocking or tripping.
ix. Built-in distance to fault locate function. VT supply supervision..
x. Storage facility for fault information for at least six latest system faults, giving on demand relay
operations, operating times, line load data, etc.
xi. Serial connection facility to a PC for further data exploitation with the required software
xii. At least two groups of setting parameters to suit the various networks condition.
xiii. Built-in calendar and clock for time tagging of relay events, fault records, disturbance recordings
etc. The clock shall be capable of receiving an external time reference (GPS) from SCMS or
other station common clock.
xiv. Built-in thermal overload functions taking into account the characteristics and time constant of
the OHL/cable should be provided with alarm and trip stages.
xv. Built-in directional earth fault and sensitive earth fault

Lot 2 - Substations
xvi. Built-in overvoltage and under voltage
9.7.2 Back-up Over-Current and Earth Fault Protection for feeder and trans-
former feeder
A three-phase O/C and one E/F numerical protection to detect inter-phase and phase to ground faults
shall be provided. The tripping characteristics shall be selectable; either a definite time characteristic
or a large number of inverse time characteristics, according to IEC-60255 and BS-142.
Relays shall be supplied with front and rear ports equipped with communication software for lo-
cal/remote access of data and parameter download.
HMI-keypad facilities shall be provided for local access to setting, monitoring and disturbance data
shall also be provided.
The current setting ranges shall be at least for over-current 20% to 200% of IN, in steps of 10% or less
and for earth fault 10% to 80% of IN, in steps of 5% or less. The high-set element shall have a setting
range of 200 percent to 3000 percent of nominal. The tripping time of high-set elements should be
within 20 ms.
Each of the protection elements shall have separate trip and alarm contacts, and a separate trip indi-
cator.
Over-current and earth fault protection relays shall be provided for all 33kV cable feeders, and 33kV
OHL 33kV bus section, 33kV bus couplers. The relays should be designed to cater the feeder re-
quirements, for example second harmonic restraint feature should be available on the transformer
feeders.
9.7.3 Auto-Reclosing Equipment 30 KV for OHL
The auto-reclosing equipment (numeric) shall be provided on each O/H 33kV line terminal, and shall
be controlled by high-speed protection relays as specified above.

and NCC.

Lot 2 - Substations
• Blocking from Busbar

The 3-phase time delays shall cover between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in steps of 0.05 seconds and less.
9.7.4 High Impedance Bus Bar Protection System for 30 kV
In order to limit the effect of MV busbar faults to the major system, the 33kV busbars shall be
equipped with a high impedance phase segregated busbar protection scheme mounted on a separate
panel.
33kV busbars are expected to be of the single busbar type connected by bus sectionalizing circuit
breakers. The scheme will be an overall one without check elements.
The busbar protection scheme shall be fed from one three-phase set of CT's associated with each in-
coming transformer circuit and every outgoing feeder circuit. These CT's shall have identical specifica-
tions for each circuit.
The 33kV busbar protection shall operate on the high impedance circulating current principle. It shall
have a basic setting such that it will not trip when 125 % of full load current (absolute value) is flowing
through the transformer CT's and one of them is open or short-circuited.
Only the faulted bus section shall be tripped and adequate indications shall be given to permit identifi-
cation of faulted zone and phase(s). Resetting of the busbar protection signaling and tripping shall be
possible manually.
An individual trip relay (tripping time less than 20 ms) for each circuit breaker, of which one contact
shall trip the associated breaker, using its tripping DC through a link at the busbar protection connec-
tion terminal block, shall be provided.
CT imbalance element shall provide an alarm.

Lot 2 - Substations
10. SCADA
10.1 General
10.1.1 Works included
The works described in this Specification concern the studies, design, supply, transport, installation,
testing and commissioning of Control, Monitoring Systems of the BURUNDI – RWANDA 220 kV Inter-
connection Project.
The following items are included:
• The unit cabinets containing local control, monitoring and measurement systems for the substation,
as well as the creation of a remote control system from the control room,
• Creation of the local remote control system, including equipment (unit cabinet and mimic diagrams)
and software used for the computer-driven operator control desk,
• The operator interface including a workstation with two screens, a desk and two chairs,
• The interface with the existing Dispatching Centres (National Control Centres of Burundi and
Rwanda).
• The adaptation and configuration of the SCADA platforms of the National Control Centres of Bu-
rundi and Rwanda to integrate the new substations GISAGARA, NGOZI the extension KIGOMA
and GITEGA substations.
10.1.2 Scope of work and supply
The scope of work and supply concerns the following substations:
• KIGOMA (Rwanda): extension of the existing control and monitoring system (RTU ABB.560C)
• GITEGA (Burundi): extension of the existing control and monitoring system (existing RTU: PAS
9035 delivered by Actia Sodielec with telecommunication protocol IEC 60870-5-101)
• GISAGARA (Rwanda): supply, installation, configuration of a SCMS (Substation Control and Moni-
toring System)
• NGOZI (Burundi): supply, installation, configuration of a SCMS (Substation Control and Monitoring
system)
The scope of work and supply includes:
• System design
• Provision of equipment
• Installation
• Wiring
• Configuration
• Tests of the system

Lot 2 - Substations
10.1.2.1 Kigoma substation
KIGOMA is currently supervised and remote controlled from the National Control Centre of Rwanda
via a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).The existing RTU 560C from ABB using IEC 60870-5-104 commu-
nication protocol will be upgraded to for integrating the new 220 kV overhead line.
The communication protocol between the RTU and substation IEDs is IEC 60870-5-103.
The RTU extension and configuration will be performed by the Contractor.
10.1.2.2 Gisagara substation
GISAGARA will be provided with a Substation Control and Monitoring System based on IEC 61850
standard.
SCMS Substation Level

• 2 (two) independent station computers operating on a main and hot standby basis,
• 2 (two) operator workstations including 2 x 22" colour monitors (complete with appropriate desk
and chair). The second operator workstation shall have the capability to be used as engineer work-
station,
• Black and white A 4 laser printer,
• Colour A 3 laser printer,
• Common bay control unit for monitoring auxiliary power supply and all other equipment on a sub-
station level (telemetry, telecommunication, DC/AC, fire protection, etc.),
• Satellite clock, complete with GPS receiver, antenna and time synchronization ports,
• Interface for laptop computer for maintenance, information transfer and emergency HMI,
• Non-fail power supply system,
• Communication network equipment (substation local area network, field communication network,
optical couplers, etc.),
• Gateway with appropriate interfaces for data exchange with the National Control Centre. The gate-
way shall have the capability to support IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 communication
protocols. The communication protocol used for data exchange with the National Control Centre of
Rwanda will be IEC 60870-5-104.
Control panels and Bay Control Units HV level for the following bays
• KIGOMA 220 kV line bay
• NGOZI 220 kV line bay
• 220/30 kV transformer
BCPU for MV level for the following bays

• 1 x incoming 30 kV feeder
• 4 30 kV feeders
• 2 x spare feeders
10.1.2.3 Gitega substation
GITEGA is currently supervised and remote controlled from the National Control Centre of Burundi.
The existing control and monitoring system will be upgraded to for integrating the new 220 kV over-

Lot 2 - Substations
head lines. The Gitega substation is equipped with a RTU type PAS 9035, delivered by Actia Sodielec
with telecommunication protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
The extension and configuration of the existing control and monitoring system will be performed by the
Contractor of the BURUNDI – RWANDA 220 kV Interconnection Project.
10.1.2.4 Ngozi substation
NGOZI will be provided with a Substation Control and Monitoring System based on IEC 61850 stand-
ard.
SCMS Substation Level

• 2 (two) independent station computers operating on a main and hot standby basis,
• 2 (two) operator workstations including 2 x 22" colour monitors (complete with appropriate desk
and chair). The second operator workstation shall have the capability to be used as engineer work-
station,
• Black and white A 4 laser printer,
• Colour A 3 laser printer,
• Common bay control unit for monitoring auxiliary power supply and all other equipment on a sub-
station level (telemetry, telecommunication, DC/AC, fire protection, etc.),
• Satellite clock, complete with GPS receiver, antenna and time synchronization ports,
• Interface for laptop computer for maintenance, information transfer and emergency HMI,
• Non-fail power supply system,
• Communication network equipment (substation local area network, field communication network,
optical couplers, etc.),
• Gateway with appropriate interfaces for data exchange with the National Control Centre. The gate-
way shall have the capability to support IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 communication
protocols. The communication protocol used for data exchange with the National Control Centre of
Rwanda will be IEC 60870-5-104.
Control panels and Bay Control Units HV level for the following bays
• GISAGARA 220 kV line bay
• GITEGA 220 kV line bay
• 220/30 kV transformer
BCPU for MV level for the following bays

• 1 x incoming 30 kV feeder
• 6 30 kV feeders
• 1 auxiliary transformer
• 1 x auxiliary transformers
10.1.2.5 LDC (Load Despatch Centre) RWANDA
10.1.2.5.1 Description of the existing SCADA system
The Rwandan LDC located at Gikondo Substation has been installed by PSI Group/Germany the
software is called PSI Energy Management System (PSI/EMS).

Lot 2 - Substations
The system is installed on a platform of Linux as Operating System (OS) and the Database is using
Oracle.
The communication protocol used for data exchange between Load Dispatch Centre and substations
is IEC 60870-5-104. Regarding the policy, of availability of Data Exchange, all substations are con-
nected in the ring to allow the communication availability even if there a fibre by accident opened be-
tween two substations.
The communication of the SCADA Front End is using the Ethernet cable with RJ45 connector; the use
of the Serial interface RS232 will not be possible. The central system in LDC equipped by two Tele-
gateway machines (TIG1, TIG2) used to receive or send the information under IEC 60870-5-104 for-
mat between Substations and LDC. Once the IEC 60870-5-104 information reach the process LAN,
two (2) Interface machine (IFS1, IFS2) are used to translate the IEC protocol into the language under-
standable by PSI system. Using LAN 1 and LAN 2, the interface machines are interconnected with
two(2) Data Bases and all work places as well as the large rear projector of Width=5600mm
Height=2100mm to allow the operator to interact with the system.
10.1.2.5.2 Scope of work and supply
The SCADA system of the Load Despatch Centre based PSI Energy Management System will be up-
dated.
Adaptation work and configuration of the Load Despatch Centre will mainly consist of:
• Hardware adaptation to connect the data channels of the new 220/30 kV Gisagara Substation,
• Database update of the SCADA platform of PSI Energy Management System.
• Configuration of the SCADA platform of PSI Energy Management System to display the single line
diagrams, statuses, alarms, measurements of the new Gisagara Substation and the extension of
Kigoma Substation.
The adaptation work shall be performed by the Contractor and under his responsibility. However, as
the LDC is a sensitive facility dealing with major operation and safety issues, the Contractor shall
mandatorily act in narrow cooperation with the Transmission System Operator (TSO). It is strongly ad-
vised to perform the whole work in the facility, each step being discussed and realized jointly with the
TSO.
10.1.2.6 LDC (Load Despatch Centre) BURUNDI
10.1.2.6.1 Description of the existing SCADA system
The SCADA equipment in BURUNDI has been installed at the RN1 substation by ACTIA SODIELEC
(FRANCE).
This SCADA platform is a remote grid control system type LTR9020 « MISTRAL ».
The remote control system in the RN1 national dispatching consist in:
• 2 computers PC type as operator base hot redundancy;

Lot 2 - Substations
• 1 front computer PC type (as communication management of PAs, with 16 serial outgoings RS232)
in master/slave operation mode.
• the communication protocol is IEC 60870-5-101 is used for the data transfer between the national
dispatching and the Pas via asynchronous data transmission links V24/V28.
• an Ethernet network, copper wired 10/100 base T doubled.
The SCADA system of the Load Despatch Centre will be updated.

Adaptation work and configuration of the Load Despatch Centre will mainly consist of:
• Hardware adaptation to connect the data channels of the new 220/30 kV Ngozi Substation,
• Database update of the SCADA platform.
• Configuration of the SCADA platform to display the single line diagrams, statuses, alarms, meas-
urements of the new 220/30 kV Ngozi Substation and the extension of Gitega Substation.
The adaptation work shall be performed by the Contractor and under his responsibility. However, as
the LDC is a sensitive facility dealing with major operation and safety issues, the Contractor shall
mandatorily act in narrow cooperation with the Transmission System Operator (TSO). It is strongly ad-
vised to perform the whole work in the facility, each step being discussed and realized jointly with the
TSO.
10.1.2.7 General Organisation of Substation Control & Monitoring System
A typical scheme of a SCMS system is given below

Lot 2 - Substations
General Organisation of Substation Control & Monitoring System
Workstation To LDC via Telecom

2 screens Servers Gateway Network, Redundant
Engineer
21’’ IEC60870-5-104
Workstation
Channels
LAN-A
LAN-B
Printers GPS
Control Room
HV Bays
220 kV OHL Auxiliaries
220 kV Busbar 1 Measure
220/30 kV Transformer Local RTU B
P C
r PP
TS, TC,TM P
P P
o rr PPr P U
o rro PPr P r PP P
Bt o rr PP P B o rr Pr P P
t r
MV kV Bays C Bt oo
Bt
o rr PP
r P
C t B oo B ro r P P
oo o PP
U C C
tt Bt
tt oo rr
o rr P P
C t o B ro r P P
r
Incoming 30 kV feeders U Bttt oo t C t o Bo r P P
Busbar section & measure
U C
U C
U
Bttt
C
oo
tt
r
o
t
U
U
Pt
U
v
U P P t C t Co B ro r r P
t o B o r P
Pt C tt Co B ro rr
t B o
P
P
P
r P
LAN Fibre Optic
LAN
Auxiliarry Transformers U U P t C ot o B ro
Outgoing 30 kV feeders U P P t C tC o
r UPT CAT 5E/6
U Pt t o
U t
U P t
TS, TC,TM U Switch
Local RTU
BCU: Bay Control Unit
LV level TS, TC,TM Prot: Protection Relay
Diesel genearator BCPU: Bay Control Protection Unit
DC system – UPS TS: telesignal (Status, alarm)
Alarms: air conditionned, TC: Telecontrol
fire detection, access TM: Telemeasurement
control etc…

Lot 2 - Substations
10.1.3 System description
The Control and Monitoring system will be based on SCMS technology (Substation Control and Moni-
toring System) fully compliant with IEC 61850 standard for substation internal data exchange. The da-
ta exchange with the Rwandan national dispatching shall be based on protocol IEC 60870-5-104 and
IEC 60870-5-101 for exchanges with the Burundian national dispatching.
10.1.3.1 Control, monitoring and measurement system
The system consists of the following equipment:
• Station computers
• Operator Interface (including computer and printer)
• Clock synchronization equipment
• Interface terminal board with the substation terminal equipment
• BCUs (Bay Control Units): unit computers with local control instrumentation on their front panel
• Unit cabinets, including computer, relays, terminals, control panel etc.
Control, monitoring and measurement equipment must interface with the Interconnection remote con-
trol system, the operation of which will be based on the following principle:
• LDC remote control centre (the LDC will be updated):

– Real-time, manual remote control system for the HV/MV level, from the operator interface of the
dispatching centre,
• At each of 220 kV Substations control room
– Remote control system from the workstation available in the control room for all the motorised
HV/MV equipment
– And local control from the control panel of HV/MV bays: control/monitoring from the BCU mimic
panel and from the control panel.
In addition to its local control function, this system will also be used as a data logger.
It will not be possible to control the switchgear locally when the remote control function of a substation
is selected. Conversely, it will not be possible to control the switchgear remotely when local control is
selected.
All other functions (monitoring: transmission of statuses, telemeasurements, alarms) of the remote
control system will work normally, regardless of the selected mode.
10.1.3.2 Information exchanged with the remote control system
The remote control network will be used to:
• Monitor facilities and the electrical network from the LDC,

• Control the switchgear from the LDC.
Monitoring will be based on remote signalling (RS) and remote measurements (RM). Actions will be
controlled via remote controls (RC) and remote setpoint values (RSV).

Lot 2 - Substations
All the information described hereafter in this chapter will be exchanged via a gateway (supplied in the
context of this contract), which will have two redundant channels for connection to the SDH optical
backbone. The communication protocol will be based on IEC 60870-5-104 type (non-proprietary),
which will guarantee the confidentiality and integrity of data exchanged during the communication with
the LDC.
10.1.3.2.1 Remote control from the LDC
Testing remote control: each Substations provided with remote control facilities will be equipped with a
testing circuit that will include an appropriate relay used to check the remote control circuits between
the LDC Centre and the Substations.
“Synchro” type remote control: this type of remote control is used for circuit-breakers that can be used
to couple two synchronous or slip networks. An automatic synchronisation system is used at the sub-
stations, while magnitude, phase shift and differential voltage measurements are sent to the dispatch-
ing centre.
Direct remote command: this type is used for circuit breakers, allowing only voltage measurements.
Direct or synchronised remote controls are only possible when the “Local/Remote” selector switch is
set to the “Remote” position. In this “Remote” position, local switching control is not possible.
The Substations remote control possibilities from the LDC Centre are as follows:
• Control (RC) of all circuit-breakers and of corresponding motorised disconnectors for each HV/MV
unit.
• Control of the transformers’ on-load tap changer,
10.1.3.2.2 Remote measurement (from substations to LDC)
This data will be sent to the National Dispatching from HV/MV substations. In addition, data of the
HV/MV levels will be available at the control room level (operator workstation) and at the bay level
(BCU and control panel).
• Frequency for HV levels,

• HV and MV Busbar voltage and Lines voltage,
• Current, MW and Mvar of each circuit measured,
• MWh of each circuit measured.
• Position of the OLTCs for the transformers
10.1.3.2.3 Remote signalling
This data will be sent to the dispatching system centre for HV substations. In addition, data on the MV
substations will be forwarded to the existing remote control system, inter alia, for the management of
the distribution network.
• Dual signalling:
– Position of HV/MV circuit-breakers, test-circuit status as well as HV and MV busbar, line and

Lot 2 - Substations
earthing disconnectors.
• Single signalling:
– Fire alarm,
– Live voltage indicator: lines, bars,
– Tripping of protection system,
– Line recloser ordered by line,
– Line recloser impossible by line,
– Unit selected by unit,
– Unit fault by unit,
– Circuit-breaker fault,
– Circuit-breaker to be segregated,
– SF6 alarm
– Line remote protection fault,
– Tripping of internal protection,
– Tripping of external protection,
– Transformer temperature winding alarm
– Transformer temperature oil alarm
– Transformer Buchholz alarm
– OLTC alarm,
– OLTC position
– Maximum OLTC position: transformer,
– Minimum OLTC position: transformer,
– Unit under transfer,
– Ready for automatic synchronisation,
– Ready for transmission of voltage value,
– Ready for direct closing,
– Automatic synchronisation not possible,
– Synchronisation in progress,
– Synchrocoupler blocked,
– Synchrocoupler fault,
– One or several units controlled locally,
– VT bar fault,
– Urgent fault,
– Substation fault,
– 48 V charger fault,
– 110 V charger fault,
– Remote transmission fault,
– Fibre link fault
– Local/Remote operation
– And any signalling that may be deemed necessary.
10.1.3.2.4 Capacity reserve
Provision will be made for a capacity reserve of at least 50% for the transfer of supplementary data, in
addition to the capacity reserve needed for specified future circuits. This capacity will not have an im-
pact on system performance levels and concerns all the equipment, computerised substations and
substation terminal equipment.

Lot 2 - Substations
10.1.3.3 Data to exchange with the remote access system
The objective of the remote access functions is to optimise on-site operations or even render them
unnecessary by modifying data from a remote location.
Remote access is used for:
• Maintenance / Administration,
• Configuration of system data,
• Analysis of electro-technical incidents (disturbography, fault locator, consultation of status report
signals, consultation of protection and automation settings).
All the information described in the following paragraphs of this chapter will be exchanged via a re-
mote access gateway (supplied in the context of this contract), which will use a single-mode fibre-
optics channel to be connected via SDH telecommunication channels.
The communication protocol will be a standard IP type (non-proprietary), which will guarantee the con-
fidentiality and integrity of data exchanged during the communication with the dispatching centre.
10.1.3.3.1 Analysis of electro-technical incidents
In order to analyse electro-technical incidents appropriately, it is necessary to correlate data related to

disturbography, fault locator, consultation of status report signals, consultation of protection and auto-
mation settings.
Remote access is used to consult and download:
• Event recording files (disturbance recorder files are converted and stored in COMTRADE format),
• Fault locator information,
• Status report signal lists,
• Operational settings (i.e.: configuration data) concerning protection and automation systems.
10.1.3.3.2 Configuration
Modification, validation, loading and use of process configuration and system data are not necessary
for remote access because their impact goes beyond the scope of configuration. This type of modifica-
tion has an impact on the equipment, software, networks or interfaces and must therefore be per-
formed on site.
Remote access is used to carry out the following configuration actions:
• Consultation of control configuration (local control, remote control),

• Consultation of process configuration data (connection of HV equipment and other units),
• Consultation of system data (equipment, software, networks, interfaces, integration of equipment),
• Setting of parameters (in particular protection and automation systems).

Lot 2 - Substations
10.1.3.3.3 Maintenance and administration
Remote access is used for the following maintenance actions:
• Monitoring of system alarms with an audible signal,

• Consultation of the system image (status of equipment, networks and interfaces),
• Consultation and downloading of the log book,
• Consultation of the list of maintenance signals,
• Consultation of system data (equipment, software, networks, interfaces, integration of equipment),
• Consultation of equipment/software/data versions (instantaneous and historical status over a 2-
year period),
• System diagnosis (same tools as for local access),
• Setting of system data parameters (online modification of configuration data with user-definable pa-
rameters),
• Back-ups,
• Downloading of archives,
• Management of access control (creation/modification/deleting of user profiles and accounts).
10.1.4 Quality assurance
All the equipment mentioned in the context of the works will be of proven quality and will be completely
compatible with the existing systems.
The systems will be tested once they have been installed and their operation will need to comply with
the specifications.
10.1.5 Submittals
The Contractor must provide the following documents for all substations so that they can be checked
and approved, but not limited to:
• Network architecture diagrams

• Hardware and software interface diagrams
• Wiring diagrams
• Schedule of wires
• Operations flow sheet
• Loop diagrams
• Process and instrumentation diagrams
• Data addressing tables according to the protocols used
• Operation manuals
• Configuration manuals
• Maintenance manuals

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2 Products, components and sub-assemblies
10.2.1 Manufacture
The control-monitoring system consists of a set of standard units linked to each other by a communi-
cation network operated with the IEC 61850 standardised protocol. Each unit is considered integrated,
either in a cabinet or in a panel, and has its own LCD screen: the screen is used locally to handle the
unit’s protection, control-monitoring and surveillance features, even if the rest of the system is not op-
erating.
An equipment or unit fault will not have an impact on the operation of the rest of the system from a
control viewpoint, both locally and remotely from the dispatching centre.
10.2.1.1 General description
10.2.1.1.1 Architecture
The system will consist of:
• A set of standard units (in cabinets or panels) interconnected to each other by a communication
network operated with the IEC 61850 standard protocol. A standard unit comprises all the equip-
ment needed for its protection, automation and local monitoring systems. A unit may be used as a
grid entrance point, a grid exit point, a reactance, a transformer, a coupler or a general unit. Each
unit has a local/remote switching system to manage its local monitoring.
• A remote control gateway (RCG) designed to act as a control interface between the substation and
the electrical network management centre (dispatching centre)
• A remote access gateway (RAG) designed to act as a maintenance and electro-technical incident
analysis interface between the substation and the electrical network management centre (dispatch-
ing centre)
• A man-machine interface (MMI), designed for local control, supervision and monitoring of the sub-
station, status reports, as well as archiving, printing, designing and maintaining the system and
post mortem analysis of system and substation data. It is active when the control mode is set to
Local. The functions of this operator interface are mirrored locally.
• A telecommunication access platform and all necessary handsets.
Communication between the units, the MMI, the RCG and the RAG must comply with the following
protocol: 100 Mbps, TCP/IP IEC 61850 Ethernet connection.
Inside a unit, the TCP/IP IEC 61850 Ethernet connection must be used. A dedicated protocol may be
used for the numerical busbar protection system.
10.2.1.1.2 Availability
A basic failure of any element of the system must not have an impact on the functionalities of all the
other elements of the system. Apart from transformer and general service units, a unit cannot manage
more than one circuit-breaker.

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.1.3 Key performance levels
The logging process must have a maximum 1 ms resolution and discrimination time.
The feedback on the local MMI, the remote control gateway (RCG) or the remote access gateway
(RAG) must be sent in less than 2 seconds for the HV elements. It has been agreed that disturbance
recorder file transfer may take up to 10 seconds.
A deliberate control from the MMI or from the RCG must be executed in less than 2 seconds for the
HV elements.
The point-to-point exchanges of the IEC 61850 protocol must be executed in less than 20 ms for "pri-
ority" frames (exchanges via GOOSE), for any system structure and element.
Measurement precision must be at least 0.2% for currents and voltages for metering, taking harmonics
into account (up to the 15th harmonic number), 0,5% for control/monitoring, and at least 0.5% for ac-
tive and reactive powers.
Ethernet network redundancy transfer will take less than 1 ms (time to switch from one network to the
other).
The status change storage capacity in the event of a loss in auxiliary power supply for a week will be
higher than 1000 events for each unit.
10.2.1.1.4 Interfaces
Interfaces with the electrical process
The system will interface directly with primary substation equipment with (or without) decoupling relays
and transducers (4-20 mA type).
The outgoing relays for the secondary equipment will guarantee a minimum current of 5 mA for 48 V
DC and 3 mA for 125 V DC.
The interfaces with metering and measurement equipment (automatic transformer and reactance tap-
changers, etc.) will be BCD or Gray code type interfaces.
The energy and power metering interfaces will be based on pulses accumulated in the system or pro-
duced directly by transducers (4-20 mA type).
The circuit-breaker control interface will consist of dual relays that will have the following characteris-
tics:
• A continuous 5 A starting and holding current, and a Short-duration current of 30 A for 500 ms and
250 A for 30 ms
• A breaking capacity of:
– DC: 50 W resistive, 25 W inductive (L/R=40 ms)
– AC: 1250 VA (Power Factor = 0.7)

Lot 2 - Substations
Communication interfaces
In the context of this contract, the Contractor will supply the fibre-optic distribution panel (switching)
that will be used to connect all the optical ground wires as well as all the cross-connecting fibre-optic
wires required to connect the equipment (protection, remote action, remote control gateway, remote
access gateway, telecommunication access platform).
Communication with the remote control centre shall be provided via a redundant connection complying
with IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
Internal communication (between units) in the system shall be provided via the following standard:
• Kigoma: IEC 60870-5-103

• others: IEC 61850 protocol.
The system will be synchronised by a GPS receiver
Operator interfaces
The operator interfaces are located:
• In each unit (bay level), through a removable LCD screen that has a sufficient resolution to display
the unit single-line diagrams together with associated measurements and alarm signals, manage-
ment of control and monitoring, and display of status logs. A DC powered audible alarm will be in-
stalled in the control room. It will stop as soon as the fault has been acknowledged. An external
audible signal will sound at the same time as this alarm. It should be possible to connect a laptop to
the TCP/IP IEC 61850 (Kigoma: IEC 60870-5-104) Ethernet network and obtain an overview of the
system during commissioning and maintenance phases.
• In the substation: a desktop computer with two 21" screens, with a Windows-type OS to display,
monitor and control any authorised element in the system.
All the display, monitoring and control functions will be managed securely with a user login and pass-
word that will determine each user’s access and action rights.
10.2.1.1.5 Communication protocols inside the substations
IEC 61850
The IEC 61850 protocol has established itself as the leading protocol in data exchange between the
various units and the substation, the local substation MMI, the remote control gateway (RCG) and the
remote access gateway (RAG).
The IEC 61850 protocol shall be used for synchronising equipment, for monitoring, for reports, for
point-to-point exchanges and for transferring disturbance recorder, wave shape and qualimetry files.
IED (Intelligent Electronic Devices) parameter-setting files may be transferred in transparent mode via
Ethernet. Private monitoring, measurement and control data exchange protocols are not authorised.
The Contractor must provide a precise and detailed description of the profiles he proposes to use.

Lot 2 - Substations
IEC 61850 is based on a 100 Mbps TCP/IP Ethernet network. The units will communicate with each
other via single or multimode fibre-optic connections depending on the length of the network. The
physical architecture is a redundant ring network to guarantee information transmission continuity in
the event of equipment failure or fibre-optic damage. The maximum switching/reconfiguration time
must be less than 1 ms. Each HV unit must have its own Ethernet switch to ensure functional availabil-
ity. Each switch must be equipped with a spare port (Tx) for connection of a laptop.
10.2.1.1.6 Future system extensions
The system must be designed to accommodate a 30% increase in the number of units and a 20% in-
crease in inputs/outputs of each unit.
System devices must be capable of managing at least two configuration databases to allow simple
and efficient modifications. Only one database will be active per device, the other being a backup. The
consistency between the databases of the devices is guaranteed by the system. Database changes
can by performed either via the MMI or an engineering platform (laptop dedicated to system mainte-
nance).
The system must be designed to accommodate future integration of equipment with the IEC 61850.
In compliance with the IEC 61850 protocol, the system shall be configured to be XML format compati-
ble.
10.2.1.2 Main functions
These functions shall be executed by the MMI, the RCG, the RAG or the general unit.
10.2.1.2.1 Management of substation control modes
Substations are controlled either locally or remotely. A manual switching system is used to change
from one mode to the other.
The local control mode inhibits any remote control instructions received via the RCG. Measurement
and status change information is still transmitted. The remote control mode inhibits local control in-
structions and only authorises those received via the RCG. Logging and local archiving functions are
still executed in this mode.
To improve the availability of the Substations, it will be possible, during the maintenance phases of a
unit, to keep the remote mode active and switch one or several units to local mode (maintenance) in
order to inspect the unit(s) concerned locally. This switching process must be possible either directly
on the unit or on the substation MMI. If a unit is under maintenance, the information concerning the
unit will be neither transmitted to the remote control nor archived.
10.2.1.2.2 Substation operator interface
The Man Machine Interface of the Substations (also called Operator Interface) will be installed on a
PC which should have compatible Windows operating system.

Lot 2 - Substations
The following list describes the main functions required for the Operator Control Desk.
Supervision:
• Presentation of the single-line layout: overview of the substation, view of each voltage level, de-
tailed view of each unit. This includes the dynamic position of circuit-breakers, measurement val-
ues, meters, graphic display of alarms, etc. Any spontaneous change, such as the tripping of a cir-
cuit-breaker, will be displayed with a specific colour and status.
• Presentation of the system architecture: system overview, detailed view of each unit (computer,
IEDs, RCG, RAG, etc.). This includes the dynamic status of devices (active, fault, disconnected,
maintenance, test). Any spontaneous change will be displayed with a specific colour and status.
• Presentation of the list of alarms, with acknowledgement and clearance buttons
• Presentation of the log book (real-time list of all system and process data).
• Presentation of the list of events (status logging).
• Presentation of measurement curves in real time or extracted from the archives. Invalid data must
be highlighted.
• Presentation of disturbance recorder and qualimetry files.
• Printing of all or part of archived status changes, alarms or statuses of different logical in-
puts/outputs. It must be possible to generate a report directly with the MMI (possible solution using
Crystal Report).
Control:
• Control of primary equipment, thanks to dedicated pop-up windows which, depending on the device
configuration, can be used to control the equipment either directly or through a "Select Before Op-
eration" (SBO) procedure, forcing of interlocking or validation of Synchrocheck.
• Possible forcing, substitution or deletion of information to rectify incorrect or unavailable data.
Archiving:
• Storage of status changes, measurements, disturbance recorder and qualimetry files, and all oper-
ator actions.
• Storage of all system databases and all IED technical documents. The storage capacity shall be at
least 5 years.
Maintenance:
• Monitoring of audible system alarms.
• Display of information from each system device, presented clearly and in detail.
• System diagnosis tool (equipment, software, networks, interfaces, equipment integration).
• Consultation of equipment/software/data versions (real-time status and historical data over two
years).
• Management of access control (creation/modification/deletion of user profiles and accounts).
Configuration:
• Modification and upgrading of system configuration databases.
• Setting of protection and automation system parameters (functions integrated in the system and in
the IEDs).
• Setting of parameters and loading of control configuration data (local control, remote control).
• Setting of parameters and loading of process configuration data (connection of HV equipment and
other units),
• Setting and loading of system data parameters (equipment, software, networks, interfaces, equip-
ment integration),

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.2.3 Remote control gateway
The remote control gateway will be connected to the remote LDC via redundant communication chan-
nels using IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
The gateway must be capable of sending the following information to the remote control centre de-
pending on the protocol selected:
• Dated status of single inputs.

• Dated status of dual inputs.
• Dated position status of the transformer on-load tap changer and reactance.
• Dated measurements.
• Dated meter integrated values.
The gateway must be capable of receiving the following information from the remote control centre
depending on the protocol selected:
• Simple controls sent directly or in SBO mode

• Dual controls sent directly or in SBO mode
• Data group query controls
• Synchronisation signals
• Meter freeze controls
10.2.1.2.4 Remote access gateway
The remote access gateway will be connected to the remote LDC via Ethernet interface.
The gateway must be capable of sending the following information to the remote control centre de-
• The disturbance recorder files (disturbance recorder files are converted and stored in COMTRADE
format),
• Fault locator information,
• Status recording signal lists,
• Settings (i.e.: configuration data) in operation mode concerning protection and automation systems,
• Control and Process configuration data,
• All data provided (system and process),
• Setting of parameters (protection and automation systems),
• System alarms,
• Archiving files,
• Data connected to access control management.
The gateway will be capable of receiving the following information from the remote control centre de-
• Setting of protection and automation system parameters (online modification of parameters),

• Setting of system data parameters (online modification of configuration data for which parameters
can be set),
• Access control management data (creation/modification/deletion of user profiles and accounts)

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.2.5 Recording of status
The recording of status changes may be archived directly on a PC and printed as they occur. The fol-
lowing information must be available:
• Synchronisation dating and status (synchronised or not)

• Origin – name of substation, voltage level, name of unit, name of equipment
• Name of object – name of information (name of logical input)
• Status message – explicit status of the logical input (open/closed, start/end, etc.)
10.2.1.2.6 Automation systems
Interlock
Substations interlocking must be managed in priority on a topological basis. Topological interlocking

must analyse the position of each substation circuit-breaker and authorise or cancel controls accord-
ing to predefined rules, for example according to mechanical and electrical characteristics of the de-
vices. The function may be centralised or broken down between units.
The topological interlocking function applies to the following equipment:
• Circuit-breaker
• Disconnector
• Earthing switch
The topological interlocking function may be associated with Boolean-type equations to meet mainte-
nance needs.
Opening and closing management processes via the interlock are independent.
Interlocking may be forced by the operator if he has the required rights.
Voltage regulation
The voltage regulation function is used to keep the voltage in a transformer secondary winding within
the limits set by the operator. The secondary voltage is controlled by a tap changer.
Voltage regulation must be capable of managing one transformer or several in parallel. In this case,
the secondary windings of the transformers are interconnected.
Voltage regulation must also ensure:
• Active and reactive compensation in order to maintain voltage levels in a given location of the net-
work
• Homing (return to a neutral position) to take into account the primary voltage on the busbar, to
which the transformer is connected
• Minimisation of circulating current

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.3 Functions shared by all units
10.2.1.3.1 Substation management
Logical inputs
The system can manage four different types of logical inputs:
• Simple Point (SP), corresponding to a logical input that has been acquired physically
• Double Point (DP), corresponding to two associated logical inputs acquired physically
• System Information (SI), information related to the system or the system process
• Logical combination of logical inputs
Measurements
The following measures will be available via direct acquisition on the CTs and VTs:
• RMS value of currents and voltages

• Frequencies
• Active powers
• Reactive powers
• Apparent powers
• Power factor
• Sequence components (direct, inverse, zero-sequence for Ι and U)
• Phase shift
• Mean value: mean value of currents, voltages, active & reactive powers and apparent powers over
a rolling period of time
• Fixed value: mean value reached over a rolling period of time
• Max. value: maximum value of currents, voltages, active & reactive powers and apparent powers
reached over a rolling period of time
• Active and reactive energies
During the configuration phase, it will be possible, for each measurement, to set up to six threshold
values that may be associated with an SI and/or alarm in the event of a positive or negative crossing
of a threshold.
The measurements may be deleted manually or their value may be exchanged by the operator de-
pending on his rights. Furthermore, if a measurement becomes invalid, the operator may force its val-
ue, if he has the appropriate rights. During the normal changeover to a valid status, the forcing pro-
cess is cancelled.
Control orders
Control orders can be received via the remote control gateway, via the local MMI of the substation or
bay unit, or via any another maintenance device connected to the Ethernet network.
Each circuit-breaker will have a dual control consisting of double dry contacts, completed by a contact
dedicated to SBO mode management.
Dry alarm contacts will be positive security type contacts.

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.3.2 Automation systems
Fault locator
The fault locator function will be integrated in the system and the results will be displayed on the local
MMI and sent remotely (remote access).
Trip fault
The system will be capable of ordering a three-phase trip in the event of a fault in the tripping circuit
(for example, execution time exceeded).
Interlock
Local controls will be checked by an interlock automation system if the unit is connected electrically to
the rest of the system. If communication with the other units via the IEC 61850 Ethernet network is not
available or if certain information is missing, a local interlock function will be used, which will only take
the unit information into account. An operator who has the appropriate rights may force the interlock.
Synchrocheck
The Synchrocheck may be used either for automatic controls or for local controls.
• Re-energising of a power line or busbar.

• Connection of two networks.
• Coupling of two networks.
Voltage, phase and frequency thresholds can be adjusted. Operating times of the circuit-breaker and
frequency slip can be adjusted.
Reclosing device
The reclosing device will be active or inactive. As a minimum, it will operate with one fast, single-phase
or three-phase cycle and three slow, three-phase cycles, with optional allowance for the Syn-
chrocheck.
10.2.1.3.3 Operator interface
As a minimum, the operator interface will consist of LCD screen. It will display the following infor-
mation:
• Name of the unit

• Date and time
• Unit control mode: Local or Remote
• Status of the reclosing function (ON/OFF)
• Status of the Synchrocheck function (ON/OFF)
• Status of the interlock function (ON/OFF)
• List of real-time measurements (value and percentage)
• Single-wire animated representation of the unit
• Unit status changes in chronological order

Lot 2 - Substations
• Unit alarms
• List of disturbance recorder files available for the unit
In addition, it will be possible to connect a laptop to the unit and obtain a representation of the overall
local MMI for the substation.
10.2.1.4 Specific unit functions
The substation control and monitoring system will communicate with the protection system using
IEC 61850 protocol.
10.2.1.4.1 HV Overhead line
The specific functions of an HV line are as follows:
• A main protection 1,
• A main protection 2,
• One supplementary wattmeter-type zero phase-sequence directional protection device,
• One maximum directional current back-up protection device,
• Two separate teleaction devices,
• A synchronism controller,
• A remote protection module for numerical busbars,
• A bidirectional meter for active and reactive energy,
NB 1: All the protection devices shall be equipped with a disturbance recorder.
10.2.1.4.2 Transformer / Shunt reactor
The specific functions of the reactance/transformer unit are:
• Differential protection of the reactance / transformer,

• Back-up protection device with a maximum amount of current,
NB 1 All the protection devices shall be equipped with a disturbance recorder.

NB 2: For each reactor, a circuit-breaker opening synchronisation relay using current shall be planned.
10.2.1.4.3 Busbar coupling
The specific functions of the HV busbar coupling unit are:
• Remote protection with fault locator,

• Supplementary wattmeter-type zero sequence directional protection device,
• Maximum current back-up protection device,
• Synchronism controller,
• Remote protection module for numerical busbars.
NB 1: All the protection devices shall be equipped with a disturbance recorder.

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.4.4 Busbars
The main role of the HV busbar unit is to act as a central busbar protection module
10.2.1.4.5 MV line
The specific functions of the MV line are:
• One maximum directional current protection device,

• One frequency protection.
10.2.1.4.6 MV cable
The specific functions of the MV cable are:
• Differential earth fault protection of line or cable,

• One maximum directional current protection device.
10.2.1.5 Engineering tools
10.2.1.5.1 Configuration
The system must include a configuration tool to create the databases that will be loaded into the vari-
ous system devices (MMI, RCG, RAG, units).
The configuration tool will be the same for all the system functions and devices. For example, with this
tool, it will be possible to:
• Create the single-wire representation of the different devices,

• Describe the electrical components such as alarm tags,
• Configure system components, allocate various inputs/outputs to a device,
• Build and validate the automation components, for example, status management and circuit-
breaker control,
• Address the system components according to the IEC 61850 protocol.
The configuration tool shall be object-oriented and will be used to instantiate these objects (based on
models) to create the configuration components of the system application. A database of the models
will be supplied with the configuration software. For each unit model, this database will include all the
information concerning the unit (graphic, electrical, system, automation and communication).
The system configuration tool will be used for the management and numbering of the database ver-
sions and to materialise the differences between two database versions. It will use the XML format (as
defined in the IEC 61850 protocol) to export and import data. A selection and partial extraction tool will
also be available.

Lot 2 - Substations
10.2.1.5.2 Simulation
A PC simulation tool will also be possible: it will be used to simulate one or several devices based on
the messages exchanged on the IEC 61850. The PC on which the simulation software will be installed
will be connected directly to the system Ethernet network.
It will be possible to inject pre-defined scenarios or manual controls into the simulator and visualise the
exchanges on the IEC 61850 Ethernet network.
The configuration of the simulation tool will be extracted directly or based on the system data base.
Functions shared with the SCADA system
Interface with the SCADA system

This Specification describes data exchanges between the “Communication SCADA” function and the
master SCADA. It is divided into two sub-sections:
• Inputs: data received from the SCADA system.

• Outputs: data sent via the “Communication SCADA” function to the SCADA system.
For each protocol type, a message indicates if the data have been processed or not.
Clock synchronisation
All the system functions must use common data, and in particular the following functions:
• Control functions in a broad sense (comprising local and remote control functions) where signals,
alarms, measurements and controls are dated,
• Incident analysis: disturbance and fault recorder,
• Maintenance and administration,
The system date will be synchronised with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) using GPS signals,
with an absolute precision better than 1 ms.
In the event of loss of external synchronisation (GPS signal), the chronology of the data will always be
maintained, whether for status recording or for historical listing of any kind. The system will keep sup-
plying the time with the required precision for at least 8 hours. Beyond that time, a 10 ms drift per day
will be tolerated.
If the internal time synchronisation device is lost, local and remote control data will be declared as not
synchronised with the system.
If the internal clock has to be reset with respect to the GPS synchronisation interface, the system will
ensure dating consistency of the information arriving just before and after the reset process. In particu-
lar, it will guarantee that the dated information is recorded in the right sequence, even if this means
there is a temporary synchronism fault, and will minimise the value of corrections made to the dating of
successive signals.
The information will be displayed in local time.

Lot 2 - Substations
Local / Remote modes

A substation or a unit can be in Local or Remote mode. If it is in Local mode, it cannot be remote con-
trolled and conversely.
Each mode can be associated with a binary input.
10.2.1.6 Transducers
Transducers will have a 0.5 precision class and will comply with IEC 60688-1 standard.
The transducers must be capable of working with user-definable current or voltage output ranges,
from -20 to + 20 mA and -10 to + 10 V. Thus, it will be possible to adjust the standard 4-20 mA or - 10
to +10 V (or other) ranges on site.
The transducers will be adjusted with specific software that can be used on a PC laptop. The French
or English language will be used for the Substations software. The laptop/transducer interface will be a
RS232/RS485-type interface (9/25 pins).
A laptop configured with the aforementioned software will be supplied at the end of the works. This
computer will also have the appropriate software installed on it to be able to set the parameters of the
protection relays.
10.2.2 Special tools - Spare parts
10.2.2.1 Special tools
A complete set of tools, spare connection parts shall be foreseen.
Two laptops (15" or comparable) with according licences shall be delivered.
10.2.2.2 Spare parts
• One set of each type of electronic boards,

• One set of transducers for each range,
• Various consumables in sufficient quantity for 5 years’ operation.
10.3 Execution
10.3.1 Factory acceptance tests
The objective of the acceptance tests at the Contractor’s factory will be to check that the system meets
the site characteristics. They will mainly consist in checking that:
• everything has been supplied (completeness and compliance of equipment components and soft-
ware),
• all system functions are compliant.

Lot 2 - Substations
The functional tests must be carried out in a context as close as possible to the context in which the
system will be operated in the future. These conditions concern the testing methods, the testing
equipment, and of course the consistency of the tested architecture. The testing platform, the cost of
which will be borne by the Contractor, must be designed to accommodate all the system functionalities
(including exchanges with the remote control system).
The Consultant reserves the right to add any test that is consistent with system specifications and with
the type of unit that is being delivered, if he feels it is necessary. Once the system has successfully
passed all the factory tests, it may be sent to the site.
10.3.2 Site acceptance tests
Site acceptance tests will be carried out to check that the system is operating properly in each substa-
tion once it has been installed. These tests must demonstrate that the overall design of the system re-
spects functional and performance requirements on site by using the current communication system
as well as equipment supplied by others, to which this system will be connected.
Trial period: Once the system has successfully passed the site acceptance tests, it will be subject to a
30-day trial period during which it must meet contractual conditions and confirm its reliability, stability
and robustness.
Provisional acceptance of the system: the system will be accepted once all the equipment has suc-
cessfully passed the trial period.

Lot 2 - Substations
11. Telecommunications
11.1 General
11.1.1 Work included
11.1.1.1 Scope of supply
The work concerned by this specification includes the design, supply, transport, installation and testing
of all equipment needed for the communication system of the 220 kV BURUNDI – RWANDA intercon-
nection Project, even though not expressed hereafter.
This work is not limited to the substations concerned with the interconnection. The adaptation and the
configuration of the communication systems of the national control systems of Burundi and Rwanda
and the stations through which the data are forwarded are part of the supply as well.
The work shall enable the new substations to be remote-controlled from the related LDC of Burundi
and Rwanda.
The following are included in the Project but not limited to:
• The interface terminals for connecting the data protection and SCADA transmission equipment.
• Telecommunication distribution frames for connecting the data and telephone channels.
• Terminal junction boxes
• Optical digital frames.
• Cables between the terminal junction boxes installed on the substation incoming frames and the
optical equipment in the substations
• The AC and DC supply circuit-breakers for the communication equipment.
• Optical telecommunication equipment will be based on SDH technology STM-16 (2.5 Gbits/s).
• PDH multiplexers providing data, telephone and teleprotection channels. The Rwandan PDH
equipment shall be equipped with Ethernet interfaces in order to support IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
• PABX
• Teleprotection equipment
• All necessary wiring and accessories
11.1.1.3 General architecture of the communication system
The telecommunication architecture is shown in the drawing below:

Lot 2 - Substations
BURUNDI – RWANDA 220 kV Interconnection

General Architecture of Communication System
OPGW OPGW OPGW

KIGOMA BUTARE NGOZI GITEGA
44.6 km 33.4 km 62.7 km
1+1 protection 1+1 protection 1+1 protection
RTU SCADA SCADA RTU

Existing Gateway Gateway Existing
PABX PABX PABX PABX
SDH STM-1 Multiplexer
Line differential protection
Distance protection relay
Fibre optic

Lot 2 - Substations
11.1.1.4 Scope of work and supply
The scope of work and supply concerns the following substations:
• KIGOMA (Rwanda): extension of the existing telecommunication system.

• GISAGARA (Rwanda): supply, installation, configuration of telecommunication equipment
• NGOZI (Burundi): supply, installation, configuration of telecommunication equipment
• GITEGA (Burundi): extension of the existing telecommunication system.
• System design
• Provision of telecommunication equipment and all necessary cubicles. The SDH equipment shall
be conform the recommendation IUT-T-G.707 while the PDH shall be conform the recommendation
IUT-T-G.703.
• Installation
• Wiring
• Configuration
• Tests of the system
11.1.1.5 Kigoma substation
11.1.1.5.1 Description of existing telecommunication facilities:
KIGOMA is currently provided with communication facilities to provide SCADA, telephone via optical
SDH equipment. The existing IP-PABX enables voice communication with the LDC of Rwanda and
Kigoma.
SDH equipment:
The communication equipment at Kigoma substation is from ECI manufacturer BG20 type from Israel.
The technical characteristics of SDH equipment is following.
• Technology : SDH
• Manufacture : ECI (Israel)
• Type : BG-20B
• Capacity : STM1 up to STM4
• Total optical ports: 2STM4+4STM1
• Available optical ports:1STM1
PABX:
The trunk interface type is IP&SIP and the system is digital which does not support 4W-E&M.
In Rwanda there is no any specific numbering plan; the equipment is indicated using the substation
name where it is located.
The detailed description of the existing PABX at Kigoma is given below:
• Manufacturer: Alcatel
• Type: IP Media Gateway (remote shelf of NECC)
• Trunk interface: IP-PBX.

Lot 2 - Substations
The following telecommunication equipment will be provided:
• Delivering and configuration of one SDH STM-16 multiplexer

– Two optical ports STM-16 (1+1 protection) to connect Gisagara Substation via redundant fibre
optic cores of OPGW (44.6 km)
– Additional Ethernet ports
• PDH equipment with Ethernet interfaces and teleprotection
• Delivery of one optical distribution frame
• Extension of MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
• Extension and configuration of the existing PABX
11.1.1.6 Gisagara substation
GISAGARA will be provided with following telecommunication equipment:
• SDH STM-16 multiplexer

– Two optical ports (1+1 protection) to connect Kigoma Substation via redundant fibre optic cores
of OPGW (length 44.6 km).
– Two optical ports STM-16 (1+1 protection) to connect Ngozi Substation via redundant fibre optic
cores of OPGW (length 33.4 km).
– Redundant power supply, duplicated CPU, all necessary tributary interfaces
• One ODF (Optical Distribution Frame)
• IP PABX with GSM interface, connection to the PSTN, IP trunk connections, 6 telephone sets.
• One MDF (Main Distribution Frame)
11.1.1.7 Ngozi substation
NGOZI will be provided with following telecommunication equipment:
• SDH STM-16 multiplexer

– Two optical ports (1+1 protection) to connect Gisagara Substation via redundant fibre optic
cores of OPGW (length 33.4 km).
– Two optical ports STM-16 (1+1 protection) to connect Gitega Substation via redundant fibre op-
tic cores of OPGW (length 62.7 km).
– Redundant power supply, duplicated CPU, all necessary tributary interfaces
• One ODF (Optical Distribution Frame)
• IP PABX with GSM interface, connection to the PSTN, IP trunk connections, 6 telephone sets..
• One MDF (Main Distribution Frame)

Lot 2 - Substations
11.1.1.8 Gitega substation
11.1.1.8.1 Description of existing telecommunication facilities:
The communication between the Gitega substation and the National Dispatching RN1 (LDC BU-
RUNDI) is realized by the mean of PLC, which is of course not compatible to the KIGOMA-GITEGA
optical wire system.
However, a fibre does exist between GITEGA and the WPP RUVYIRONZA, explaining the existing
PABX in Gitega
The teleprotection uses DIP-5000 for optical fibre (existing substations Kayanza and Ngozi-centre) as
well as TPI for the PLC.
At RN1 substation (National Dispatching), the technical SDH equipment characteristics are:
• Technology: SDH
• Make: Alstom France
• Type: Edxc 5000 (e-terragridcom e-DXC).
• Capacity: STM1 / STM4
• Available optical ports: 1STM1
The description of the existing PABX at RN1 and Gitega can be summarized as follows:
• PABX OMNIPCX Alcatel France

• Make: Alcatel France
• Type: Media Gateway France
• Interface trunk:
The following telecommunication equipment will be provided:
• Extension and configuration of the existing SDH STM-16 multiplexer

• Two optical ports STM-16 (1+1 protection) to connect Ngozi Substation via redundant fibre optic
cores of OPGW: 62.7 km
• Two optical ports STM-16(1+1 protection) to assure the communication with the RN1 substation.
These optical ports will be used as soon as an OPGW is available between Gitega and RN1.
• Ethernet ports
• Extension of ODF (Optical Distribution Frame)
• Extension of MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
• Extension and configuration of the existing PABX
In order to make the necessary SCADA channels available, one digital PLC link shall be installed be-
tween Gitega and RN1 for the time being.

Lot 2 - Substations
11.1.2 Description
11.1.2.1 General
The digital control and monitoring equipment for the substations of the 220 kV Burundi-Rwanda inter-
connection will be connected directly to the respective LDC.
11.1.2.2 Data exchange
Information to be remotely exchanged includes:
• SCADA data: Via redundant Ethernet interfaces supporting IEC 60870-5-104 communication pro-
tocol in Rwanda and IEC 60870-5-101 in Burundi.
• Teleprotection: Line differential protection and distance protection will be provided with optical ports
for direct connection via OPGW.
• Telephone: IP Telephone channels for interconnection of substation PABXs.
11.1.3 Quality assurance
11.1.3.1 Standards and regulation
All the equipment mentioned in the scope of work shall be of proven quality and fully compatible with
the existing system.
• IEC 60801 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control

equipment
• IEC 60870 Supervisory control systems and equipment
• ITU-T International Telecommunication Union –Telecommunication Standardisation Sec-
tors.
11.1.3.2 Factory tests
In the framework of the Contract, the Constructor shall provide certificates for type tests performed on
the equipment by an independent laboratory. Factory acceptance tests shall include the following
(non-exhaustive list). Test reports and certificates shall be available for inspection:
• Visual examination: (colour, paintwork, dimensions and compliance with diagrams)

• Performance tests: tests on inputs/outputs (performance tests on all inputs/outputs. Tests are to be
performed with equipment simulating the equipment to be monitored or controlled. Tests shall
measure repetition, reproducibility and other accuracy parameters)
• Tests to demonstrate all aspects of the equipment’s communication capability, checking of mes-
sage security and protocols. Data transmission equipment shall be tested to check that it works
correctly and in complete safety on the type of channel or means of transmission chosen. Tests
shall reproduce the specifications for the channel as closely as possible. The tests shall also check
error messages and alarm processing.

Lot 2 - Substations
11.1.4 Documents to be submitted
The Constructor shall submit the following documents for each substation for approval (paper and
electronic version):
• Equipment characteristics
• Functional diagrams
• Electrical diagrams
• Test certificates
• Frequency drawings
11.2 Product, components and sub-assemblies
11.2.1 Optical fibre transmission equipment
11.2.1.1 General
The terminal equipment shall be designed to operate in accordance with the SDH STM-16 (Synchro-
nous Digital Hierarchy) standard for tributary bit stream of 2 MB/s and a resultant bit stream of 2.5
GB/s. Equipment shall be arranged in the cabinets in such a way that equipment required to transmit
information on additional pairs of fibres can be installed at a later date.
Equipment shall be installed in cabinets and include in each substation:
• the patch panel,

• the SDH optical line digital terminal
• the PDH multiplexer ,
• the accessories (optical connectors, optical jumpers, adapters, connection cables for electronic
equipment, etc.)
11.2.1.2 Patch panel
The patch panel shall be designed for assembly in a standard 19” rack. It will be used to connect the
ends of the HV line optical fibres to pigtail connectors, to which the optical terminal will be connected
using optical jumpers.
11.2.1.3 SDH Optical line digital terminal
11.2.1.3.1 General
The fibre optic equipment supplied under the current project shall be based on the Synchronous Digi-
tal Hierarchy (SDH) technology.
The SDH system shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode fibre optics and shall
comply with the following ITU.T. Recommendations: ITU.T. G.707, G.708, G.709, G.757, G.758.

Lot 2 - Substations
SDH equipment shall be of STM-1 level (155 Mbit/s). The system shall have the capability to be up-
graded to STM-4 level (620 Mbit/s) by exchanging appropriate modules, using the same optical fibres.
The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall permit the extraction of individual cir-
cuits (E1, etc.) from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole STM frame. Cross
connect facilities shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels and network
components.
The SDH optical multiplexer equipment shall perform both multiplexing and optical line terminating
functions. The aggregate ports of the SDH optical multiplexer equipment shall be capable of operating
in a 1+1 protected mode as part of a point to point link, or as an East/West mode when used in a drop
and insert chain. All features and functions of the SDH multiplexer equipment shall be readily software
configurable to suit operational requirements of the fibre optic communication system.
Configuration of SDH equipment shall be performed using an HMI interface based on a remote com-
puter (PC type) or local device (craft terminal).
The SDH multiplexer equipment shall be capable of being used as cross connect, a hub, add/drop and
or terminal multiplexer.
The multiplexer shall be equipped with a range of plug-in tributary interfaces to support a comprehen-
sive range of plesiochronous or synchronous tributaries including 2 Mbit/s, Ethernet 10/100.
The Contractor shall detail the SDH synchronization scheme.
The SDH multiplexer shall be housed in a rack and shall comprise, but not be limited to, the following
functional elements:
• Optical line interface,

• Electrical line interface,
• Tributary module,
• Switching unit,
• Control and alarm functions,
• Engineering Order wire (EOW) unit for service telephone,
• Service data interface.
11.2.1.3.2 Reference Standards
SDH equipment shall be compliant with the following ITU.T. Recommendations:
• ITU.T. G.707,
• ITU.T. G.708,
• ITU.T. G.709,
• ITU.T. G.757,
• ITU.T. G.758.

Lot 2 - Substations
11.2.1.3.3 Optical Line Interface
The optical line interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion of traffic from the switching
unit into a STM-1 155 Mbit/s stream. The optical section shall convert electrical signals into an optical
signal for transmission over an optical fibre and perform a reciprocal function on the receive side.
Each optical line system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of 1310 or
1550 nm over 2 optical fibres. La longueur d’onde 1550 nm sera utilisée dans le cadre du projet.
The optical interfaces shall comply to ITU.T.G.957 / 958 recommendations.
Basically, the electro-optic converter shall be of a semiconductor distributed feedback (DFB) laser di-
ode type with power output suited to the requirements of the fibre optic links and preferably suitable for
minimizing the number of repeaters.
The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions, the launch power shall be sig-
nificantly reduced to a safe level. It is preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment are in-
terconnected in such a way that a broken fibre will automatically switch off the optical transmitters at
both ends of the section.
Transmitters which output optical power of a sufficient intensity to cause hazard to health shall have
mechanical interlocks to isolate the diode supply current during the installation or maintenance of the
equipment. Sign warning of possible hazard shall be permanently fixed at all appropriate points.
Transmitters shall provide data scrambling to facilitate the continuous transmission of data timing in-
formation.
In the receive direction the line interface unit shall disassemble the incoming composite STM data
stream into its line, supervisory, control and E.O.W. signals before being sent to the switching unit.
The opto-electronic converter shall use an avalanche photodiode (APD) detector with narrow band
phase lock loop synchronisation to facilitate low jitter levels.
Receiver line decoding and de-scrambler functions shall perform the inverse function to those of the
transmitter coder sections.
The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance suited to the requirements of
the network. A BER of better than 10-9 for received signal level of -28 dBm at bit rate of 2.5 Gbit/s and
at an ambient temperature of +55°C shall be required as a minimum.
The receiver shall automatically accommodate signal level changes due to temperature effects and
ageing of the system.
It shall be possible to use an optical line interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM signals to
be terminated when the equipment is configured as an Add / Drop multiplexer.
11.2.1.3.4 Tributary Module
The tributary module shall perform the selective extraction / insertion of 2 Mbit/s tributaries to and from
the STM-1 signal whilst enabling other traffic to pass through without interruption.

Lot 2 - Substations
It shall permit any 2 Mbit/s channel to be inserted or dropped without causing deterioration of the
transmission quality. The drop and insert functions shall be user configurable both locally and remotely
through a user interface unit.
The tributary module shall be capable of supporting higher tributary data rates up to 140 Mbit/s or
STM-1.
Ethernet 10/100/1000 BaseT ports shall be available.
The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers and tributary units in accordance
with ITU.T.G.707 recommendation that shall make up the SDH payload before being sent to the
switching unit.
11.2.1.3.5 Switching Unit
A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface unit to be connected to any
tributary port or any other line port. Additionally, it shall allow full cross connections between tributar-
ies.
The switching unit shall be designed to avoid complete failure of drop / insert and cross connect func-
tions provided.
11.2.1.3.6 Control and Alarm Functions
Comprehensive control and alarm functions shall be included to provide performance monitoring,
alarm and fault monitoring, system configuration, bandwidth management, dynamic allocation, auto-
matic re-routing, prioritising of channels, testing and maintenance facilities. These functions shall inter-
face to the network management system to allow the control and alarm monitoring of the equipment to
be carried out locally and remotely.
The equipment shall be provided with a fault location and supervisory system to monitor the status of
the SDH multiplexer equipment. The fault location and supervision system shall provide in-service bit
error monitoring facilities.
The following alarms shall be provided on the SDH multiplexer equipment:
• Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment,

• Bit error rate (BER) threshold high,
• Optical receive level low,
• Multiplex input failure,
• Loss of clock signal,
• Distant alarms,
• Power supply failure or out of limits.
An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to monitor and display the locally derived alarms and, if
applicable, adjacent repeater station alarms, showing the location of each alarm displayed. It is pref-
erable that the system shall be able to provide details of origin, date of the occurrence of alarms.

Lot 2 - Substations
The alarm concept shall conform to ITU.T.G.812 recommendation. Test points shall be available on
each unit to help in failure diagnosis.
SDH equipment shall be fully compliant with SNMP protocol (Simple Network Management Protocol).
MIB files (Management Information Base) shall be provided.
11.2.1.3.7 Engineer Order Wire (EOW) Unit
An engineer order wire system providing call, ring and speech facilities shall be provided with each
SDH multiplexer. The system shall operate on a service channel in the STM bit stream, either by utilis-
ing overhead bytes in the system code, or by using specially provided multiplexer equipment. The sys-
tem shall be configured as an omnibus circuit, with a telephone handset, selective calling to reach any
station along the route and an audible alert provided at each terminal and repeater site.
11.2.1.3.8 Service Data Interface
The SDH equipment shall have service interface for telecommunication management system (1200
bps, ITU-T Rec. V.11).
Means shall be provided for accessing auxiliary channels using spare bytes in the SDH overhead bit
stream to enable management signals from additional equipment such as primary access multiplexers
to be transmitted over the fibre optic transmission system.
The number, bit rate and type interfaces available shall be stated by the Bidder.
11.2.1.3.9 Lightning Protection
The SDH multiplexer equipment shall be shielded from damage by lightning or power induction. The
equipment shall be capable of withstanding surges at the rate of 2 kV per microsecond at least.
11.2.1.3.10 Connector
The equipment shall be provided with connectors having the following features:
• Insertion losses less than 0.5 dB,

• Durability: 500 mating cycles at least,
• Return loss: >40 dB,
• Cable retention: 100 N.
11.2.1.3.11 Power Budgeting
The Contractor shall provide power budget calculation to prove that the proposed equipment will oper-
ate on the link within acceptable bit error rate of 10-9 or better.
The result of the power budget calculations shall indicate the maximum link's length covered with the
proposed SDH multiplexers by taking into account the:

Lot 2 - Substations
• Transmit power at point S: x dBm (characteristic of the proposed SDH multiplexers),

• Receive power at point R: y dBm (characteristic of the proposed SDH multiplexers),
• Equipment margin: 3 dB,
• Cable margin: 3 dB,
• Fibre attenuation at 1550 nm: 0.23 dB/km,
• Splicing loss: 0.1 dB,
• Quantity of splicing per km: 0.33/km to 0.5/km (for OPGW).
The Bidder shall also take into account in the calculations the additional attenuation introduced by the
optic heads (connectors, fibres jumpers) and the station fibre optic cables (with splicing at the terminal
junction box).
A 6 dB transmission margin as a minimum is required.
11.2.1.3.12 Synchronisation
The comprehensive SDH system will be synchronised. The synchronisation solution shall be compliant
with ITUT.G811/812/813 recommendation.
11.2.1.4 Optical distribution frame
11.2.1.4.1 General
All fibres of the substation fibre optic cables shall be ended and spliced in the optical distribution
frame.
The optical distribution frame shall be installed in wall-standing distribution racks.
Assignment between substation fibre cable and optical terminal equipment shall be made by the help
of jumper fibres on the optic distribution frame.
Capacity of the optic distribution frame shall allow free assignment between each individual fibre of the
station fibre optic cables and the relevant optical I/O ports of the SDH multiplexers.
When there are several station fibre optic cables coming from several distinct directions in one station,
only one optic distribution frame may be proposed with the adequate connection capacity covering the
needs of all the links and SDH multiplexers.
The optic distribution frame shall be equipped with low loss optical connectors of the screw-on type.
Auxiliary connectors shall be provided to facilitate testing and maintenance of the fibres. All spare fi-
bres shall be properly terminated and spliced on connectors.
11.2.1.4.2 Optical Distribution Frame Characteristics
The optical distribution frame with connectors for fibre optic ducted cables shall have the following
characteristics:

Lot 2 - Substations
• Spare capacity for 2x48 fibres for future extension.

• Maximum optical attenuation shall be 0.1 dB per splice.
• The housing of the box shall be standing type, tamper-proof sealed and of rugged construction
• The optical connectors shall be LC type.
11.2.1.5 PDH Multiplexer
11.2.1.5.1 General
The required PCM equipment is intended to be used for:
• Voice communication based on digital PABX’s.

• Alarm transmission (including external alarm integration in NMS)
• Data transmission (SCADA data, Tariff metering, etc.)
• Video (CCTV) transmit/receive for access control and monitoring.
• Establishment of and LAN’s and WAN’s, using various Ethernet interfaces based on 10/100 Base-T
Ethernet.
11.2.1.5.2 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) Multiplex Equipment Design
The Access Multiplex Equipment (PCM) should be universal, software-controlled, through Windows
based network management system (with direct and remote monitoring and management). It shall
have different interface cards to connect and multiplex various facilities such as Voice, Protection Sig-
nalling, Alarms, Data, Ethernet connectivity, CCTV, etc. and multiplex them into the standard digital
2 Mbit/s stream. It should provide means to drop and insert 64 Kbit/s signals into the 2 Mbit/s streams.
The equipment shall have required interfaces to transmit alarms of individual telecom equipment from
the respective station to the related LDC. The number of such alarms shall not be less than 30. These
alarms shall be integrated into the network management system of the PCM / STM network.
The equipment shall have duplicated control cards, such that the failure of any control card shall not
cause the equipment to go out of service.
The equipment shall be fully equipped with minimum 30 input/output channels. However, the number
of interface modules to achieve this requirement may have in total higher number of channels depend-
ing on the design of the interface cards. The interface for Ethernet connections, V.F.4W E&M, 2W V.F
Subscriber/PABX end, 64Kbps (G-703) or V.11, RS-232, RS-232C, RS-449, RS-422, ISDN U, Digital
Protection Relays, Analogue Protection Relays, Video Codec, etc. shall be provided. Exact type&
numbers of various input / output interfaces shall be finalized depending upon the requirement, during
the design stage, after award of the contract.
The PCM should provide at the aggregate side the standard 2 Mbps signals as explained above,
which comprises of the 30 digital and/or analogue channels with associated signalling, in accordance
with the relevant ITU-T recommendations.
The PCM transmission shall be based on a sampling rate of 8,000 samples/s of each incoming VF el-
ement. The encoding law used shall be A-Law using 8 binary digits per sample, thus generating a
64 Kbits/s signal in accordance with ITU-T G.711 recommendation.

Lot 2 - Substations
32 channels of 64 K bits/s each, transmitted in 32 time slots of 8 bits per frame, shall build up to a digi-
tal bit stream of 2,048 K bits/s, resulting in 32 time-slots. Out of these slots, Time-slot # 0 shall be
used for frame alignment and remote supervision whilst the time-slot # 16 shall be used for channel
associated telephone signalling. The remaining 30 time slots shall be assigned to the various facility
channels as explained above.
The speech compressing law employed in encoding and decoding shall follow the logarithmic A-Law
with the value of A=87.6 and approximated by 13 segments. Single channel code structure is pre-
ferred. The MTBF shall be ≥ 10E5 hours at operating temperature conditions. The Bidder/Contractor
shall indicate the MTBF at specified temperature conditions.
The rated supply voltage shall be - 48 V DC, however the equipment shall be able to work in the range
of - 40 to - 58 V DC. The equipment shall be equipped with duplicate power supply modules sharing
the load during the normal operation conditions. However, upon failure of either of these, the other
shall not be affected, and shall be able to cater for the entire equipment load. Moreover, 48V DC sup-
ply (1+1 configuration) with separate MCBs (protected through diodes) for each of equipment along
with status monitoring of all MCBs shall be implemented.
The multiplex equipment shall be equipped with circuits to detect at least the following:
• Loss of incoming signal (2,048 K bit/s)

• Loss of frame alignment
• Bit error rate (BER) greater than 10-3
• Alarm indication signal (AIS) detection
• Failure of 64 K bits/s inter-face (signalling only)
• Failure of power supplies.
• Loss of clock signal
• Error of bit control
11.2.1.5.3 Technical specifications
• Number of channel timeslots per frame: 30 + 2 for signalling

• Sampling rate: 8kHz, 8 bits per channel timeslot
• Telephone interfaces:
– frequency bandwidth: 300-3400Hz
– audio-frequency termination: 2 and 4 wires
– signalling interface: E & M
– impedance: 600 Ω
– balanced return loss ≥ 20 dB.
– 2-wire telephone interfaces shall permit direct connection of the subscriber’s sets to the PAX
equipment. Telephone ringing supplies shall form part of the interface equipment.
• Digital interfaces at 64 Kbit/s:
– bit rate (synchronous operation): 64kbit/s ± 5xl0-5
– encoding: IUT.T. G703/4
– pulse shape: IUT.T. G 703/5
– impedance: 120 Ω balanced
– return loss ≥ 16dB
• Data interfaces
– Multirate synchronous data 0.6 to 64 Kbit/s with ITU X.21/V.11 interface
– Multirate synchronous and asynchronous data up to 19.2 Kbit/s with ITU V.24/V.28 interface

Lot 2 - Substations
• Ethernet interfaces: 10/100 Base-T

• Digital interfaces at 2048 Kbit/s:
– bit rate: 2048 Kbit/s ± 5x 10-5
– code: HDB3
– signal waveform: IUT.T. G 703/8
– frame structure: IUT.T. G 732/704
– jitter: IUT.T. G 823
– input attenuation range: 0-6 dB 1024 kHz
– impedance: 120 Ω symmetrical
– or 75 Ω coaxial
• Availability/ The MTBF shall be = 105 hours at operating temperature conditions. The Tenderer
shall indicate the MTBF at standard temperature conditions.
• Power supply:
– rated voltage 48 V DC
– voltage range 48 V +15% - 20% V DC
• Mechanical presentation: The PCM multiplexers shall be installed in same distribution rack as for
SDH equipment.
11.2.2 Voice communication
11.2.2.1 Telephone exchange (PABX)
11.2.2.1.1 IP PABX Equipment
PABX shall be of the latest technology and shall comply with the following:
• Redundant central units

• Redundant power supplies or distributed power supply
• Microprocessor control and memory storage for the following data:
– Static data related to the PABX configuration, subscriber profiles, etc.
– Dynamic data
– Software programs
• PABX equipment will be based on time switching voice signals digitized (PCM channels according
to Recommendation ITU.T G.711: 8kHz and quantification according to law A).
• The switching unit is architected so as not to block any connection even full use of the system
• Permanent links and subscribers will be grouped on each card with at least 4 connections per card.
The PABX rack data bus will be universal and flexible; and each rack connector will accept both
permanent links cards but also those of subscribed links.
• PABX equipment will be provided with self-testing programs enabling analysis of the main operat-
ing parameters (Power, CPU, memory, interface lines, maintenance ports ...) and will be able, at
once, to establish real-time reports of malfunctions on a printer (with time tagging), but also store
these events to a buffer for delayed analysis.
Management of static data is possible locally and remotely. This operation will allow the configuration
of the switch, the constitution of a numbering plan, the modification of static data such as:
• Subscriber assignment
• Deleting or adding permanent links
• Deleting or adding subscriber groups
• Address translation table

Lot 2 - Substations
• Etc.
Remote configuration will be based on the availability of an Ethernet port for connection via an IP net-
work, access is secured by entering a password. It will be possible to remotely load the data bases
created and saved on a compatible remote PC.
In PABX equipment, the configuration parameters, that is to say, the static data describing subscrib-
ers, permanent links, groups, etc., must be saved in an EEPROM. This data is loaded into RAM when
running the PABX program. Thus, the loading of parameters is always possible during a recovery after
a failure of equipment due to the failure of CPU, power supply or other interface. The EEPROM load-
ing time to the RAM should not exceed 30 seconds after a recovery / reset.
The PABX shall be based on IP PABX using TCP/IP protocols to carry voice calls.
The IP PABX will be connected to the dedicated voice communication WAN of the optical transmission
system via an Ethernet 10/100 port.
11.2.2.1.2 PABX Functions
The telephone system will include all PABX provided within the frame of the project. PABXs will form
an integrated telephone network. A common numbering plan will be proposed.
PABX will be interconnected via redundant trunk channels:
• Ethernet 10/100 ou 2 Mbit/s links via the fibre optic system
In addition PABX will be connected to the PSTN (Public Switch Telephone Network) and mobile GSM
network if available.
The PABX shall have a capacity of 16 subscriber lines as a minimum.
The operator telephone shall be mounted on a desk in the command room. Telephone lines shall be
connected via the PABX to the operator telephone. By means of push-buttons and keys or touch
screen on the operator telephone the control engineer shall:
• Establish outgoing calls;

• Receive incoming calls;
• Establish connection between any of the lines connected to the system;
• Multi-party conference
• General night service
• Transfer in conversation on free/busy telephone
• Call forwarding unconditional
• Call forwarding on no reply
• Call forwarding on busy extension
• Call pick-up
• Last internal/external number redial
• Individual directory
• Call line identification
• Hunting group (fix head, cyclic)
• Intrusion

Lot 2 - Substations
• Direct Inward Dialling

• Automatic call to the hook
• Over-dialling
• Park calls
• Priority management
• Break-in on an established connection;
• Hands free operation
In case of a PABX failure, the operator's telephone shall automatically connect predetermined lines to
the automatic PABX line.
11.2.2.1.3 IP Phone
The IP phone provides several functions in addition to the functions of analogue phone. IP phones
shall be compliant with the following technical characteristics:
• Display: LCD, minimum 6 lines

• Call logs: possibility to store a minimum of 100 calls
• Signalling protocol: H.323, SIP
• Interfaces: Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, USB
• Functions: conference, call transfer, directory searching, voice mail plus all analogue phone func-
tions.
• Power supply: 230 VAC, 48 VDC, supports 802.3af PoE (Power over Ethernet)
11.2.2.1.4 GSM
Whenever possible, i.e the substation is located in the area covered by a GSM relay, PABX will be
provided with a GSM interface to enable communications with mobile phones.
11.2.3 Electromagnetic compatibility
11.2.3.1 General
No equipment must generate interference that could affect the performance of other equipment or
cause inconvenience or discomfort to staff. Equipment earthing and wiring systems shall be designed
accordingly. In addition, the entire monitoring system shall be designed so that:
• electromagnetic fields caused by any component do not disturb the operation of other communica-
tion and control components,
• equipment is sufficiently immune to electromagnetic radiation caused by other equipment,
• electromagnetic radiation remains within the limits authorised by European standards and defined
by the following standards:
– IEC 60801/1-4 Electromagnetic compatibility
– CISPR 22 Special international committee on radio interference
– EN 500811-1

Lot 2 - Substations
11.2.3.2 External disturbance
Special precautions shall be taken to avoid the usual disturbance occurring in the vicinity of HV sub-
stations, such as:
• atmospheric discharges,
• over-voltages caused by operating power equipment.
Equipment shall be designed to avoid causing any damage and to maintain performance levels.
11.2.3.3 Prevention of sparking
Spark gap devices shall be installed at all points considered to be necessary to ensure satisfactory
operation of contacts and to avoid disturbing the operation of electronic circuits.
11.2.3.4 Noise and vibrations
Maximum acoustic and/or vibration noise levels produced by operating equipment shall be 46 dB(A),
measured one metre from the equipment concerned. This level of noise is to be specified in the tender
documents and guaranteed by the Constructor.
11.2.3.5 Static electricity
Electronic equipment shall be protected against the accumulation of static electricity and suitable pro-
tection devices shall be installed to ensure that this equipment can be maintained with no risk of dam-
age.
11.2.4 Special tools – Spare parts
A complete set of tools, spare connection parts shall be provided for 5 years operation.
11.3 Production - Installation
11.3.1 Site acceptance tests
A site acceptance test shall be performed to prove that each system is working correctly after installa-
tion. This test must demonstrate that the general design of the system complies with functional and
performance requirements on site.
The Constructor shall be required to carry out the following operations:
• Programming
• Authorisation of the various channels for the different services
• Checking and programming
• Communication tests

Lot 2 - Substations
• Authorised channels
• Communication with other items of equipment and existing network
• Testing of signals between teleprotection terminals
11.3.2 Test period
Once each system has successfully passed the site tests, it will be used for a 30-day trial period, dur-
ing which it must meet all Contract requirements and its reliability, stability and robustness must be
confirmed.
11.3.3 Provisional acceptance
The telecommunication systems will be accepted when:
• all the equipment has successfully passed all the specified tests,
• all faults, problems and other reservations noted during the tests have been corrected to the satis-
faction of the Employer and his representative.
The Constructor shall be responsible for all corrective measures and for the costs relating to such
work.

Lot 2 - Substations
12. Gantries and Supporting Structures

Frames and supports for 110 and 220 kV substations shall be made of steel such as to be completely
prefabricated at the factory.
Steel structures for Kigoma SS shall be similar to the existing ones. For Gitega and the new substa-
tions, the steel structures shall be of ‘lattice’ type.
The structures shall be designed in such way that subsequent steps can be installed without changing
any component of the same class.
The structures include:
• Line and busbar gantries

• Earth masts
• Equipment supports (breakers, disconnectors switches, surge arresters, current and voltage trans-
formers etc.)
• Busbars supports
• Sealing end platforms for underground cables and
• Generally speaking, fittings and brackets required
12.1 Design
The choice of steel angles, fasteners and others components for the structures shall be in accordance
with the following criteria:
• minimum weight compatible with the working conditions and safety regulations imposed,
• ease of manufacturing and erection by reducing the number of parts
The minimum mechanical characteristics to be considered in the calculations are those specified by
the EN standards for structural steels, rolled, sheet metal, fasteners, etc.
12.2 Steel grade
Two grades shall be used for steel members, S235 and S355 with the following characteristics:
Steel grade S235 S355

2
Ultimate tensile strength (daN/cm ) 3900 5600
2
Yield strength (daN/cm )
average 2550 3800
minimum 2350 3550
The w/t (width/thickness) ratio of the steel angles shall not exceed 15 in order to avoid the buckling
phenomena arising beyond this value.

Lot 2 - Substations
The size of the steel angles shall be as per the range defined in the EN, the smallest size being
40x40x3.
12.3 Fasteners
The fasteners shall have the following characteristics:
Fasteners Gr 4.6 Gr 8.8

2
Ultimate tensile strength (daN/cm ) 3900 7840
2
Yield strength (daN/cm ) 2350 6270
The following measures shall be considered:
• The range of fasteners grade shall be kept to a minimum for ease of erection
• The minimum diameter of fasteners shall not be less than 12mm
• The thickness of the washers shall not be less than 4mm
The minimum guaranteed safety factors shall be:
• 1,8 in regards of the yield strength for normal load cases

• 1,2 in regards of the yield strength for exceptional load cases
• As defined by the contractor for other exceptional load cases.
Fasteners for structure assemblies shall be hot dip galvanized bolts with a hexagonal head and wash-
ers (flat, spring).
For structural steel members, the fasteners shall be of grade 8.8. For step bolts and other accessories,
the grade of fasteners may be 4.6.
Only one type of fastener should be available for each diameter size such to prevent using weak fas-
teners there where stronger fasteners are required (i.e. using Gr. 4.6 fasteners instead of Gr. 8.8 fas-
teners).
12.4 Structure design
The structures shall be designed taking into account the worst load case on the most critical compo-
nent. The two following analysis methods can be used:
• The gantries structures can be considered as indeterminate fixed rigid frame, or

• The gantries structures can be considered isostatic.

Lot 2 - Substations
13. Earthing
13.1 General
This specification is relative to the general technical conditions met by the ground network. It applies
to the design, supply and installation of the equipment, their spare parts, as well as all work or modifi-
cations thereto.
The earthing system shall include the following:
• the buried earthing network (backbone)

• various indoor and outdoor ground loops,
• potential gradient limiting systems,
• the grounding electrodes.
13.2 Recommendations and norms
The equipment must meet the current recommendations. The main recommendations taken into con-
sideration are:
• German norm DIN VDE 0141,

• French norm UTE C11-001, C15-106.
The calculations of the ground network will be performed according to the method recommended in
ANSI / IEEE Standard 80 (IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations groundings).
13.3 Technical specifications
13.3.1 General
All non-conductive parts of substation, especially the parts metallic structures, panels, cubicles, light-
ning arresters, the secondary terminal of the current and voltage transformers, the neutral terminals of
the power transformers, railways, the fences and gates, water pipes etc. will be connected to the
earthing network of the substations.
The earthing networks must be made of a material that meets the following requirements:
• withstand the thermal load caused by ground current,

• have sufficient mechanical strength,
• withstand the chemical and electrolytic corrosion,
• have sufficient conductivity in order not to contribute to differences in the potential hazard
The grounding circuit is made of bare copper wire, twisted and buried to a depth of 1 meter. If installed
in aggressive soil, the bare wire shall be tin coated.

Lot 2 - Substations
The grid must be tight enough to avoid the tension of step and touch to non-dangerous values. Fur-
thermore, to prevent a device, following the breakdown of a grounding cable to be isolated from the
earthing network, no ‘antenna’ type connection should be used.
Earthing conductors shall be connected together with appropriate fittings.
If the earth resistance of the substation is too high, it should be possible to connect this earthing net-
work to cylindrical electrodes (grounding wells) located at the periphery of the grid.
The conductors shall be attached along the frames and kept away from them to prevent contact be-
tween the copper wire and frame such as to cause any electrolytic corrosion. A main ground terminal
will be provided for the earth resistance measurement.
13.3.2 Specific measures
The lowest sections of the connections of the apparatus to the ground network are the following:
•
2
HV and MV switchgear: 95 mm
•
2
power transformers: 95 mm
•
2
LV switchboards: 95 mm
•
2
fences doors: 50 mm
•
2
cable racks, wiring cabinets grouping: 16 mm
•
2
protection circuits LV cable: 16 mm
13.3.2.1 Basic grounding system
The basic grounding system of the external unit shall consist of a grid with a maximum pitch of 10 m
between the stitches, evenly distributed over the entire surface substation. The grid pitch will be tighter
in the vicinity of the HV devices in order to limit the step voltage during the passage of the maximum
2
short-circuit current to ground. The stranded conductor shall be 95 mm copper conductor.
The connection to external loops will be made at maximum intervals of 20 m.
13.3.2.2 Earth electrodes
Additional electrodes consisting of "Copperweld" rods, with a minimum length of 3 m and a minimum
diameter of 19 mm are connected to the grid network at the following locations:
• neutral point of the transformer windings in star,

• Neutral resistance and reactance grounding of MV, - lightning arresters,
• Earth blades HV disconnectors
• grounded capacitive dividers and coupling devices for power line carrier equipment

Lot 2 - Substations
13.3.2.3 Connection of equipment
All structures and equipment of the outdoor station shall be connected to the ground network by
"loops".
Metal fences will be connected to the substation earthing system. A cable will be buried at a depth of
0.5 m and less than 1 m outside of it, to control the potential gradient.
The access doors will be connected to the metal fences by flexible stranded copper connections.
13.3.2.4 Internal earthing grid
An internal ground network shall be provided at the bottom of the excavation of the service buildings.
All support frame, control panels and fixtures located in the service buildings will be connected to
them.
2
It will have a section of 95 mm . The foundation's rebars will also be connected to this inner network.
13.3.2.5 Connections between the earthing grids of the various components of the substation
For fault currents to have the greatest number of flow paths, it is necessary to interconnect the earth
circuits of different voltage levels of the same substation. This connection must be made by at least
three ground wires, these being distant as possible from each other.
13.3.2.6 Interconnection of basic grounding and internal grid
The basic grounding grid and internal grid shall be interconnected in such a way that resistance
measures could be carried out separately for the two networks.
13.3.2.7 Network calculation
The simplified formula gives an approximation generally sufficient; the resistance is of the order of
twice that of a hemispherical electrode of the same average contour.
Soil resistivity measurements must be performed by the contractor at the final locations in order to ac-
curately calculate the dimensions of the grounding circuit.
The ground network will be designed for fault currents mentioned in section 2.5.2 ‘Short-circuit cur-
rents. The voltage step and touch may not exceed 125V anywhere on the network.
The earth resistance may not exceed a value of 1 Ω at any point on the network and in the dry season.

Lot 2 - Substations
13.3.3 Special provisions for the equipment
13.3.3.1 Earthing of the power transformers
To ensure a correct operation of the power transformer's tank protection and making efficient earth
screens low-voltage cables, the following provisions shall be made for the connection to the general
earth network:
• the tanks being insulated from the rollers and the rails, must be connected directly to the earthing
circuit, earthing transformers must be connected as close to the general ground circuit (connection
length less than 5 m); this connection is made through the current transformer tank earth,
• the adjuster cabinets will be connected to the earth circuit separately
• the connection from the transform neutral terminal, either directly or via an impedance, is isolated
from the ground and linked to a connection point with the grid, in an insulated pipe from the ground
level to a height of 2.25 m. This connection to the grid must be accessible by a manhole covered
by a slab. At this connection point at least two meshes of the basic network must meet. Alternative-
ly, the connecting cable could be a 120 mm² polyethylene insulated copper wire.
13.3.4 Circuit breakers
Their grounding is done through the frame. To allow the earthings for the work during the maintenance
of the apparatus, it is necessary to have two ground conductors perpendicular to the axis of the poles
and both sides of circuit breakers. Each of these conductors is fixed to the base frame of the appa-
ratus by earthing blocks.
13.3.5 Surge arresters
The connection from the surge arrester terminal will be isolated from the ground and linked to a con-
nection point with the grid, in an insulated pipe from ground level, to a height of 2.25 m. Alternatively
the connecting cable could be a 120 mm² polyethylene insulated copper wire.
13.3.6 Electromagnetic coupling
In order to reduce the electromagnetic coupling between the LV cables and HV equipment, it shall be
necessary to protect the LV cables a metal sheath grounded at both ends of the cable.

Lot 2 - Substations
14. Civil Works and Outdoor Facilities
14.1 General
14.1.1 Work Included
The works to be performed by the Contractor under this Specification includes the field investigation,
the design, the supply of materials and the construction of all Civil Works and buildings of the substa-
tion, such as:
1. Site survey, topography and layout of the site

2. Site preparation (including demolition if required), levelling works and earth works
3. Concrete and associated works
4. Construction of:
• Roads
• Wall, fences and gates
• Drainage (including connection of transformers pits draining pipes to the substation drainage
system)
• Control building
• Cables Ducts
• Foundations and structural steel of outdoor equipment's
• Potable water supply and sewage networks
5. Landscaping
6. Earthing and grounding
The Contractor shall supply all the necessary materials, construction plants and equipment, transpor-
tation, labour and all other facilities and resources required for the completion of the works.
14.1.1.2 Limits of supply
The limit of supply are:
Between HV Lines and the Substation:
• The holes on the gantries of the incoming lines for lines insulators
14.1.2 Quality Assurance - Standard and Regulation
All equipment and materials and manufacturing procedures, galvanizing and testing, referred to in this
Specification shall conform to the standards, codes, manuals and specifications listed, or to equivalent
standards approved by the Consultant.

Lot 2 - Substations
14.1.3 Design and Submittals
14.1.3.1 General
The Contractor is responsible for the design of all civil works and must justify to the Consultant the
general design of all structures, as well as the detailed design of all structures, buildings, embank-
ments or retaining walls, and foundations.
For design approval, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant: drawings, structural and other cal-
culation sheets, bills of materials, construction methods and schedules for the construction of civil
works, etc.
Detailed calculations shall include calculations covering the determination of the foundation loads, the
method of transfer of load from structure to foundations and justifications of the bearing pressures and
their distribution.
14.1.3.2 Field conditions
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the geotechnical parameters of each site from ge-
otechnical studies. He shall submit the study reports and determined the allowable bearing capacities
to take into account for the design of foundations. These parameters include the allowable bearing ca-
pacity, the wet density of the soil, the angle of internal friction, the chemical properties, the presence of
sulfates and the groundwater levels.
14.1.3.3 Foundation
Drawings showing full details of the foundations based on the approved designs shall be submitted.
The drawings shall detail the foundation dimensions including those necessary for the correct setting
of the foundations as well as details of reinforcing steel
The Contractor shall supply drawings showing location and levels of all foundation work on the sites
and peg their positions on site as may be necessary. The Contractor will be entirely responsible for the
accuracy of the setting out of the foundations
Foundations are of Spread Footing type, compatible with the allowable bearing capacity determined
from geotechnical studies.
Safety factors will be 3 for the bearing capacity of the soil and 2 for overturning and sliding.
14.1.3.4 Design of Control Building, gate house
The general design of the building will be as follows:
• The buildings will be braced if necessary to take into account the wind load.
• Beams will be continuous over the supports all along the length of the building, whatever the num-
ber of intermediate supports
• Soil characteristics will determine the allowed load capacity and the type of foundation.

Lot 2 - Substations
• Load conditions and safety factors shall be in accordance with the BS 8110 standard, EURO-
CODE, ACI, AFNOR BSI BAEL 91 standard or other equivalent international standards.
14.1.3.5 Overload
All floors are designed to withstand the following operating loads, which include all loads that apply to
the surface and underside.
2
Location Load (kN / m )
Roof with equipment (air conditioning, water tank) 10.0 (or higher if necessary)
Roof without equipment 2.0
Office 4.0
Battery Room 15.0
Control bay room (raised floor) 3.0
MV switchgear Load of the switchgear + 4cells
Other rooms 5.0
14.1.3.6 Own weight
The building will be designed for the following own weight:
• Own weight of the building.

• Roof weight including roof tiles, thermal insulation, the PVC membrane, the air conditioning ducts.
14.1.3.7 Wind load
Wind pressure shall conform to the British Code of Practice CP3, Chapter V, Part 2, or an equivalent
international standard, using the wind speed specified in Chapter 2 of this document. Loading condi-
tions to be considered shall comply with relevant Codes and Standards.
14.1.3.8 Seismic constraints
Seismic constraints are given in §1.4 Site conditions and design criteria.
Load due to snow will not apply.
14.1.3.9 Architectural design
The architectural design shall be simple and shall present a good integration in the surrounding area.

Lot 2 - Substations
14.1.3.10 Roof design
The roof shape shall be saddle, hip or half-hip type, overhanging above the walls with metallic gutters
and down in cast iron.
2
It will be insulated to minimize heat transmission to 0.57 W/m K, with isolation and vapour barrier.
14.1.3.11 Walls
The exterior walls shall be made of red bricks, made in Rwanda and/or Burundi, if necessary with con-
crete columns, steel reinforced, assembled in English bond.
The bricks are burnt preferably in kilns.
The walls above foundation shall receive a protective coating against moisture.
The interior walls will be built in bricks as well (shall not receive the load of the building) not bearers of
150 mm.
Other specifications under Chapter 15.3.3.
14.1.3.12 Doors
Ail technical rooms will have emergency doors.
All doors used during the installation of equipment shall be double doors (including interior doors)
large enough to allow the passage of panels in their vertical position.
The doors of the battery room will be equipped with a closing spring system (type "Groom") and seal-
ing joints to prevent the passage of air outside the battery room.
The Contractor is responsible for the door design, the equipment access and must make sure that all
doors are sufficiently tall to allow the passage of all the materials in their normal position and especial-
ly in the vertical position for the electrical panel.
14.1.3.13 Ceiling height
Minimum ceiling height is 2.6 meters.
14.2 Survey and General Layout of Sites
The topographical survey and studies shall be carried out by the Contractor.
The layout drawings shall be carried out by the Contractor. These drawings shall show locations of the
switchyard, control buildings, access roads, fencing and other main features including orientation of
the site with respect to the incoming and outgoing HV and MV overhead lines. The layout drawing
shall show details of terracing and levels.

Lot 2 - Substations
For the approval of the layout drawings, the Contractor shall establish general reference points on
sites as may be necessary for the setting out of foundations, fencing, roads, etc. The Contractor shall
install the reference points in such a manner as to prevent their destruction.
Tender Drawings showing outline layouts for the substation are indicative only. The Contractor may
deviate from the layouts shown on these drawings to suit the plant, equipment and designs contained
in his offer, provided such deviations comply with the requirements of the specifications, and are ap-
proved by the Consultant.
The minimum level of the platforms (excluding gravel) will be at least 10 cm above the natural ground
level.
14.2.1 Preparation and Earthworks
14.2.1.1 Clearing of Site,
The site should be cleared of all trees, roots, bushes, rocks, garbage, earth if it has an unacceptable
high humus content and other unwanted material.
14.2.1.2 Realization and levelling of the platforms
After approval of the site plans, the Contractor shall perform the platforms and level the site by digging
or filling, so as to obtain the levels shown on the site plan, with provision for road Crushed Rock filling
etc...
The backfill should consist of thin layers not exceeding 200 mm and each layer shall be adequately
compacted by appropriate rollers.
The soil moisture content should not exceed 3% of the optimal value.
The fill and backfill will be compacted to reach a dry density higher than 95% of the optimum Proctor.
All field tests and laboratory tests will be borne by the Contractor. Finished surfaces must have the
necessary slope to allow drainage.
14.2.1.3 Earth work
Excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations shown on approved drawings.
The slope of the overall excavation should not be greater than 1:1.5. At location where the slope does
not meet these conditions, temporary supports should be installed on the walls of the excavation for
prop up and retaining walls.
Excavated materials suitable for use as backfill shall be deposited in storage piles at approved area.
Surplus excavated materials shall be hauled and transported to an approved disposal area.

Lot 2 - Substations
Where backfilling is required, the Contractor shall place and compact the backfill materials to the lines,
levels dimensions shown on the approved drawings. The materials used to backfill, the quantities and
the manner which the material is laid shall be approved by the Consultant.
Where the sites are terraced, the design of the retaining walls or embankments between levels shall
be provided. Such works shall, in order to ensure stability, take due account of the soil conditions and
the scouring effect of the weather and any other external loads on the soil in the vicinity.
14.2.2 Crushed Rock Surfacing
The work shall consist of a surfacing course, composed of two layers of crushed rock, spread uniform-
ly over the whole switchyard areas and outside the fences on a width of 1.5 m, in accordance with
lines, grades and cross-section shown on approved drawings.
14.2.2.1 Materials
The crushed rock shall be sound rock from approved quarry. The percentage of wear as determined
by the Los Angeles Test, AASHO T-96, shall not exceed 50%. The ratio of the length to the thickness
of the particles, for the control of particles shape shall not exceed 2.
14.2.2.2 Construction Methods
The preparation of the area for spreading the crushed rock shall be done in such a way as to clear all
grass, weeds, roots and any other undesirable materials.
The base layer (consisting of 50 mm and 25 mm layers in a ratio of 2 to 1) shall be uniformly spread
and compacted into a thickness of approximately 200 mm.
The upper gravel course shall consist of 20 mm clean gravel which shall be spread uniformly and
compacted to a thickness of approximately 8 cm so as to furnish a total finished thickness of 28 cm of
compacted gravel surfacing.
14.3 Roads
14.3.1 General
The Contractor will build (if they did not exist already) or rehabilitate roads for the delivery of the heav-
iest loads to the substation, and asphalted service roads when indicated on the drawings. The roads
shall be designed for transport of the transformers and other equipment.
All materials as far as possible shall be obtained from local sources and shall be subject to approval
prior to use. Mineral aggregates shall consist of natural or crushed stone, gravel or sand, shall be of
reasonably uniform quality throughout, and shall be clean and free from soft or decomposed particles,
excess clay, foreign, organic or other deleterious matter.

Lot 2 - Substations
Roads designated as "heavy load" road (that is to say, the road used for transporting the transformers
and shunt reactors) must be designed for loads of 13 tons per axle. Other roads will allow carrying
loads of 6 tons per axle.
14.3.2 Coarse aggregates for base layer
The coarse aggregate must be made of crushed stone having a high abrasion resistance and shock
resistance (LA value <35).
Crushed stone shall be hard and durable and should not contain an excessive amount of flat stones,
elongated, friable or disintegrated, dust or other undesirable matter.
Crushed stone shall have the following grading:
Size Range Sieve designation Percentage by Weight Passing the Sieve

50 mm - 25 mm 63 mm 100
50 mm 90 - 100
40 mm 35 - 70
25 mm 0-15
12,5 mm 0-5
14.3.3 Surface layer
The sieved material shall consist of non-plastic materials such as soft decomposed rock (laterite) or
gravel (other than rounded river-borne material) with Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index below 30 and 12
respectively, and not more than 10% of material passing the 75 Micron Sieve. Laterite shall be sound
and hard, of a quality not affected by weather and shall be screened at the quarry and free from impu-
rities. Only pure material shall be received by worksite. Any large blocks shall be broken to pass the
grading given below. Gravel shall be composed of large, coarse, silicious, grains, sharp and gritty to
the touch, thoroughly free from dirt and impurities.
Screenings shall conform to the grading indicated below:
Percentage by Weight
Size of Screenings Sieve designation Passing the Sieve
10 mm 10 mm 100
4.75 mm 85 - 100
150 Micron 10 - 30
14.3.4 Road Shoulder
Road Shoulder shall be either sandstone, conglomerate or locally available approved stone and shall
be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, clean, of close texture, and free from unsound material,
cracks, decay and weathering. Water absorption, when tested, shall be not more than 5%.

Lot 2 - Substations
The stone shall in the smallest dimension be equal to the thickness of the soling course with a toler-
ance of 25 mm. Soling stone shall be sufficiently flat.
14.3.5 Stone Kerb
Kerb stones shall be clean, hard sandstone, conglomerate or locally available approved stones free
from decay and weathering. The stones shall be hammer dressed on all sides. The size of the stones
shall be approximately 150 mm wide, 250 mm in depth and not less than 250 mm in length.
14.3.6 Bitumen Seal
The bitumen seal shall consist of a prime coat and two seal coats covered with stone aggregate.
The prime coat shall be a medium bitumen cutback, MC 30, applied at a rate of 1 litre per square me-
ter.
2
The first seal coat shall be straight run bitumen 80/100 applied at a rate of 1 l/m covered with 20 mm
2
type B stone aggregate at a rate of 16 I / m .
2
The second seal coat shall be straight run bitumen 80/100 applied at a rate of 0.9 I / m , covered with
2
20 mm type B stone aggregate at a rate of 10 I / m .
14.3.6.1 Stone aggregates for bitumen seal
Stone aggregates shall consist of clean, washed, dry, hard, angular, sound-crushed stones or crushed
gravel of uniform quality, free from dust, clay, flat or laminated particles and from other detritus materi-
als.
The grading requirements of the material shall be as follows:
Material size (in millimetres)

(square openings) Per cent finer by weight
Type A Type B
20 100 85 - 100
10 85 - 100 0-7
2.4 0-2 0-2
In addition, the material shall meet the following requirements: Flattening coefficient (NF P 18-561) <
30.
14.3.7 Precast Concrete Pipes or Culverts
Precast concrete pipes or culverts of an approved design shall be provided under the roads where
necessary. The size and strength of the pipes or culverts shall be adequate for the worst conditions
and be able to resist traffic loads.

Lot 2 - Substations
14.4 Civil works for power transformer
14.4.1 Transformer pit
The transformer foundations shall be designed to support the total weight of the transformers. They
will be equipped with individual oil reception pits intended to avoid basement pollution.
Its capacity will be at least 20% of the volume of the corresponding transformer.
Each transformer shall be placed on 2 longitudinal reinforced concrete beams, incorporated in the pit
of the transformer. The installation of the transformers, equipped with rolls, is carried out on 2 flat bot-
tomed rails, fixed on sealed metal plates at the top of the longitudinal beams.
The safety equipment against the fire consists of reception oil enclosures, firewalls and extinguishing
installations. For the extinguishing installations, the technology by water spray is intended to be used.
The foundations will also be provided with anchor points allowing the towing of the transformers using
pulling devices.
14.4.2 Transformer oil separator
Each power transformer shall be linked to an oil/water separator. This separator must be able to re-
ceive and contain the full amount of oil carried by the largest transformer + 20%. It shall be built in ac-
cordance to the NFC 13-200 or equivalent.
All oil recovery devices shall be watertight and be able to withstand the rapid temperature rise due to
the flow of burning oil.
The system shall be conceived such as to prevent the fire propagation to the neighboring transformers
or equipment. Fire extinguishing syphons will be used when the piping to the separator is shorter than
15 m.
The pit will be equipped with an oil/water separator, the segregated water being evacuated to a soak-
away.

Lot 2 - Substations
The pit shall be realised according to the following principle scheme:
Oil/water separator
14.5 Wall, Fencing and Gates
14.5.1 General
The substation shall be surrounded by anti-intruder chain link fencing with barbed wires.
Provision shall be made for connections to earthing circuits of the gates and fences every 15 m.
14.5.2 Anti-Intruder Chain Link Fences
Galvanized posts shall be spaced at 3.5 m maximum and shall be suitably anchored in the ground.
Galvanized chain link mesh of 3m high shall be woven from 3.55 mm diameter wire with a mesh size
of 50 mm.
Three strands of barbed wire shall be strung on the top anti-climber portion.
Strainer posts with suitable straining devices for stretching the wires taut shall be provided at every 8
bays and at each corners. The strainer posts shall be adequately anchored.
14.5.3 Gates
7 m wide gates shall be made of galvanized tubular members with a framework to ensure stiffness
and rigidity combined with light weight. They shall be single leaf horizontally sliding gates.
The gate leaf shall run on a track at ground level and shall be suitably supported against toppling
when it is in its closed position. Suitable tracks/guides shall be provided to ensure smooth travel.
The gates shall be provided with locking devices.
Pedestrian 1 m wide wickets shall be made of galvanized tubular members with a framework to ensure
stiffness and light weight. They shall be single leaf with necessary pillars and hinges. The gates shall

Lot 2 - Substations
be provided with locking devices. Barbed wire arrangements similar to that of fencing shall be provid-
ed over all gates.
Fencing and gates shall be installed according to ASTM F 567 or equivalent, unless otherwise indicat-
ed and to drawings and this specification.
Level ground surface so that space between finished ground surface elevation and bottom of fabric
does not exceed 50 mm.
14.6 Storm Water Drains
14.6.1 General
This specification covers the complete drainage systems for platforms, cable trenches, etc., and, when
necessary, storm water around the platform or outside of the fence.
14.6.2 Design Criteria
Coefficient of run off is:
• 0.5 for roads,

• 0.9 for paved areas.
• Intensity of precipitation for design will be 100 mm/hr. All flow will be gravitation with a flow velocity
of 0.6 to 1.0 meter per second.
Generally, the main drains will be rectangular opened drains with concrete bedding at the base and
plastered brick masonry on all sides with 75 mm thick concrete on top.
All necessary piping material and structures for the drainage of the platform cable ducts, transformer
pits and building shall be provided.
14.7 Concrete and Associated Works
All steel structures foundations, buildings and pads foundation for plant shall be of concrete.
All structural steelwork below ground and up to at least 150 mm above final ground level shall be pro-
tected by a minimum of 100 x 100 mm concrete cover. Minimum cover over reinforcing bars shall be
not less than 50 mm.
Foundations shall be cast on undisturbed soil, especially the bottom of the excavation, and having a
proper bearing capacity with respect to the stresses applied by the foundation.
If the soil, against which the foundation will rest, has been disturbed or becomes mucky on top due to
construction operation or any other reasons, such subsoil shall be removed and replaced by one or
more layers of compacted sand or compacted crushed rock, as directed by the Consultant.

Lot 2 - Substations
Concrete works shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of this specification and with
the Eurocode, the BS or the ACI design code or other equivalent internationally accepted specifica-
tions. The Contractor shall submit his design for approval before proceeding with the work.
He shall inform the Consultant at least 24 hours in advance, of the time and location where he intends
to pour concrete.
14.7.1 Composition of Concrete
14.7.1.1 General Mix Composition
The concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and admixtures if
approved, and as per the specified quantities. All materials shall be well mixed and brought to the
proper consistency.
The requirements of concrete shall be as follows:
• Minimum compressive strength of 15 cm length cube after 28 days: 20 Mpa

• Or measured on a 160 mm diameter cylinder after 28 days: 17 Mpa
•
3
Minimum cement content: 300 kg/m
• Maximum water cement ratio: 0.6
• Maximum slump: 7.5 cm
The detailed mix proportion shall be submitted for approval on the basis of producing concrete having
suitable workability, consistency, density, impermeability, durability, and required strength. The result
of concrete compressive strength tests shall be supplied for approval.
Adjustments in the proportion of added water shall be made to compensate for variations in the mois-
ture content or grading of the aggregates as they enter the mixer. The addition of water to compensate
for stiffening of the concrete before placing shall not be permitted. Uniformity in concrete consistency
from batch to batch shall be required.
The lean concrete of 75 mm thickness, shall be used under all foundations with the ratio of cement: fi-
ne aggregate: coarse aggregate equal to 1:3:6 (by volume).
14.7.1.2 Cement and Extenders
The Contractor shall furnish Ordinary Portland Cement (type I) in bulk or in fifty (35) kg net weight
bags.
The cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C150 or BS12 BS 146 or equivalent.
14.7.1.2.1 Coarse aggregate
Coarse aggregates shall conform to the requirements of the ASTM C33 and shall be either naturel
gravel or manufactured coarse aggregate. Coarse aggregates shall consist of well-shaped clean,
hard, dense durable rock fragments and shall not include elongated, flaky and or laminated pieces and
any other impurities or deleterious material.

Lot 2 - Substations
Coarse aggregates will be divided into classes defined by d/D, and shall meet the following conditions:
US Standard Sieve Per cent passing by weight

Designation 1) 5/12.5 mm 2) 12.5/25 mm 3) 25/50 mm
76.2 mm (3 inches) - - 100
50.8 mm (2 inches) - - 90-100
38.1 mm (1 1/2 inch) - 100 35-65
25.4 mm (1 inch) - 90-100 3-10
19.1 mm (3/4 inch) 100 60-90 0-3
12.7 mm (1/2 inch) 90-100 35.70 -
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 35-65 25-55 -
4.8 mm (no. 4) 3-10 3-10 -
2.4 mm (no. 8) 0-3 0-3 -
14.7.2 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33 and shall be natural sand or manufac-
tured sand. It shall consist of clean, hard, dense and durable rock particles, free from any harmful
amounts of dust, silt, stone powder, pieces of thin stone, alkali, organic matter and other impurities.
The fine aggregate as batched shall be well graded, and when tested shall conform to the following
limits:
Sieve mesh (mm) - US Standard Sieve Per cent passing by weight

Designation
4.8 mm (no. 4) 95 to 100

2.4 mm (no. 8) 80 to 100
1.2 mm (no. 16) 55 to 90
0.595 mm (no. 30) 30 to 70
0.297 mm (no. 50) 15 to 40
0.149 mm (no. 100) 5 to 20
0.074 mm (no. 200) 0 to 8
The fineness modulus shall be within the range of 1.8 to 3.1.
Continuity, that is the percentage in mass retained between two successive sievings, shall not be
greater than 40%.
14.7.3 Admixture
The Contractor shall use, if required, the admixture listed below in order to improve the quality of con-
crete or mortar such as workability and finish and water tightness as per the manufacturer's instruc-
tions, only with the approval of the Consultant:
• Air entrained
• Plasticizer.

Lot 2 - Substations
14.7.4 Water
Water used for both mixing and curing shall be clean and free from harmful materials such as oil, ac-
ids, alkalis, salts, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete and steel.
14.7.5 Steel Reinforcement
The Contractor shall place all the reinforcement bars in the concrete structures as shown by the ap-
proved drawings.
All steel used for reinforcement of concrete shall comply to the EURONORM 80 (BS 4449) and must
2
be High Adhesion type 2, with a minimum yield strength of 410 N/mm .
All metalwork shall be of steel grade 43, in accordance with BS 4 (Part 1), BS 4848 or an equivalent
international standard.
The reinforcement bars used for the concrete structure shall be formed bars and round bars. Diame-
ters, shapes, tensile strength, yield point, elongation and other properties, shall conform to interna-
tional standards.
Reinforcement bars shall be accurately placed and special care shall be exercised to prevent the rein-
forcement bars from being displaced when pouring concrete. Intersecting points and splices of the re-
inforcement bars shall be fixed by using suitable clips or annealed wires, the diameter of which shall
be more than 0.9 mm. The reinforcement bars in structures shall be placed and supported by the use
of mortar blocks, metal spacers, metal hangers or other satisfactory devices to ensure coverage be-
tween the reinforcement bars and the concrete surface. Bar bending schedules list shall be submitted
for approval.
14.7.6 Formwork
Forms shall be used, wherever necessary, to confine and shape the concrete to that shown by the ap-
proved drawings or as may be directed by the Consultant. Forms shall have sufficient strength to with-
stand the pressures resulting from placing and vibrating the concrete and shall be maintained rigidly in
positions. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of cement slurry from the concrete.
Each form shall be prepared so that each section may be removed individually without harming the
concrete.
All faces of formwork in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and two coats of mould oil or any other
insoluble, non-staining approved material applied before pouring concrete into the formwork.
Formwork, showing an excessive amount of distortion during any stage of construction, shall be repo-
sitioned and strengthened. Casted concrete affected by faulty formwork shall be removed entirely and
the formwork shall be corrected prior to pouring new concrete.
Forms shall not be removed without approval. As a rule, the forms shall be removed at the following
minimum times after the concrete has been poured:
• Side form of column, beam and wall: 2 days

Lot 2 - Substations
• Supporting form of floors and beam: 14 days
Before re-using, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails/bolts removed, holes suitably
plugged, joints repaired and warped lumber resized to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
14.7.7 Batching and Mixing
The Contractor shall provide equipment’s, and shall maintain and operate the equipment to produce
the required quality of concrete.
When any mixer produces unsatisfactory results, the Consultant may force the Contractor to increase
the mixing time or repair the mixing blades.
The feeding sequence of materials into the mixer shall be subject to approval. All concrete shall be
machine mixed.
14.7.8 Dewatering
The whole Works shall be constructed in the dry and the Contractor shall keep all excavations free
from water, whatever the source or cause may be, and shall properly deal with and dispose of water
by use of sufficient temporary works, plant, and appliances so as to ensure that the whole Works is
executed in a satisfactory dry and safe manner. Prices for the excavation shall include all dewatering
operations.
14.7.9 Placing of Concrete
Prior to pouring concrete, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant the mixing ratios, the charac-
teristics of each concrete ingredient, the concrete pouring schedule, casting equipment, and method of
execution of work. Concrete shall not be poured until all formwork, surface treatment, reinforcements
and other parts to be embedded parts have been inspected and approved.
Concrete that has not been casted 30 minutes after being discharged from the mixer shall be rejected.
Concrete shall be placed with a vertical drop not greater than 1.0 m except where suitable equipment
is provided to prevent segregation or if specifically authorized.
Concrete which has segregated during transportation shall be remixed.
After the surface of the unformed construction joint has been cleaned and that the casting of concrete
has been approved, the surface of the unformed construction joint shall be covered with a layer of
mortar approximately 1.5 cm thick. The Contractor shall place concrete upon the fresh mortar before it
begins to set.
The mortar shall be of richer cement content than concrete without coarse aggregate.
Concrete shall be poured directly in its final position and shall not be allowed to flow such as to permit
lateral movement or cause segregation of the coarse aggregates, mortar or water from the concrete
mass.

Lot 2 - Substations
Immediately after each pour, every layer of concrete shall be consolidated to the maximum practicable
density so that it fits against all surfaces or reinforcement bars, embedded fixtures and against all cor-
ners of the forms. Consolidation of concrete shall be by electric or pneumatic power-driven, immer-
sion-type vibrators or other approved means.
14.7.10 Concrete Construction Tolerance
Variation in alignment, grade, and dimensions of the structures from the established alignment grade
and dimensions shall be remedied, or if it is not possible, it shall be removed and replaced by the Con-
tractor.
14.7.11 Repair of Concrete
The Contractor shall repair the imperfections of the concrete surfaces and the irregularities which do
not meet the specified dimensions. Repairing work shall be performed and completed within 24 hours
after the removal of forms, in accordance with the Consultant instructions.
14.7.12 Curing
Before pouring concrete, the contractor must obtain approval for the concrete’s protection and cure
methods, and the facilities to be used. Once the concrete has been poured, it will be protected and
treated in strict accordance with the approved methods. In the absence of any other method, the con-
crete will be cured continuously with water for a minimum period of 10 days or any other period ap-
proved.
14.7.13 Tests
The Contractor shall make all necessary tests to determine the mix ratios of each type of concrete, in-
cluding aggregate tests.
In order to control the concrete quality, the Contractor shall perform the tests described below:
Slump tests will be performed every day on the first three mixed batches. In addition, slump tests will
be performed on every 40 meter cubes of concrete casted in any one day. The slump will be deter-
mined in accordance with ASTM C143.
Two sets of three concrete compression test cubes (150 mm x 150 mm x 1500) or cylinders (160 mm
in diameter) will be made every day concrete is poured. The first set will be tested after 7 days, and
second will be tested after 28 days.
Concrete test cubes or cylinders will be made, cured, stored and tested in accordance with the ASTM
C39.

Lot 2 - Substations
14.8 Cable ducts
The detailed design of the cable trenches, cable pipes, etc., shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Cable trenches shall be covered reinforced concrete.
Within the Control Building, trench covers shall be chequered plates with steel frames and shall be
galvanized. Outdoors, the covers shall be made of reinforced concrete and strong enough to carry any
load or traffic.
Covers shall have adequate lifting devices and be light enough to be lifted by one or two people.
The size of cable trenches shall be designed by the Contractor while taking into account:
• The quantity and size of the cables + 30% reserve for future cables
• The bending radius of the cables, especially middle voltage power cables
• The safe segragation between the cables of different functions, especially between power and con-
trol cables
• The possibility to install or remove cables without having to displace other cables, during mainte-
nance, changes or retrofitting
• Enough space to allow working in the main cable trenches
• Cable must be laid in a manner that their error free identification and allocation are possible at any
time.
The main cable ducts shall be realized according to the type 1 and/or 2, as follows:

Lot 2 - Substations
The reinforced concrete or heavy duty PVC pipe of minimum 150 millimetre diameter shall be installed
between the cable trench sump pits and the nearest drainage sumps to drain the water from the cable
trenches.
The Contractor shall provide a non-metallic conduit for the cables from the main trenches to the steel
structures or equipment foundations.
Wall penetration shall be closed by the mean of fire-resistant sealings.
15. Buildings
15.1 General
This specification applies to:
• control building, as per Annex 6

• personnel housings (Gisagara), as per Annex 7
• Guard house (Ngozi), as per Annex 8.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all buildings and / or extensions of buildings, which corre-
sponds, if any, to the following main works:
• Buildings structure of and their foundations,

• Interior work,
• Steelwork,
• Painting,
• Sanitary facilities,
• Masonry and finishes,
• Carpentry,
• Doors,
• Windows,
• All other civil works,
• All lighting systems and low power distribution,
• Air conditioning and ventilation,
• Ducts for electrical cables,
• Junction boxes and electrical socket or outlets for equipment,
• A fire alarm for the safety of the substation.
The dimensions indicated in Annex 6 and 8 are for information only. Some rooms might need to be
modified, especially the 30 kV switchgear room at the Ngozi substation.
The housings shall be realizes as per Annex 7.

Lot 2 - Substations
15.2 Doors, windows, glazing
The Contractor shall furnish and install doors and windows, according to the approved drawings. Prior
to the execution of the work, the Contractor shall submit full details and description of the windows,
doors, etc.
All materials to be used shall be approved. Hardware such as hinges, padlocks, handles and door
closers shall be heavy duty anodized aluminium of excellent quality. Samples of hardware shall be
submitted. Locks and door-closers shall be installed according to the instructions of the Consultant.
Caulking compound shall be of synthetic resin with sufficient weather tightness, and shall be applied
neatly, precisely and tightly around the exterior doors and windows.
The best quality of anodized aluminium framing shall be used for the construction of all doors and
windows. For the Battery Rooms a special acid resistant paint or treatment shall be applied on all me-
tallic surfaces.
All windows should be fitted with external nets to prevent mosquitoes or other bugs from coming in,
with corrosion resistant quality.
All windows shall have approved burglar bars, and approved means of opening/locking.
All sheet glass shall be at least 5 mm thick, plain glass. It shall be of the best quality, free of uneven-
ness, stain or bubbles, and where so required, figured glass shall be used. The sealant used to fix the
glass shall be properly mixed and spread out neatly so as to obtain an even surface.
All doors shall be lockable. Doors and gates shall have security locks and a master key system. The
Contractor shall provide three keys for each lock, clearly labelled, and three master keys for each sub-
station.
15.3 Masonry and finishing works
15.3.1 General
The Contractor shall perform carpentry, masonry and finishing work. Drawings, details and samples of
materials, shall be submitted for approval.
15.3.2 Mortar and Plaster
Mortar: the mortar shall be composed of cement and fine aggregates identical to those found in con-
crete. Water shall be clean and free of impurities, such as iron, salt, sulfur and organic matters.
Admixtures: Mortar plasticizers shall be mixed with mortar to replace hydrated lime. The quality and
quantity of plasticizers shall be approved beforehand.

Lot 2 - Substations
Mix proportion: Mortar and plasticizer shall be proportional by volume in accordance with the following
requirements:
• Cement: 1 part (by volume).

• Sand: 3 parts (by volume).
• Plasticizer: in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Water: sufficient to make a plastic mix which can be trowelled and will develop a complete bond.
15.3.3 Erection
Bricks shall be laid plumb, true to the line, level and in accurately spaced courses. They shall be laid in
running bond with stretchers breaking joints with the course below or in English bond.
Full-size bricks shall be used to the greatest possible extent instead of cutting or breaking bricks.
Anchors: Bricks’ masonry shall be tied to adjoining columns with 6 mm diameter reinforcing bars ex-
tending themselves in the masonry of at least 20 cm and spaced at 25 cm center to center unless oth-
erwise indicated.
Horizontal and Vertical Bracing: Reinforced concrete transoms and mullions shall be provided in walls
so that no panel exceeds 3.00 meters in length and 2.5 meters in height. The size of reinforced con-
crete transoms and mullions shall be at least 200 mm wide x 150 mm high with four of 10 mm diame-
ter reinforcing bars and stirrups at a spacing of 15 centimetres.
All completed works (Plastered or non-plastered) must be correct, plumb or level, with a maximum tol-
erance of 3 mm to 1 m.
15.4 Floor and cables duct
The floor will be made of concrete and covered with ceramic tiles.
15.4.1 Floor Tiles
Floor tiles should be uniform in size, shape, colour and the finished surface should have rounded cor-
ners. Tiles must be of heavy duty quality such as to endure heavy loads, scratches and high wear and
tear.
Such as to prevent accidents due to slippery floors resulting from grease or oil drops, all tiles must be
covered with an anti-slip treatment or covered with some anti-slip material or be of an anti-slip type.
Moreover, floor tiles in the battery room must be acid resistant.
The choice of size, colours, and aspect of the tiles will be according to the Employer choice, the Con-
tractor shall make proposals and provide samples to the Employer.
The tiles joints shall be parallel to the entire surface.
Joints and fittings shall be prepared with great care to ensure they are tight.

Lot 2 - Substations
Joints shall not exceed 3 mm.
The spaces between the tiles are to be filled with slips of the same colour as the tiles or ,if different,
approved beforehand. Cutting tiles should be avoided as much as possible. However, if necessary the
minimum cutting is the half of a whole tile. Cutting should be done carefully, by a suitable tile cutter to
obtain sharp edges and straight cut.
All pipes and sheaths covered with tiles must be placed as per the drawings and the approval of the
Consultant must be obtained before covering any facilities with tiles.
All cable ducts and all plumbing must be approved by the Consultant before beginning the tile installa-
tion.
15.4.2 Organization of cables ducts
The following principals shall apply:
In the electrical rooms and control bays rooms: a concrete cable channel will be installed on the floor
and covered with galvanized metal sheets, the minimal dimensions are 0.8 m in width and 1 m in
deep. This channel must extend itself under the electrical panels, control panels, and protection pan-
els.
All cable channels shall be large enough to allow placing the cables on galvanized cable tray and to
allow workers to access the duct for future maintenance, extensions or rehabilitation works.
MV rooms: A crawlspace will be realized over the entire surface of the MV room to facilitate cable en-
try into the building. The working height will be at least 1.6 m (may be less than under the beams).
In the other rooms (offices, sanitary...): cable ducts (pipes, sheath) in sufficient numbers and size of
will be laid on the floor before pouring concrete as well, as inside the walls, for all low voltage, control
and communication cables.
Cables coming from outside the building shall be protected from water, and a pit (low point) with a
drain shall be provided at each entrance, on the outside of the building along the wall
All cables pipes and ducts between rooms, or between rooms and outside of the building shall be
sealed (airtight and watertight) at the end of the commissioning, this shall be taken into account by the
design of the building and sealing technical solution must noted on the drawings.
15.5 Cement plasters
All joints in masonry shall be raked to a depth of 12 mm with a hooked tool designed for this purpose
when the mortar is still fresh and in all cases within 48 hours after casting. The surface to be plastered
shall be washed with fresh clean water free from all dirt, loose material, grease, etc. and thoroughly
wetted for 6 hours before the plastering work begins. Concrete surfaces to be plastered will, however,
be kept dry. The wall shouldn’t be too wet but only damp at the time of plastering. The damping shall
be uniform so as to get a uniform bond between the plaster and the wall.

Lot 2 - Substations
The mortar proportions shall be as specified. After the dry cement has been thoroughly mixed and on-
ly enough water to obtain a workable consistency should be added. The quality of the water, sand,
and cement shall be as specified. Well mixed mortar must be used immediately and must not be al-
lowed to lay around for more than 30 minutes after being mixed with water.
Curing of plaster shall start as soon as it is hard enough not to be damaged by the curing process.
Curing shall be done by continuously applying water in a fine spray and shall be carried out for at least
7 days.
• Interior plaster
This plaster shall be laid in a single coat of 13 mm thickness. The mortar shall be dashed on the
prepared surface with a trowel and spread evenly with a trowel on the entire surface. Interior plas-
ter shall be carried out on jambs, lintel and sill faces, top and undersides, etc. as shown on the ap-
proved drawing or as directed by the Consultant.
• Exterior plaster
Exterior plaster work shall be carried out in 2 layers, the first layer being 14 mm thick and the sec-
ond layer being 6 mm thick. The first layer shall be dashed against the prepared surface with a
trowel to obtain an even surface. The second layer shall then be applied with a trowel, unless oth-
erwise asked by the Consultant, within 24 hours. The finished product should have an even and
uniform surface.
15.6 Painting
Paintwork shall include the preparation of surfaces, the protection of surfaces not to be painted, the
furnishing and application of paint materials, and all contingencies.
Surfaces to be painted shall include:
• all exposed ungalvanized interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces,

• exposed galvanized metal sheet surfaces of scuppers and downspouts,
• exposed concrete masonry, and plastered surfaces,
• surfaces of shop-primed equipment and materials,
• exposed surfaces of galvanized sheet metal duct,
• abraded or damaged areas of shop finished painted surfaces of equipment, etc., and
• any carpentry where painted or varnish finish is required.
Exposed surfaces of galvanized electrical conduits, conduit boxes, and fittings shall be painted only
when adjacent to painted parts of the building structure or equipment. When doing so, only painting
material and colours matching the adjacent surfaces should be used.
Materials:
A list of painting materials and colours to be applied to the specified surfaces shall be submitted for
approval. Surfaces in the battery room must be painted with acid resistant paints.
Paint systems:

Lot 2 - Substations
All shop primed surfaces shall be spot primed on site, or otherwise repaired as directed by the Con-
sultant. Galvanized surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned, etched, or otherwise prepared for painting
in strict conformity with the paint manufacturer’s instructions. Any chemical treatment on any galva-
nized surface shall be thoroughly rinsed with clean water.
Metal surfaces:
Except for zinc galvanized surfaces, all metal surfaces shall be painted. One coat of rust-resistance
paint and two coats of finish paint shall be applied. Parts embedded in concrete will not be painted.
The material and the colour of the paint shall be approved.
Concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces:
One prime paint coat and several finish paint coats must be applied to these surfaces. The materials
and colour of the paint shall be approved.
New concrete surfaces to be painted must undergo a minimum cure of 28 days and coatings must
have aged for least two months before being painted.
The contractor shall clean all slabs, bricks and concrete blocks off any painted dirt, mortar splash, de-
posits, dust or other foreign matter.
Cracks, small holes and imperfections appearing on the surface of the coating must be corrected by
means of a coating and the repaired surface must be sanded so as to be flush with adjacent surfaces.
Painting will be performed as follows:
• Masonry:
– Primer paint: paint for masonry resistant to alkali,
– Finishing coat paint: vinyl acetate emulsion.
• Wooden frames, and doors:

– Woods surfaces must be planed or sanded to remove all tool marks.
– All holes, cracks, and depressions must be cleaned and resealed with a wood filler without
shrinking. When it becomes workable, it must be sanded so as to be flush with adjacent surfac-
es.
Painting must be carried out as follows:
♦ Primer: plasticized nitrocellulose to fill the wood pores
♦ Topcoat painting: nitrocellulose plasticized.
15.7 Sanitary fixtures
The Contractor shall provide sanitary fixtures for the control building, using products of high quality.
The type, size, colour, etc. shall be submitted for approval.
These facilities include 2 showers, 1 water heaters (with a capacity of 150 liters), 2 European type
WC, 2 washbasins, all hoses and connections for the hot and cold water system and to the drainage
system.

Lot 2 - Substations
15.8 Roof covering
The work shall include the supply and installation of the composite roof including all additional sup-
ports made of structural steel components. It shall include the necessary flashings.
The Contractor shall provide any steelwork necessary for the support of flashings, edge fixings, etc., to
comply with the sheeting manufacturer requirements.
The roofing and cladding shall consist of an outer profiled steel sheet insulated with an inner rigid
foam lining board.
The steel sheets shall be 0.80 mm thick, hot dip galvanized with a minimum coating weight of 275
2
g/m total, both sides. This shall be treated with a PVC coating with a nominal thickness of 150 mi-
crons total, both sides.
The sheets shall be laid with 200 mm end laps and double corrugation side laps away from the pre-
vailing wind. The sheets shall be fixed to light gauge steel purlins with galvanized coach screws and
seating washers.
Holes for screws shall be carefully drilled in the ridges of the corrugations. Great care shall be exer-
cised to avoid damage and disfiguration to the surface coating of the sheets. At eaves and exposed
edges, the corrugations shall be closed with purpose made corrugation closers.
The insulation lining board shall consist of a non-flammable insulated foam core sandwiched between
two layers of aluminum foil so as to provide, taking into account the outer steel sheets, a "U" value of
2
0.8 W/m /K at its thinnest point. The lining board shall be installed in strict accordance with the manu-
facturer’s instructions.
The colours, from the manufacturer’s standard range, shall be selected by the Consultant.
15.9 False ceilings
False ceilings will be installed in all rooms of the control building except the battery and switchgear
rooms.
The Contractor shall prepare implementation drawings for all plant raised floors and suspended ceil-
ings.
The drawings must clearly specify the dimensions, fastening methods, joint and anchors to use for in-
stallation.
The Contractor shall submit its drawings to the Consultant for approval at least three months before
the actual start of work.
Areas to be equipped with false ceilings must be satisfactorily enclosed and protected from the weath-
er elements, two months before work begins and throughout it.
For the installation of false ceilings, the workspaces must be dry and equipped.

Lot 2 - Substations
Ceilings sound insulation will be made of strips of aluminum members and panels having a thickness
of 0.55 mm. They should be perforated and lined on the inside with mineral wool padding having a
minimum thickness of 12 mm. The members will be coated with a white enamel paint.
Non-load bearing insulation panels should be installed. They will contribute to heat resistance.
Work will incorporate all installation and connection constraints, in particular, those related to ventila-
tion between roof plates and the ceiling.
If plates are used, they must be cut and installed at level, and ventilation slots shall be carved to en-
sure proper ventilation of the buildings.
The height between the ceiling and the floor (being completed), shall not be less than 2600 mm.
15.10 Workmanship
All surfaces shall be free from moisture, dust, grease and dirt and rubbed down smooth.
All plaster shall be free from efflorescence and treated with one coat of petrifying liquid, approved
sealer or alkali primer if required. Hard wall plaster shall be glasspapered before decorating.
The Contractor shall repair any defects to decorated surfaces. Metalwork shall be scraped free of rust
before priming and painting.
Galvanized iron and steel shall be cleaned down to remove manufacturer’s ammoniated di-chromate
protective covering before priming and painting.
Coated pipes are to be cleaned down, stopped and primed with one coat of aluminum primer before
painting.
All knots in woodwork are to be treated to prevent bleeding. Large or loose knots to be cut out and be
replaced with sound wood, or cut back and filled. Small knots to be treated with two thin coats of Shel-
lac in methylated spirits. Woodwork to be glasspapered to a smooth surface with all sharp arises re-
moved, all cracks, crevices, holes, etc., to be scraped out, primed as described and stopped with hard
stopping, faced up and rubbed down to an even surface and finished as later specified.
Every coat of paint must be a good covering coat and must dry hard and be well rubbed down to a
smooth surface before the next coat is applied.
15.11 Drinking Water and Sewage
Based on the water analysis, the water treatment equipment shall meet the drinking water requirement
recommendations of the WHO, with a free chlorine content at consumer delivery of 0.1 mg / I.
3
The water distribution system will produce 5 m per day, and will include:
• one borehole,
• one tank,
• one water treatment equipment,

Lot 2 - Substations
• a distribution network, and

• one wastewater treatment system.
15.11.1 Borehole
The work will include:
• The completion of drilling (depth will be subject to approval),

• The flow test,
• Analyses of water, and
• Supply, installation, and connection of a submersible pump (characteristics to be adapted accord-
ing to the survey results).
15.11.2 Buffer tank

3
The 16 m tank done in masonry and fully closed (covered) will conform to the rules of construction of
the AFNOR and the recommendations of the SNCT69 Code, and shall be provided with:
• a drain pipe with a gate valve,

• a vent and a manhole,
• a visual indicator, and
• the following level detectors:
– high and low levels for pump control, and
– very high and very low levels for the alarm.
This tank will be also be used for the fire-fighting system of the power transformer (fog).
It shall be fed by the water caught from the well and the rainwater collected from the roof of the control
building.
15.11.3 Production equipment and distribution of drinking water
The water pressurization set will include:
• a water pressurization set mounted on an anti-vibration base, fully equipped for automatic opera-
tion,
• two electrical vertical centrifugal pumps with an electric motor IP55,
• food grade bladder tank with drain and precharge device,
• instrumentation:
– Pressure switches for the protection against the low inlet pressure, for the start and stop of the
pumps, and
– Discharge gauge.
• an electrical control panel equipped for automatic running and automatic changeover of pumps.
The water treatment system will include:
• a chlorination equipment with a metering pump (adjustable flow) and polyethylene tank,
• a sodium carbonate injection equipment similar to the chlorination equipment, with control package,

Lot 2 - Substations
• a complete flint filter in galvanized steel with 3-way valves in cupronickel, and the burden of flint,
•
3
a flow indicator for setting a rate of less than 1 m /h by means of a diaphragm,
• a flow switch for control of water treatment equipment,
• a galvanized steel tank to ensure the required time of chlorine / water contact,
• a manual operated carbon activated filter for tastes, smells and colours treatments, complete with
mounted valves, pressure gauge and a load of activated carbon,
• an electrical control panel, and
• galvanized pipes.
Based on the analysis, any other treatment systems required, in order for the water to meet the porta-
bility recommendations of the WHO.
The operation of this unit will be manual. The cleaning of the flint filter and activated carbon filter will
be done by backwashing,
The NaCIO injection tubes must be made of PVC,
The treatment plant package will be epoxy painted after being sanded.
The valves will be in cupronickel. All pipes used from the borehole to the point of consumption of the
water distribution network must meet a recognized international standard, approved by the Consultant.
They must all be buried and adequately protected to withstand loads and passing vehicles. Isolation
valves will be installed to isolate each consumer.
15.11.4 Wastewater treatment
The wastewater treatment system will be studied in order to meet the environmental discharge stand-
ards of the WHO’s recommendations.
It will consist of a septic tank for all types of wastewater, and be large enough to contain sewage from
the substation and operators’ houses.
The septic tank must be followed by a septic drain field, which will spread the septic tank’s output un-
derground; it will secure the wastewater treatment by microorganisms living in the soil and a clean
evacuation into the deeper subsurface water.
All pipes used for connecting buildings to the treatment system must meet a recognized international
standard approved by the Consultant. They must all be buried and adequately protected to withstand
loads and passing vehicles.
15.11.5 Testing
Pumps: testing and routine testing such as dielectric motor tests, checking the direction rotation of the
pumps, measuring the pump flow.
Tanks: hydraulic pressure test of 1.5 times the minimum service pressure.
Measuring and signalization devices: testing of level detectors, pressure switches, alarms, and infor-
mation protection and transmission.

Lot 2 - Substations
15.11.6 Special tools and spare parts
Filter: a motor, a set of seals, a solenoid valve of the washing circuit.
Pumps: one wheel of each type, an electric motor of each type consumables for one year of operation.
15.12 Air Conditioning and Ventilation
The Contractor will design, supply, install and test the ventilation and air conditioning systems to be
installed in each room of the building, except for the lavatories and for the switchgear room, with re-
spect to following design conditions:
Room / Location Dry bulb temperature (°C) Relative humidity (%)

Relay 25 50
Control / telecommunication 25 50
Distribution AC and DC 25 50
Battery (2) 25 -
Equipment 25 50
Toilet (1) - -
Storage(1) - -
Office 25 50
Entrance Guard House (1) 25 50
(1) Fan only.
(2) No recirculation of the air and at least 4-6 renewals of the total air volume per hour .
Maximum noise level: 50 dB
In addition to the above conditions, it must take into account the heat generated by the equipment.
Air conditioning must be of type "split system" (compressors separate of blowing batteries and in-
stalled outside the building).
Reclosable air inlets and outlets must be provided to allow the access of fresh air into the offices.
The air conditioning system shall be able to ensure an internal temperature 25°C for an outside tem-
perature of 40 °C and consider the heat generated by all equipments running.
Adequate ventilation of the room without air conditioning must be provided. The air will enter near the
floor and exit near the ceiling. Ventilation will ensure an air renewal rate greater than 5 times the room
volume per hour.
All openings for ventilation must be equipped with corrosion resistant external nets, to prevent small
insects from coming in.

Lot 2 - Substations
15.13 Furniture and miscellaneous equipment's
Specifications such as colours and shapes of the furniture will be agreed with the Employer. The Con-
tractor is asked to supply as much equipment as possible from local suppliers.
The following furniture must be provided for each of the rooms listed:
15.13.1 Control building
Control room / relay area
Designation Quantity
Operating console with drawers 1
Swivel chair with 5 wheels 2

Visitor chairs 4
Drawing cabinet 1
Documentation cabinet 3
Archives cabinet 2
Table (relay area) 2
Standard office
Desk with drawers 2
Swivel chair with 5 wheels 2
Visitor chairs 3
Documentation cabinet 2
Desk lamp 1
Store and maintenance room
Storage shelves for heavy pieces 2
Storage shelves for small 2

supplies
Consumable supply cabinet 1
Table 1
Chair 2
Aluminium step stool 2 m 1

Lot 2 - Substations
Battery room
Cabinet for accessories 2
Eye-wash station 1
Decontamination shower 1
15.13.2 Guard house
Storage shelves for small 1
supplies
Table 1
Chair 2
Board 1
Key cabinet 1
15.13.3 Housings (Gisagara)
If not otherwise stated, the equipment shall be suitable for 6 persons.
Entrance area
• Welcome mat (for outside the door)
• Small area rug (for just inside the door)
• Wall hooks for jackets, keys, etc.
• Small table or bench for shoe storage
• Lamp, if there’s no other light source by the door
Living room
• Couch and chairs
• Coffee table
• Bookshelves
• Television
• Stand for TV
• Lamp(s)
Kitchen
• Silverware
• Silverware organizer (drawer insert)
• Dishes (e.g. plates, glasses, mugs, bowls, serving platters, etc.)
• Trash and recycling cans
• Pots and pans
• Oven mitts
• Spatulas, ladles, whisks, etc.
• Container for countertop storage of spatulas, ladles, whisks, etc.

Lot 2 - Substations
• Dish towels
• Dish drying rack
• Measuring cups and spoons
• Mixing bowls
• Bottle opener and corkscrew
• Cutting boards
• Toaster or toaster oven
• Microwave
• Coffee maker
• Kettle or hotpot
• Hand mixer
• Good, sharp knives (at least one large chef’s knife and a small paring knife)
• Serving spoon
• Colander
• Additional free-standing shelves or storage, as needed (e.g. metal shelf units)
• Trash can
• Small area rug
Dining area
• Table and chairs
Bathroom
• Shower curtain (and rings to hold it up)
• Shower caddy
• Toilet brush
• Bath mat(s)
• Trash can
Bedroom
• Bed 140 x 200 (parents), 90 x 200 (children)
• Mattress and box spring
• Night stand
• Lamp
• Curtains
• Desk
• Chair for desk
Miscellaneous
• Trash bags
• Vacuum cleaner
• Small broom and dustpan
• Extension cords
• Large plastic bins or other storage
• Fans
• Light bulbs
• Fire alarm

Lot 2 - Substations
15.14 Miscellaneous materials and tools
Materials and equipment listed below will be provided in each substation by the contractor:
Designation Unit Quantity

Special tools
Tools for Electrician as per list hereunder U 2
Tools for Mechanic as per list hereunder 2
HV cable termination tools including hydraulic crimping tool up to 630mm2 cables U 1
Secondary Injection Kit for Protective relays testing up to 250V AC 30A with two
U 1
sets of Current outputs including all accessories such as a laptop, software etc…
Ratiometer for Power transformer, VT, CT test with accessories U 1
Winding resistance meter with accessories U 1
Digital Insulation resitance tester up to 5KV DC with timer set 1
Infrared temperature tester (-20oC to 1350oC) U 2
Schmidt hammer U 1
Laser Rangefinder to measure Power line to ground clearances 2
Emergency Equipment
Pharmacy U 1
Stretcher U 1
Emergency blanket U 3
Fire fighting equipment
3 kg powder extinguisher U 6
Water spray extinguisher U 3
CO2 extinguisher type trolley on wheels with 30 kg of CO2+ pipes 1
Operating equipment
Markup 1 m (i.e. 2 bays 220 kV) 160
Device for grounding and short circuit of phases, including sticks:
• Tubing (if necessary) 6
• Cables 6
• Feeder 30 and 15 kV 2
2
Earthing cable: insulated copper braid 75mm , 10 ml 20
No voltage Checking apparatus with sticks:
• 220 kV (Gisagara and Ngozi) 1
• 110kV (Kigoma and Gitega) 1
• 30 kV for internal and external use 2
Devices for clamping of earthing cables 10
Insulating stool:
• HV 1
• MV 2

Lot 2 - Substations
Designation Unit Quantity

Insulating gloves:
• HV 12
• MV 12
• LV 12
Triangular red flags 12
Green triangular flags 12
Flags "Danger of death" in English and Kinyarwanda 5
Signs:
• " Danger of death" in English and Kinyarwanda 44
• " Under Voltage Powered installations"
• " Limit of working area" 4
Signalization cone 10
Set of normalized regulatory notice: Instruction on the dangers posed
by electric current, Plates "Danger of death". Plates "Address and phone number of
4
Operation", Plate designation of the Substation to place on one of the pillars of the
entrance gate.
Set of 40 Security locks, with 1 storage cabinet 2
Plates "Forbidden to used, apparatus lockout" 20
Plates "Very High Voltage, No Passing, be aware of ..." to be set at regular intervals
10
on the external side of the Fences
The Tool set for Electrician will be composed but not limited to the following items enclosed and well-
arranged or slotted in a hard-wearing , hard-shell construction with aluminium frame and circular buff-
er protection tool box/briefcase:
Item Qty1 Specification

Cable Insulation Stripper 1 160 mm
Combination Pliers (1pc of each type) 1 180 mm
Snipe Nose Side Cutting Pliers, Radio Pliers (1pc of each type) 1 160 mm
Diagonal Cutter 1 160 mm
Manual cable cutter up to 300mm2 4X cores cable 1
Cable Knife 1 185 mm
Dismantling Tool 1 165 mm
Electrician’s Chisel 1 250 x 10 mm
Screwdrivers for slotted screws, 160i (1pc of each type) 1 0,4 x 2,5 x 80 mm
Screwdrivers for cross recessed Phillips screws, 162i PH 1 PH1 x 80 mm
Screwdrivers for cross recessed Phillips screws, 162i PH 1 PH2 x 100 mm
Screwdrivers for slotted screws, 334 (1pc of each type) 1 1,0 x 6,0 x 125 mm
Screwdrivers for slotted screws, 334(1pc of each type) 1 1,2 x 6,5 x 150 mm
Voltage Detector, single-pole, 1 0,5 x 3,0 x 70 mm
Locksmith’s hammer 1 300 g
Chipping hammer 1 800 g

Lot 2 - Substations
Flat brush 1 40 mm
Meter ruler (yardstick) 1 2m
Junior Hacksaw 1 150 x 240 mm
Milliamp meter (Fluke type preferably) 1
Professional Digital Multimeter (Fluke type preferably) 1
set of sockets and ratchets (8- 22 mm) 1
10 mixed spanners (8- 22 mm) 1
tape measure 1
adjustable spanner 1
Set of Allen key up to 10mm 1
The Tool set for Mechanic will be Metric type and will be composed but not limited to the following
items enclosed and well-arranged or slotted in a Fitters roller container case:
• Combination Wrenches up to 60mm

• Open End Wrenches up to 60mm
• Ring Wrenches up to 60mm
• Socket Sets up to 60mm
• Set of Allen keys up to 19mm
• All types of Pliers
• All types of Cutters
• Precision Tools
• Measuring Tools
• Hammers
• Chisels & Punches
• Hacksaws
• Multimeters
15.15 Piping Work
All plumbing and drainage work shall be executed strictly in accordance with the local laws and regula-
tions. Plumbing works shall be carried out by appropriately licensed personnel.
All sheet iron to be approved brand galvanized and of the thickness specified and shall conform to
BS 2989. Galvanized iron nails shall be used for galvanized sheet iron where required.
Flashing shall be properly lapped at angles and passings. Flashing shall be dressed 38 mm into
grooves and 6 mm up at back and wedge with rolled edges. No screws or nails shall penetrate the
gutters or flashings. Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction under changes of tempera-
ture.
Plastic pipes and fittings shall conform to the relevant national or regional standards and shall be fixed
including brackets in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Cast iron pipes and fittings shall conform to BS 416. Heavy-duty cast iron pipes and fittings shall con-
form to BS 1130. All pipes and fittings are to be coated with an approved preservative. Pipes are to be
joined with gaskin and caulked with molten lead.

Lot 2 - Substations
Steel pipes and fittings shall conform to BS 143 and the relevant national or regional standards and
shall be galvanized. Pipes are to be joined with hemp and red lead. Medium quality pipes shall be
used. Pipes shall be fixed to roof timbers with stout galvanized clips and to walls with galvanized
hinged holder bats with brass pins at not exceeding one metre centers, built into walls with cement
mortar. Pipes shall be fastened to soffits on 6 x 32 mm mild steel strip fixed around pipes with 6 mm
galvanized bolts with ends split and flanged and cut pinned to concrete soffits.
Copper pipes shall conform to BS 659; BS 1306 and BS 1386 shall be solid drawn seamless supplied
in straight random lengths, round clean, smooth, free from internal or external grooving, other defects,
and deleterious film.
All copper pipes carrying hot water are to be supported so as to allow free movement for expansion
and contraction, particularly at the end of long runs where a change of direction takes place. Fix tubing
to walls with brass hinged holder bats with pins at not exceeding one meter centers built into the wall
with cement mortar. Fix to soffits as described for steel pipes.
Fittings and couplings etc., for use with copper pipes, shall be of the manipulative compression joint
type or other approved type. All fittings, etc., are to be made from suitable corrosion resistant copper
alloy, sound and clean, without flaws or laminations and full bore throughout. All fittings and their com-
ponent parts shall be capable of withstanding an internal hydraulic pressure of 2.20 Mpa without
showing signs of leakage or other defects.
Traps shall be brass, copper, polyethene or cast iron. Generally traps to shower trays, baths, lavatory
basins, drinking water foundations and domestic sinks shall be tubular copper to BS 1184 of the same
size as the waste outlet of the fitment, and shall have tails to suit the waste pipe to which they con-
nect.
Stainless steel to be the austenitic type and shall comply with BS 970 EN58 series and unless other-
wise described, to 0.9 mm thick in 18/8 quantity and shall be entirely non-magnetic.
Brassware is to be of the best quality and equal to the samples approved. All stop valves, bib taps,
hose union bib taps and pillar taps shall comply with BS 1010 or SABS 226 and shall have washer
plates so secured as to lift with the spindle.
Cold-water taps shall in every case be fixed at the right-hand side of sanitary fittings.
All ball valves shall comply with BS 1212 and shall be of sizes and for the pressure indicated or speci-
fied. The loose orifice seats shall be of nylon for sizes 15 and 20 mm and bronze for sizes 25, 40 and
50 mm. Ball valves shall be supplied and fixed complete with copper floats to BS 1968 or with plastic
floats not less robust and having a lifting effect not less than a BS 1968 copper float for the same duty.
No holes shall be cut through reinforced concrete unless approved by the Consultant. Where possible,
sleeves shall be cast into concrete. Where drainpipes pass through walls, etc., they shall be arched
over to prevent any loads being transmitted from the structure.
All pipes shall be buried underground. For outdoor pipes, the minimum depth under the finished sur-
face shall be 0.50 m with a minimum of 0.20 m of sand cover.
All sheet metalwork shall be carefully and efficiently inspected and tested on completion and left per-
fectly watertight.

Lot 2 - Substations
All defective work shall be taken out and replaced.
At the completion of the plumbing and draining installations, clean down and flush pipes, traps, etc.,
wash sanitary fittings and test the whole to the satisfaction of the Local Authority and the Consultant
including making good and re-testing until found perfect. The Contractor shall provide all necessary
equipment to carry out any tests required.
15.16 Landscaping
After completing each substation the Contractor shall leave the site clean free of all rubbish, building
rubble, etc. and the soil shall be leveled or terraced and covered with 10 cm thickness of rolled gravel
(2 to 4 cm in diameter).

Lot 2 - Substations
FORMS AND PROCEDURES
Form of Completion Certificate
Date:
o
Loan/Credit N :
o
IFB N :
[Name of Contract]
To: [Name and address of Contractor]
Dear Sirs,
Pursuant to GC Clause 4.8 (Completion of the Facilities) of the General Conditions entered into be-
tween yourselves and the Employer dated [date], relating to the [brief description of the Facilities], we
hereby notify you that the following part(s) of the Facilities was (were) complete on the date specified
below, and that, in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Employer hereby takes over the
said part(s) of the Facilities, together with the responsibility for care and custody and the risk of loss
thereof on the date mentioned below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: [description]
2. Date of Completion: [date]
However, you are required to complete the outstanding items listed in the attachment hereto as soon
as practicable.
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities in accord-
ance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Yours faithfully,
_________________________________________________
Title
(Consultant)

Lot 2 - Substations
Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate
Date:
o
Loan/Credit N :
o
IFB N :
[Name of Contract]
To: [Name and address of Contractor]
Dear Sirs,
Pursuant to GC Clause 4.9.6 (Operational Acceptance) of the General Conditions entered into be-
tween yourselves and the Employer dated [date], relating to the [brief description of the Facilities], we
hereby notify you that the Functional Guarantees of the following part(s) of the Facilities were satisfac-
torily attained on the date specified below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: [description]
2. Date of Operational Acceptance: [date]
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities in accord-
ance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Yours faithfully,
Title
(Consultant)

Lot 2 - Substations
Change Order Procedure and Forms
Date:
o
Loan/Credit N :
o
IFB N :
Contents
1. General
2. Change Order Log
3. References for Changes
Annexes
Annex CO-1 . Request for Change Proposal

Annex CO-2 . Estimate for Change Proposal
Annex CO-3 . Acceptance of Estimate
Annex CO-4 . Change Proposal
Annex CO-5 . Change Order
Annex CO-6 . Pending Agreement Change Order
Annex CO-7 . Application for Change Proposal

Lot 2 - Substations
Change Order Procedure
1. General
This section provides samples of procedures and forms for implementing changes in the Facili-
ties during the performance of the Contract in accordance with GC Clause 7.1(Change in the
Facilities) of the General Conditions.
2. Change Order Log
The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date Change Order Log to show the current status of Re-
quests for Change and Changes authorized or pending, as Annex 8. Entries of the Changes in
the Change Order Log shall be made to ensure that the log is up-to-date. The Contractor shall
attach a copy of the current Change Order Log in the monthly progress report to be submitted to
the Employer.
3. References for Changes
(1) Request for Change as referred to in GC Clause 7.1.5 shall be serially numbered
CR-X-nnn.
(2) Estimate for Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 7.1.6 shall be serially num-
bered CN-X-nnn.
(3) Acceptance of Estimate as referred to in GC Clause 7.1.6(a) shall be serially numbered

CA-X-nnn.
(4) Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 7.1.7 shall be serially numbered CP-X-nnn.
(5) Change Order as referred to in GC Clause 7.1.10 shall be serially numbered CO-X-nnn.
Note: (a) Requests for Change issued from the Employer’s Home Office and the Site repre-
sentatives of the Employer shall have the following respective references:
Home Office CR-H-nnn

Site CR-S-nnn
(b) The above number “nnn” is the same for Request for Change, Estimate for
Change Proposal, Acceptance of Estimate, Change Proposal and Change Order.

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-1. Request for Change Proposal
(Employer’s Letterhead)
To: [Contractor’s name and address] Date:
Attention: [Name and title]
Contract Name: [Contract name]

Contract Number: [Contract number]
Dear Sirs,
With reference to the captioned Contract, you are requested to prepare and submit a Change Pro-
posal for the Change noted below in accordance with the following instructions within [number] days of
the date of this letter[or on or before (date)].
1. Title of Change: [Title]
2. Change Request No./Rev.: [Number]
3. Originator of Change: Employer: [Name]

Contractor (by Application for Change Proposal No. [Number]
4. Brief Description of Change: [Description]
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: [Description]
6. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the request of Change:
Drawing No./Document No. Description
7. Detailed conditions or special requirements on the requested Change: [Description]
8. General Terms and Conditions:
(a) Please submit your estimate to us showing what effect the requested Change will have
on the Contract Price.
(b) Your estimate shall include your claim for the additional time, if any, for completion of the
requested Change.
(c) If you have any opinion negative to the adoption of the requested Change in connection
with the conformability to the other provisions of the Contract or the safety of the Plant or
Facilities, please inform us of your opinion in your proposal of revised provisions.

Lot 2 - Substations
(d) Any increase or decrease in the work of the Contractor relating to the services of its per-
sonnel shall be calculated.
(e) You shall not proceed with the execution of the work for the requested Change until we
have accepted and confirmed the amount and nature in writing.
(Employer’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)
(Title of signatory)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-2. Estimate for Change Proposal
(Contractor’s Letterhead)
To: [Employer’s name and address] Date:

Dear Sirs,
With reference to your Request for Change Proposal, we are pleased to notify you of the approximate
cost of preparing the below-referenced Change Proposal, in accordance with GC Clause 7.1.6. We
acknowledge that your agreement to the cost of preparing the Change Proposal, in accordance with
GC Clause 7.1.6(a), is required before estimating the cost for change work.
2. Change Request No./Rev.: [Number]
4. Scheduled Impact of Change: [Description]
5
5. Cost for Preparation of Change Proposal: [Cost]
(a) Engineering (Amount)
(i) Engineer hrs x ______ rate/hr = ________

(ii) Draftsperson hrs x ______ rate/hr = ________
Sub-total hrs ________
Total Engineering Cost ________
(b) Other Cost ______ __
Total Cost (a) + (b)
(Contractor’s Name)
5
Costs shall be in the currencies of the Contract.

Lot 2 - Substations
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-3. Acceptance of Estimate

Dear Sirs,
We hereby accept your Estimate for Change Proposal and agree that you should proceed with the
preparation of the Change Proposal.
2. Change Request No./Rev.: [Request number/revision]
3. Estimate for Change Proposal No./Rev.: [Proposal number/revision]
4. Acceptance of Estimate No./Rev.: [Estimate number/revision]
6. Other Terms and Conditions: In the event that we decide not to order the Change accepted, you
shall be entitled to compensation for the cost of preparation of Change Proposal described in
your Estimate for Change Proposal mentioned in Paragraph 3 above, in accordance with GC
Clause 7.1.10.
(Employer’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name and Title of signatory)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-4. Change Proposal

Dear Sirs,
In response to your Request for Change Proposal No. [Number], we hereby submit our proposal as
follows:
1. Title of Change: [Name]
2. Change Proposal No./Rev.: [Proposal number/revision]

Contractor: [Name]
5. Reasons for Change: [Reason]
6. Facilities and/or Item No. of Equipment related to the requested Change: [Facilities]
7. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
6
8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from Change Proposal:
(Amount)
(a) Direct material
(b) Major construction equipment
(c) Direct field labor (Total hrs)
(d) Subcontracts
(e) Indirect material and labor
6
Costs shall be in the currencies of the Contract.

Lot 2 - Substations
(f) Site supervision
(g) Head office technical staff salaries
Process engineer hrs @ rate/hr

Project engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Equipment engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Procurement hrs @ rate/hr
Draftsperson hrs @ rate/hr
Total hrs
(h) Extraordinary costs (computer, travel, etc.)
(i) Fee for general administration, % of Items
(j) Taxes and customs duties
Total lump sum cost of Change Proposal

[Sum of items (a) to (j)]
Cost to prepare Estimate for Change Proposal

[Amount payable if Change is not accepted]
9. Additional time for Completion required due to Change Proposal
10. Effect on the Functional Guarantees
11. Effect on the other terms and conditions of the Contract
12. Validity of this Proposal: within [Number] days after receipt of this Proposal by the Employer
13. Other terms and conditions of this Change Proposal:
(a) You are requested to notify us of your acceptance, comments or rejection of this detailed
Change Proposal within [Number] days from your receipt of this Proposal.
(b) The amount of any increase and/or decrease shall be taken into account in the adjustment
of the Contract Price.
7
(c) Contractor’s cost for preparation of this Change Proposal:
(Note) This cost shall be reimbursed by the Employer in case of Employer’s withdrawal or rejec-
tion of this Change Proposal without default of the Contractor, in accordance with GC Clause
7.1.10
7
Specify where necessary.

Lot 2 - Substations
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-5. Change Order

Dear Sirs,
We approve the Change Order for the work specified in the Change Proposal (No. [Number]), and
agree to adjust the Contract Price, Time for Completion and/or other conditions of the Contract in ac-
cordance with GC Clause 7.1.10.
2. Change Request No./Rev.: [Request number/revision]
3. Change Order No./Rev.: [Order number/revision]

Contractor: [Name]
5. Authorized Price:
Ref. No.: [Number] Date: [Date]

Foreign currency portion [Amount] plus Local currency portion [Amount]
6. Adjustment of Time for Completion
None Increase [Number] days Decrease [Number] days
7. Other effects, if any
Authorized by: Date:

(Employer)
Accepted by: Date:

(Contractor)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-6. Pending Agreement Change Order
To:[Contractor’s name and address] Date:

Dear Sirs,
We instruct you to carry out the work in the Change Order detailed below in accordance with GC
Clause 7.1.10.
2. Employer’s Request for Change Proposal No./Rev.: [Number/revision] dated: [Date]
3. Contractor’s Change Proposal No./Rev.: [Number/revision] dated: [Date]
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: [Facilities]
6. Reference Drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
7. Adjustment of Time for Completion:
8. Other change in the Contract terms:
9. Other terms and conditions:
(Employer’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex CO-7. Application for Change Proposal

Dear Sirs,
We hereby propose that the work mentioned below be treated as a Change in the Facilities.
2. Application for Change Proposal No./Rev.: [Number/revision] dated: [Date]
4. Reasons for Change:
5. Order of Magnitude Estimation (in the currencies of the Contract):
6. Scheduled Impact of Change:
7. Effect on Functional Guarantees, if any:
8. Appendix:
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Lot 2 - Substations
DRAWINGS
Please refer to the annexes.

Lot 2 - Substations
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
None

Lot 2 - Substations
ANNEXES

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 1-1
Kigoma single line diagram

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 1-2
Kigoma substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 2-1
Gisagara single line diagram

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 2-2
Gisagara substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 3-1
Ngozi single line diagram

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 3-2
Ngozi substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 3-3
Connection to 30 kV grid at Ngozi

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 3-4
30 kV line pole at Ngozi

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 4-1
Single line diagram Gitega

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 4-2
Existing Gitega substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 4-3
Gitega substation (project)

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 4-4
Connection at 110 kV Gitega substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 4-5
Main characteristics of the existing equipment at Gitega substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 4-6
Single line diagram of the existing Gitega substation

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 5
Sections of Gisagara and Ngozi substations

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 6
Control building

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 7
Personnel housing

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 8
Guard house

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 9
Kigoma substation layout

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 10
Soil investigation report

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 11
220 kV Tension string

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 12
N/A

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 13
N/A

Lot 2 - Substations
Annex 14
Updated Environment and Social Management Plan (UESMP) and SEP

Lot 2 - Substations

Lot 2 - SS - Section 6 Requirements - Final - Rev1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lot 2 - SS - Section 6 Requirements - Final - Rev1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Section VI.

Part 2 - Employer’s Requirements

Section VI. Requirements

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

SCOPE OF SUPPLY OF PLANT AND INSTALLATION SERVICES BY THE

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

5.4.2 Civil works 24

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

1.33.2 Format and compilation 65

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

4.6.3 Spare parts 91

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

6.4.3 Auxiliary transformer Switchgear (Burundi) 116

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

9.1.14 Tripping Circuits and supervision of tripping circuits 141

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

11.2.1 Optical fibre transmission equipment 191

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

14.6 Storm Water Drains 220

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table of Contents Page

15.16 Landscaping 245

Annex 1-1 Kigoma single line diagram

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

SCOPE OF SUPPLY OF PLANT AND INSTAL-

1.1 Financing and goals of the project

1.2 Works to be carried out

Table 1: Lot 1 220 kV overhead line, single circuit

Work Financing source

Sub-lot 1R 63.2 km: Kigoma-Gisagara- Burundi Bor- KfW Entwicklungsbank,

Sub-lot 1B 80.1 km: Rwanda Border -Ngozi-Gitega KfW and EU

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Table 2: Lot 2 110 kV and 220 kV substations (4)

Work Financing source

Lot 2R Kigoma (110 kV), and Gisagara KfW

The works to be performed are indicated on the following map:

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

Figure 1: Project area (source Michelin)

++++ State boundary

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

1.3 Limits of works

1.3.1 Transmission line - Substations

Work Substation Overhead line

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

1.3.2.1 Rwandan part (2R):

1.3.2.2 Burundian part (2B)

1.4 Contractor’s obligation to collect project relevant data

Bidding documents - OHL 220 kV Interconnection Burundi-Rwanda

2.1 Site description

• One 110/30 kV transformer bay

The site is represented on following Figure:

Figure 2: Overview of Kigoma substation